mx480 Hwguide

MX480 3D Universal Edge Router Hardware Guide
Modified: 2017-12-18
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Juniper Networks, Inc.
1133 Innovation Way
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net
Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, Juniper, and Junos are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. and/or its affiliates in
the United States and other countries. All other trademarks may be property of their respective owners.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify,
transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.

Copyright © 2017 Juniper Networks, Inc. All rights reserved.
The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through the
year 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use with) Juniper Networks
software. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement (“EULA”) posted at
http://www.juniper.net/support/eula/. By downloading, installing or using such software, you agree to the terms and conditions of that
EULA.
ii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Documentation and Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Supported Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Requesting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Opening a Case with JTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Part 1 Overview
Chapter 1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MX480 Router Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2 MX480 Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter 3 Chassis Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MX480 Chassis Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MX480 Component Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MX480 Craft Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Alarm Relay Contacts on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SCB LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MX480 Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 4 Cooling System Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MX480 Cooling System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MX480 Fan LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. iii

Chapter 5 Host Subsystem Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

MX480 Host Subsystem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MX480 Midplane Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MX480 Routing Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Routing Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Routing Engine Interface Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Routing Engine Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Description for MX Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Boot Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Routing Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
MX480 Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Supported Routing Engines by Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
M7i Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
M10i Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
M40e Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
M120 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
M320 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MX104 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MX2008 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MX2010 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
MX2020 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MX10003 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PTX1000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
T320 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
T640 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
T1600 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
T4000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
TX Matrix Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TX Matrix Plus (with 3D SIBs) Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
iv Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Line Card Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Interface Modules—DPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DPC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Interface Modules—FPCs and MICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
FPC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
MX480 PIC Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
MX480 PIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Interface Modules—MPCs and MICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MIC/MPC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
MICs Supported by MX Series Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MPC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
MX480 AS MLC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
AS MLC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
MX480 SCB, Power Supply, and Cooling System Requirements for AS
MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description . . . . . . . . . . 96
MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description . . . . . . . 97
MX480 AS MSC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
MX480 AS MXC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 7 Power System Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MX480 Power System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
MX480 AC Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AC Power Supply Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
MX480 DC Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
DC Power Supply Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 8 Switch Fabric Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
MX480 SCB Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
SCB Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
SCB Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. v

SCB Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

SCB-MX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
MX480 SCBE Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
MX SCBE Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MX SCBE Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MX SCBE Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MX480 SCBE LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
MX480 SCBE2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
SCBE2 Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SCBE2 Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SCBE2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
MX480 SCBE2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Part 2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

Chapter 9 Preparation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MX480 Router Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MX480 Router Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
MX480 Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
MX480 Router Rack Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rack Size and Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Spacing of Mounting Bracket Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Connection to Building Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
MX480 Chassis Grounding Points Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Chapter 10 Transceiver and Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion . . . . 133
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series
Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 11 Cable and Pinout Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port . . . . 137
RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 12 AC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Power Requirements for an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
vi Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Chapter 13 DC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Power Requirements for an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Part 3 Initial Installation and Configuration

Chapter 14 Unpacking the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Unpacking the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 15 Installing the Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet . . . . . . . 183
Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router . . . . . . 185
Chapter 16 Installing the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installing an MX480 Router Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . 190
Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . . 191
Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . 192
Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . . 193
Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift . . . 196
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . 197
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . 198
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . 199
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift . . . . . . 200
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift . . . . . . . 201
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without
a Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . 204
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. vii

Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . 205
Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . 206
Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without
a Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . 212
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . 213
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift . . . . 214
Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Chapter 17 Connecting the MX480 Router to Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Grounding the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Powering Off the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Chapter 18 Connecting the MX480 Router to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices . . . . . . . . . . 231
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device . . . 233
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management . . . 234
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device . . 235
Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device . . . . . . . 236
Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 19 Initially Configuring the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Initially Configuring the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
viii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Part 4 Installing and Replacing Components

Chapter 20 Overview of Installing and Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components . . . . . . . . 248
Chapter 21 Installing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Installing the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Installing the MX480 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Installing the MX480 Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Installing an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Installing an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Installing an MX480 MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installing an MX480 MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Installing an MX480 PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Installing an MX480 AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Installing an MX480 AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Installing an MX480 AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Installing an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . 285
Chapter 22 Replacing Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . 287
Removing the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Installing the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . 290
Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router . . . . . . . . . 292
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 23 Replacing Cooling System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Replacing the MX480 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Removing the MX480 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Installing the MX480 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Removing the MX480 Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Installing the MX480 Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. ix

Chapter 24 Replacing Host Subsystem Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Removing an MX480 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router . . . . . . 312
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . 312
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host
Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Removing the Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Master . . . . 319
Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Backup . . . . 319
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host
Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Removing the Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Chapter 25 Replacing Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Replacing an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Removing an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Installing an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Replacing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Replacing an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Removing an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Installing an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Replacing an MX480 MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Removing an MX480 MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Installing an MX480 MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Replacing an MX480 MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Removing an MX480 MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Installing an MX480 MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Replacing an MX480 PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Removing an MX480 PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Installing an MX480 PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Replacing an MX480 AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Removing an MX480 AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Installing an MX480 AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Replacing an MX480 AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Removing an MX480 AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Installing an MX480 AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Replacing an MX480 AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Removing an MX480 AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Installing an MX480 AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
x Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
Chapter 26 Replacing Power System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Chapter 27 Replacing Switch Fabric Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Replacing an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Removing an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Installing an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Upgrading an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Preparing for the Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Completing the SCB Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Upgrading an MX480 SCB or SCBE to SCBE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Preparing the MX480 Router for the SCBE2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Powering Off the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Removing an MX480 Routing Engine from an SCB or SCBE . . . . . . . . 396
Replacing the SCB or SCBE with SCBE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine into an SCBE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Powering On the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Completing the SCBE2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC . . . 399
Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or
PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or
PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Upgrading an MX480 SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Preparing for the Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Completing the SCB Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Part 5 Maintaining the Chassis and Components

Chapter 28 Routine Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xi

Chapter 29 Maintaining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Tools and Parts Required to Maintain the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Maintaining MX480 DPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Holding an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Storing an MX480 DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Maintaining MX480 FPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Holding an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Storing an MX480 FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Maintaining MX480 MICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Maintaining MX480 MPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Maintaining MX480 PICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs . . . . . . 434
Maintaining the MX480 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Part 6 Troubleshooting Hardware

Chapter 30 Troubleshooting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Troubleshooting Resources for MX480 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Command-Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Craft Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Component LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Troubleshooting the MX480 DPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Troubleshooting the MX480 Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Part 7 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or

Components
Chapter 31 Contacting Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Contacting Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Chapter 32 Locating Component Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Displaying MX480 Router Components and Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
MX480 SCB Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
MX480 DPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
MX480 FPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
MX480 MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
MX480 MPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
MX480 PIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
xii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table of Contents
MX480 Power Supply Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

MX480 Routing Engine Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chapter 33 Packing and Returning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization . . . . . . . 473
Guidelines for Packing Hardware Components for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Returning a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Packing the MX480 Router for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Part 8 Safety and Compliance Information

Chapter 34 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Qualified Personnel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Fire Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Fire Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Fire Suppression Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Chapter 35 Installation and Maintenance Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . 487
Installation Instructions Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
MX480 Chassis Lifting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Ramp Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Grounded Equipment Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Chapter 36 Radiation and Laser Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
General Laser Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Class 1 Laser Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Class 1 LED Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Laser Beam Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Chapter 37 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . 499
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Battery Handling Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Jewelry Removal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Lightning Activity Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Operating Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Product Disposal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Chapter 38 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
AC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
DC Power Copper Conductors Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
DC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xiii

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Midplane Energy Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Action to Take After an Electrical Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Chapter 39 Agency Approvals and Compliance Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Agency Approvals for MX480 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Compliance Statements for NEBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . 521
xiv Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures
Part 1 Overview
Figure 1: Front View of a Fully Configured Router Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 2: Rear View of a Fully Configured AC-Powered Router Chassis . . . . . . . . . 10
Figure 3: Rear View of a Fully Configured DC-Powered Router Chassis . . . . . . . . . . 11
Figure 4: Front Panel of the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Figure 5: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Figure 6: Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 7: Cable Management Brackets Installed on the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 4 Cooling System Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 8: Airflow Through the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 9: Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 10: Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Figure 11: Midplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 12: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 13: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 14: RE-S-X6-64G-LT Routing Engine Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 15: RE-S-1800 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 16: Routing Engine–RE-S-1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 17: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 18: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 19: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 20: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 21: Typical DPCs Supported on the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 22: DPC Installed Horizontally in the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 23: MX480 DPC Interface Port Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 24: FPC Installed in the MX480 Router Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 25: Typical FPCs Supported on the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 26: MX480 PIC Interface Port Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 27: MX480 MIC Interface Port Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 28: Typical MPC Supported on the MX Series Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 29: MPC Installed Horizontally in the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 30: Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 31: Application Services Modular Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 32: Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC) . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xv

Figure 33: AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Figure 34: High-Capacity AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 35: DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 36: High-Capacity DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Figure 37: SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 38: MX SCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 39: SCBE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 40: Typical Open-Frame Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 41: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
an MX480 Router Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 42: Airflow Through the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 43: Connecting AC Power to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 44: Connecting DC Power to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 45: Grounding Cable Lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 46: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 47: Typical DC Source Cabling to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 48: DC Power Cable Lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Figure 49: Contents of the Shipping Crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 50: Installing the Front-Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or
Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 51: Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack . . . . . . . . 185
Chapter 16 Installing the MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Figure 52: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 53: Removing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 54: Removing an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 55: Removing a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 56: Removing an FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 57: Installing the Router in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 58: Reinstalling a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 59: Reinstalling a Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 60: Reinstalling an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 61: Reinstalling a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 62: Reinstalling an FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 63: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router . . . . . . . . . . . 203
xvi Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures
Figure 64: Removing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Figure 65: Removing an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 66: Removing a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 68: Installing the Router in the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 69: Reinstalling a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 70: Reinstalling a Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 71: Reinstalling an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 72: Reinstalling a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 73: Reinstalling an FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 74: Installing the Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Chapter 17 Connecting the MX480 Router to Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 75: Connecting AC Power to the Router (110V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 76: Connecting DC Power to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 77: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Chapter 18 Connecting the MX480 Router to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 78: Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 79: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 80: Auxiliary and Console Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 81: Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 82: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 84: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 86: Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 88: Attaching a Cable to a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 89: Attaching a Cable to a MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Chapter 21 Installing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Figure 91: Installing the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Figure 92: Installing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Figure 93: Installing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Figure 94: Installing a Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Figure 95: Installing a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Figure 97: Installing an FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 98: Installing the Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 99: Installing a MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 100: Removing the Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 101: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Figure 102: Installing an MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Figure 103: Installing a PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 104: Installing an AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 105: Installing an AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xvii

Figure 106: Installing an AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Figure 107: Installing an AC Power Supply in an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 108: Installing a DC Power Supply in the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 109: Connecting DC Power to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Figure 110: Installing an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Chapter 22 Replacing Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 112: Removing the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 113: Installing the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 114: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 115: Removing the Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 116: Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 23 Replacing Cooling System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 119: Removing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 120: Installing the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 121: Removing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 122: Installing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Chapter 24 Replacing Host Subsystem Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 123: Removing a Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Figure 124: Installing a Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Figure 125: RE-S-1800 Storage Drive Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 126: RE-S-X6-64G Storage Drive Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 127: Removing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G . . . . . . . . . . 308
Figure 128: Installing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 129: Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 131: Auxiliary and Console Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Figure 132: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX240 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 133: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Figure 134: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX960 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 135: Installing a Routing Engine in an MX240 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Chapter 25 Replacing Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Figure 138: Removing a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 139: Installing a DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 142: Installing an FPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 143: Removing a MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 144: Removing a Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Figure 145: Installing the Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Figure 146: Installing a MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Figure 147: Removing the Septum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
xviii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Figures
Figure 148: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Figure 149: Removing an MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Figure 150: Installing an MPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 151: Removing a PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Figure 152: Installing a PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 153: Removing an AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 154: Installing an AS MLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 155: Removing an AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 156: Installing an AS MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 157: Removing an AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 158: Installing an AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Chapter 26 Replacing Power System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 159: Removing an AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 160: Installing an AC Power Supply in an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Figure 161: Removing a DC Power Supply from the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Figure 162: Installing a DC Power Supply in the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 163: Connecting DC Power to the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Figure 164: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 27 Replacing Switch Fabric Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Figure 165: Removing an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Figure 166: Installing an SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Figure 167: Removing SFPs or XFPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Part 5 Maintaining the Chassis and Components

Chapter 29 Maintaining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Figure 168: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Figure 169: Do Not Rest the DPC on an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Figure 170: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Figure 171: Do Not Carry an FPC with Only One Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Figure 172: Do Not Rest the FPC on an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Figure 173: Do Not Stack FPCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Part 6 Troubleshooting Hardware

Chapter 30 Troubleshooting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Figure 174: MX480 High-Capacity DC Power Supply Input Mode Switch. . . . . . . 452
Part 7 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or

Components
Chapter 32 Locating Component Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Figure 175: Serial Number ID Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Figure 176: MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Figure 177: SCB Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Figure 178: DPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Figure 179: FPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Figure 180: 2-Port MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 181: 4-Port MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xix

Figure 182: 20-Port MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Figure 183: 40-Port MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 184: MPC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Figure 185: PIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Figure 186: AC Power Supply Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 187: DC Power Supply Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Figure 188: Routing Engine Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Figure 189: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Part 8 Safety and Compliance Information

Chapter 34 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Figure 190: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Chapter 38 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Figure 191: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
xx Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Tables
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Table 1: Notice Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Part 1 Overview
Chapter 1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table 3: MX480 Router Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table 4: SCB Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2 MX480 Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table 5: Host Subsystem OFFLINE LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 6: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 7: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 8: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 9: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 10: DPC and MPC LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 11: FPC LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 12: SCB LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 13: Fan LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 14: Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 15: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 16: Routing Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 17: End-of-Life Routing Engine Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 18: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Table 19: Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 20: M7i Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 21: M10i Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 22: M40e Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 23: M120 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 24: M320 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 25: MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 26: MX104 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 27: MX240 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 30: MX2008 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxi

Table 32: MX2020 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Table 33: MX10003 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 34: PTX1000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 35: PTX3000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 36: PTX5000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 37: T320 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 38: T640 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 39: T1600 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 40: T4000 Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 41: TX Matrix Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 42: TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 43: Routing Engines on TX Matrix Plus with 3D SIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 44: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers . . . . . . . . . . 60
Table 45: FPCs Supported by MX Series Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 46: PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 47: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 49: MPC/MPC3 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 53: MIC/MPC10003 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 54: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers . . 80
Table 55: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 56: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 57: MICs Supported by MX80 and MX104 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Table 58: MICs Supported by MX10003 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Table 59: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010,
MX2020, and MX10003 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 60: AS MSC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Table 61: AS MXC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 62: AC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Table 63: Power Supply Redundancy and Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 64: DC Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 65: SCB-MX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 66: MX SCBE LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 67: SCBE2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Table 68: Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 69: Router Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 70: Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
xxii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

List of Tables
Table 71: Grounding Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Chapter 10 Transceiver and Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Table 72: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table 73: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine and RCB Management
and Alarm Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Chapter 11 Cable and Pinout Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 74: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port . . . . . 137
Table 75: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the AUX and CONSOLE Ports . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 76: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 77: AC Power System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 78: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements . . . . . . . . 140
Table 79: FRU Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 80: MX480 DC Zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 81: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Table 82: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 83: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 DC Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 84: Calculating Input Power Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 85: Calculating Thermal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 86: AC Power Cord Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 87: Power Supply Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 88: Power System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Table 89: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements . . . . . . . . 159
Table 90: FRU Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 91: MX480 DC Zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table 92: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Table 93: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 94: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 DC Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 95: Calculating Input Power Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Table 96: Calculating Thermal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Table 97: DC Power Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Table 98: Parts List for a Fully Configured Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Table 99: Accessory Box Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Table 100: Four-Post Rack or Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Chapter 20 Overview of Installing and Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Table 101: Field-Replaceable Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Table 102: Tools and Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxiii

xxiv Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

About the Documentation
• Documentation and Release Notes on page xxv

• Supported Platforms on page xxv
• Documentation Conventions on page xxv
• Documentation Feedback on page xxvii
• Requesting Technical Support on page xxviii
Documentation and Release Notes

®
To obtain the most current version of all Juniper Networks technical documentation,
see the product documentation page on the Juniper Networks website at
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/.
If the information in the latest release notes differs from the information in the
documentation, follow the product Release Notes.
Juniper Networks Books publishes books by Juniper Networks engineers and subject
matter experts. These books go beyond the technical documentation to explore the
nuances of network architecture, deployment, and administration. The current list can
be viewed at http://www.juniper.net/books.
Supported Platforms
For the features described in this document, the following platforms are supported:
• MX480
Documentation Conventions
Table 1 on page xxvi defines notice icons used in this guide.
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxv

Table 1: Notice Icons

Icon Meaning Description
Informational note Indicates important features or instructions.
Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage.
Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.
Laser warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
Tip Indicates helpful information.
Best practice Alerts you to a recommended use or implementation.
Table 2 on page xxvi defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide.
Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions

Convention Description Examples
Bold text like this Represents text that you type. To enter configuration mode, type the
configure command:
user@host> configure
Fixed-width text like this Represents output that appears on the user@host> show chassis alarms
terminal screen.
No alarms currently active
Italic text like this • Introduces or emphasizes important • A policy term is a named structure
new terms. that defines match conditions and
• Identifies guide names. actions.
• Junos OS CLI User Guide
• Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles.
• RFC 1997, BGP Communities Attribute
Italic text like this Represents variables (options for which Configure the machine’s domain name:
you substitute a value) in commands or
configuration statements. [edit]
root@# set system domain-name
domain-name
xxvi Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued)

Convention Description Examples
Text like this Represents names of configuration • To configure a stub area, include the
statements, commands, files, and stub statement at the [edit protocols
directories; configuration hierarchy levels; ospf area area-id] hierarchy level.
or labels on routing platform • The console port is labeled CONSOLE.
components.
< > (angle brackets) Encloses optional keywords or variables. stub <default-metric metric>;
| (pipe symbol) Indicates a choice between the mutually broadcast | multicast

exclusive keywords or variables on either
side of the symbol. The set of choices is (string1 | string2 | string3)
often enclosed in parentheses for clarity.
# (pound sign) Indicates a comment specified on the rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only
same line as the configuration statement
to which it applies.
[ ] (square brackets) Encloses a variable for which you can community name members [
substitute one or more values. community-ids ]
Indention and braces ( { } ) Identifies a level in the configuration [edit]

hierarchy. routing-options {
static {
route default {
; (semicolon) Identifies a leaf statement at a
nexthop address;
configuration hierarchy level.
retain;
}
}
}
GUI Conventions
Bold text like this Represents graphical user interface (GUI) • In the Logical Interfaces box, select
items you click or select. All Interfaces.
• To cancel the configuration, click
Cancel.
> (bold right angle bracket) Separates levels in a hierarchy of menu In the configuration editor hierarchy,
selections. select Protocols>Ospf.
Documentation Feedback
We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can

improve the documentation. You can provide feedback by using either of the following
methods:
• Online feedback rating system—On any page of the Juniper Networks TechLibrary site
at http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/index.html, simply click the stars to rate the content,
and use the pop-up form to provide us with information about your experience.
Alternately, you can use the online feedback form at
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/feedback/.
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxvii

• E-mail—Send your comments to [email protected]. Include the document

or topic name, URL or page number, and software version (if applicable).
Requesting Technical Support
Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or Partner Support Service
support contract, or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support,
you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.
• JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,

review the JTAC User Guide located at
http://www.juniper.net/us/en/local/pdf/resource-guides/7100059-en.pdf.
• Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit

http://www.juniper.net/support/warranty/.
• JTAC hours of operation—The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year.
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources

For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online
self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides you with the
following features:
• Find CSC offerings: http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/
• Search for known bugs: https://prsearch.juniper.net/
• Find product documentation: http://www.juniper.net/documentation/
• Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base: http://kb.juniper.net/
• Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:

http://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/software/
• Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:

http://kb.juniper.net/InfoCenter/
• Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:

http://www.juniper.net/company/communities/
• Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
To verify service entitlement by product serial number, use our Serial Number Entitlement
(SNE) Tool: https://entitlementsearch.juniper.net/entitlementsearch/
Opening a Case with JTAC

You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone.
• Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http://www.juniper.net/cm/.
• Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).
xxviii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see

http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxix

xxx Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

PART 1
Overview
• System Overview on page 3
• MX480 Release Notes on page 5
• Chassis Components and Descriptions on page 9
• Cooling System Components and Descriptions on page 21
• Host Subsystem Components and Descriptions on page 25
• Line Card Components and Descriptions on page 55
• Power System Components and Descriptions on page 99
• Switch Fabric Components and Descriptions on page 107
Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. 1

2 Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

CHAPTER 1
System Overview
• MX480 Router Description on page 3
MX480 Router Description
The MX480 3D Universal Edge Router is an Ethernet-optimized edge router that provides
both switching and carrier-class Ethernet routing. The MX480 router enables a wide
range of business and residential applications and services, including high-speed transport
and VPN services, next-generation broadband multiplay services, high-speed Internet
and data center internetworking.
The MX480 chassis provides redundancy and resiliency. The hardware system is fully
redundant, including power supplies, Routing Engines, and Switch Control Boards (SCBs).
The MX480 router is eight rack units (U) tall. Five routers can be stacked in a single
floor-to-ceiling rack, for increased port density per unit of floor space. The router provides
eight slots that can be populated with up to six Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) or
Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs), three Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), and two
SCBs. See Table 4 on page 4 for the supported SCBs. Each FPC holds up to two PICs
and each MPC holds up to two Modular Interface Cards (MICs).
Fully populated, the MX480 router provides an aggregate switch fabric capacity of up
to 5.76 Tbps and line-rate throughput for up to 240 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports, or 24
100-Gigabit Ethernet, or 72 40-Gigabit Ethernet ports.
Table 3 on page 3 lists the MX480 router capacity.
Table 3: MX480 Router Capacity

Description Capacity
System capacity 5.76 Tbps half duplex
Switch fabric capacity per slot 480 Gbps
MPCs and DPCs per chassis 6
Chassis per rack 6

Each DPC includes either two or four Packet Forwarding Engines. Each Packet Forwarding
Engine enables a throughput of 10 Gbps. Many types of DPCs are available. For a list of
the DPCs supported, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
The MX480 supports up to 3 FPCs containing up to 6 PICs or up to 6 MPCs containing

up to 12 MICs. For a list of the supported line cards, see the MX Series Interface Module
Reference.
Three SCBs are available for the MX480 routers—the SCB, the SCBE, and the SCBE2.
Table 4 on page 4 lists the MX480 SCBs.
Table 4: SCB Comparison

Model Number Description Switch Fabric Capacity
SCBE2- MX-BB Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE2) 5.76 Tbps (half-duplex)
SCBE-MX-BB Enhanced Switch Control Board (SCBE) 2.72 Tbps
SCB-MX-BB Switch Control Board (SCB) 1.44 Tbps
The connections between DPCs, FPCs, MPCs, and SCBs are organized in three groups:
• Switch fabric—Connects the interface cards and provides for packet transport between
DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs.
• Control plane—Gigabit Ethernet links between the combined SCBs/Routing Engines

and each DPC, FPC, or MPC. All board-to-board information is passed over Ethernet
except for low-level status and commands.
• Management signals—Provide for low-level status diagnostic support.
Related • MX480 Component Redundancy on page 11

Documentation
• MX480 Chassis Description on page 9
• MX480 Host Subsystem Description on page 25
• MX480 Craft Interface Description on page 14
• MX480 Power System Description on page 99
• MX480 Cooling System Description on page 21
• MX480 Router Physical Specifications on page 119

CHAPTER 2
MX480 Release Notes
• Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router on page 5

• Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation on page 6
Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router
This topic lists outstanding hardware issues with the MX480 3D Universal Edge router.
For information about software issues, see the Junos OS Release Notes.
• In Junos OS Release 10.0R2, if a third AC supply is inserted in an empty slot (even

though the power supply is turned off and the AC cord is not plugged in), the operational
power supplies’ output voltage reading in the Junos OS can show an inaccurate number
(60-61V instead of 57V) under some conditions, such as when the load is nearly 100%
and the operating temperature exceeds 40C.
• There is an input mode switch on each MX480 DC high capacity power supply, covered
by a small plate. The input mode switch tells the system what capacity feed is
connected (60A or 70A), which in turn is used for power inventory management When
the input mode switch is set to '0' (zero): expect 60A feeds, with a voltage range of
-39V to -72VDC. When the input mode switch is set to '1' (one), expect 70A feeds or
60A feed with minimum voltage range 42V and up. The default setting is 1
In Junos OS Releases 10.0R3, 10.1R2, and 10.2R1, the MX480 DC high capacity power
supply input mode switch is not operating as expected, though this has no effect on
the power supply operations, it will generate alarms incorrectly. [PR532230]
NOTE:
• All supplies should have the same feed setting.
• Correct usage of the feed setting is required for all supplies in order to
get the desired power inventory management.
• Juniper Networks strongly recommends that you install Junos OS Release 8.4R2 or
later before deploying the MX480 router into service.

• The XFP cages and optics on the MX480 router are industry standard parts that have
limited tactile feedback for insertion of optics and fiber. You need to insert the optics
and fiber firmly until the latch is securely in place. [PR/98055]
• Do not mix AC and DC power supplies on an MX480 router. Mixing of AC supplies and
DC supplies may damage your chassis. [PR/233340]
Related • Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation on page 6

Documentation
Errata with the MX480 Router Documentation
This topic lists outstanding documentation issues:
• The shut-down voltage and start-up voltages as stated in the following note in the
MX480 hardware guides and MX480 Quick Start are not correct under all
circumstances: [PR/273771]
NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below –36.5
to –38.5 VDC, the router automatically shuts down. During automatic
shutdown, the circuit remains active. When the input voltage returns to
–40.0 to –41.0 VDC, the router automatically starts up again and the system
returns to normal operation within 30 minutes. No operator intervention
is required.
• For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be
unrestricted. Allow at least 8 in. (20.3 cm) of clearance between side-cooled routers.
Allow 5.5 in. (14 cm) between the side of the chassis and any non-heat-producing
surface such as a wall. [PR/258887]
• When installing the router without a mechanical lift, remove and reinstall components
from the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front. Components should be
removed and reinstalled in the following order: power supplies, fan tray, SCBs, and
DPCs.[PR/265034]
• Replace the air filter, located at the left rear of the router, every 6 months for optimum
cooling system performance.
• Two threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the upper rear of the chassis for
connecting the router to earth ground. The grounding points fit UNC 1/4–20 screws
(American).
• The mounting shelf should be installed on the back of the rail as described in the MX480
3D Universal Edge Router Hardware Guide.
• After installing a DC power cable or AC power cord, route the power cable or power
cord along the cable restraint towards the left or right corner of the chassis. If needed,
thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the openings on the cable
restraint to hold the power cord or cables in place.
• Table 5 on page 7 describes the functions of the host subsystem OFFLINE LED.

Chapter 2: MX480 Release Notes
Table 5: Host Subsystem OFFLINE LED

Label Color State Description
OFFLINE Red On steadily Host is installed but the Routing Engine is offline.
Off Host is not installed.
Related • Outstanding Issues with the MX480 Router on page 5

Documentation


CHAPTER 3
Chassis Components and Descriptions

• MX480 Component Redundancy on page 11
• MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping on page 12
• Alarm Relay Contacts on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 15
• Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft
Interface on page 15
• MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface on page 16
• MX480 Cable Management Brackets on page 19
MX480 Chassis Description
The router chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router
components (see Figure 1 on page 10, Figure 2 on page 10, and Figure 3 on page 11). The
chassis measures 14.0 in. (35.6 cm) high, 17.45 in. (44.3 cm) wide, and 24.5 in. (62.2 cm)
deep (from the front to the rear of the chassis). The chassis installs in standard 800-mm
(or larger) enclosed cabinets, 19-in. equipment racks, or telco open-frame racks. Up to
five routers can be installed in one standard 48-U rack if the rack can handle their
combined weight, which can be greater than 818 lb (371.0 kg).

Figure 1: Front View of a Fully Configured Router Chassis
Figure 2: Rear View of a Fully Configured AC-Powered Router Chassis

Chapter 3: Chassis Components and Descriptions
Figure 3: Rear View of a Fully Configured DC-Powered Router Chassis
Related • MX480 Router Description on page 3

Documentation
• MX480 Midplane Description on page 26
MX480 Component Redundancy
A fully configured router is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the entire
system to fail. Only a fully configured router provides complete redundancy. All other
configurations provide partial redundancy. The following major hardware components
are redundant:
• Host subsystem—The host subsystem consists of a Routing Engine functioning together

with an SCB. The router can have one or two host subsystems. If two host subsystems
are installed, one functions as the master and the other functions as the backup. If the
master host subsystem (or either of its components) fails, the backup can take over
as the master. To operate, each host subsystem requires a Routing Engine installed
directly into in an SCB.
If the Routing Engines are configured for graceful switchover, the backup Routing Engine
automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with the master Routing Engine.
Any update to the master Routing Engine state is replicated on the backup Routing
Engine. If the backup Routing Engine assumes mastership, packet forwarding continues
through the router without interruption. For more information about graceful switchover,
see the Junos OS Administration Library.
• Power supplies—In the low-line (110 V) AC power configuration, the router contains
three or four AC power supplies, located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots

PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all
components in the router. When three power supplies are present, they share power
almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full
power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies
instantly assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Three power supplies
provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router is
operational.
In the high-line (220 V) AC power configuration, the router contains two or four AC
power supplies located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through
PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components in the
router. When two or more power supplies are present, they share power almost equally
within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy.
If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume
the entire electrical load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum
configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational.
In the DC configuration, two power supplies are required to supply power to a fully
configured router. One power supply supports approximately half of the components
in the router, and the other power supply supports the remaining components. The
addition of two power supplies provides full power redundancy. If one power supply
fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume the entire electrical
load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration
with full power for as long as the router is operational.
• Cooling system—The cooling system has redundant components, which are controlled
by the host subsystem. If one of the fans fails, the host subsystem increases the speed
of the remaining fans to provide sufficient cooling for the router indefinitely.

Documentation
MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping
The MX480 router supports the components in Table 6 on page 12.
Table 6: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology

Component Hardware Model Number CLI Name Description
Chassis CHAS-BP-MX480 MX480 “MX480 Router Physical

Specifications” on page 119
“MX480 Chassis Description” on

page 9
Craft Interface Panel CRAFT-MX480-S Front Panel Display “MX480 Craft Interface
Description” on page 14
Cooling System

Table 6: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology (continued)

Fan tray FFANTRAY-MX480 Left Fan tray “MX480 Cooling System

High-capacity fan tray FFANTRAY-MX480-HC Enhanced Left Fan Tray
Filter kit FLTR-KIT-MX480 N/A
Host Subsystem “MX480 Host Subsystem

Routing Engine See “Supported Routing Engines by Router” on page 40. “MX480 Routing Engine
SCB SCB-MX960 MX SCB “MX480 SCB Description” on

page 107
SCBE-MX Enhanced MX SCB
Interface Modules
DPC See “DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers” “MX480 Dense Port Concentrator
on page 60 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference. (DPC) Description” on page 55
FPC MX-FPC2 MX FPC Type 2 “MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator

(FPC) Description” on page 63
MX-FPC3 MX FPC Type 3
MIC See “MICs Supported by MX Series Routers” on page 80 in the “MX480 Modular Interface Card
MX Series Interface Module Reference. (MIC) Description” on page 76
MPC See “MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers” on page 90 in the “MX480 Modular Port
MX Series Interface Module Reference. Concentrator (MPC) Description”
on page 87
PIC See “PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers” “MX480 PIC Description” on
on page 68 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference. page 66
Interface module blank DPC-SCB-BLANK N/A

panel
MIC-BLANK
Transceiver See MX Series Interface Xcvr “Installing an SFP or XFP

Module Reference Transceiver into an MX480 DPC,
MPC, MIC, or PIC” on page 285
Power System “MX480 Power System


Table 6: MX480 Router Hardware Components and CLI Terminology (continued)

AC power supply PWR-MX480-AC AC Power Entry Module “MX480 AC Power Supply

PWR-MX480-1200-AC PS 1.2-1.7kW 100-240V AC
in
PWR-MX480-2520-AC PS 1.4-2.52kW; 90-264V AC

in
DC power supply PWR-MX480-DC DC Power Entry Module “MX480 DC Power Supply

PWR-MX480-1600-DC DC Power Entry Module
PWR-MX480-2400-DC DC 2.4kW Power Entry

Module
Power supply blank PWR-BLANK-MX480 N/A “MX480 Power System

panel Description” on page 99

Documentation
• MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering on page 57
• MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering on page 77
• MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering on page 66
• MX Series Router Interface Names
MX480 Craft Interface Description
The craft interface allows you to view status and troubleshooting information at a glance
and to perform many system control functions. It is hot-insertable and hot-removable.
The craft interface is located on the front of the router above the card cage and contains
LEDs for the router components, the alarm relay contacts, and alarm cutoff button. See
Figure 4 on page 14.
Figure 4: Front Panel of the Craft Interface

NOTE: At least one SCB must be installed in the router for the craft interface
to obtain power.
Related • Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface on
Documentation page 15
Alarm Relay Contacts on the MX480 Craft Interface
The craft interface has two alarm relay contacts for connecting the router to external
alarm devices (see Figure 5 on page 15). Whenever a system condition triggers either
the red or yellow alarm on the craft interface, the alarm relay contacts are also activated.
The alarm relay contacts are located on the upper right of the craft interface.
Figure 5: Alarm Relay Contacts
Related • MX480 Craft Interface Description on page 14

Documentation
• Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface on
page 15
Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface
Two large alarm LEDs are located at the upper right of the craft interface. The circular
red LED lights to indicate a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown. The
triangular yellow LED lights to indicate a less severe condition that requires monitoring
or maintenance. Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously.
A condition that causes an LED to light also activates the corresponding alarm relay
contact on the craft interface.
To deactivate red and yellow alarms, press the button labeled ACO/LT (for “alarm
cutoff/lamp test”), which is located to the right of the alarm LEDs. Deactivating an alarm
turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached to the corresponding alarm
relay contact on the craft interface.
Table 7 on page 16 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more detail.

Table 7: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button

Shape Color State Description
Red On steadily Critical alarm LED—Indicates a critical condition that

can cause the router to stop functioning. Possible
causes include component removal, failure, or
overheating.
Yellow On steadily Warning alarm LED—Indicates a serious but nonfatal

error condition, such as a maintenance alert or a
significant increase in component temperature.
– – Alarm cutoff/lamp test button—Deactivates red and

yellow alarms. Causes all LEDs on the craft interface
to light (for testing) when pressed and held.

Documentation
MX480 Component LEDs on the Craft Interface
• Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 16

• Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 17
• DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 17
• FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 17
• SCB LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 18
• Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 18
Host Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

Each host subsystem has three LEDs, located on the upper left of the craft interface, that
indicate its status. The LEDs labeled RE0 show the status of the Routing Engine in slot
0 and the SCB in slot 0. The LEDs labeled RE1 show the status of the Routing Engine and
SCB in slot 1. Table 5 on page 7 describes the functions of the host subsystem LEDs on
the craft interface.
Table 8: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface

MASTER Green On steadily Host is functioning as the master.
ONLINE Green On steadily Host is online and is functioning normally.

Table 8: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface (continued)

OFFLINE Red On steadily Host is installed but the Routing Engine is offline.
– Off Host is not installed.
Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

Each power supply has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The LEDs,
labeled 0 through 3, are located on the upper left of the craft interface next to the PEM
label. Table 9 on page 17 describes the functions of the power supply LEDs on the craft
interface.
Table 9: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface

PEM Green On steadily Power supply is functioning normally.
Red On steadily Power supply has failed or power input has failed.
DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

Each DPC or MPC has LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The LEDs,
labeled 0 through 5, are located along the bottom of the craft interface.
Table 10 on page 17 describes the functions of the LEDs.
Table 10: DPC and MPC LEDs on the Craft Interface

OK Green On steadily Card is functioning normally.
Blinking Card is transitioning online or offline.
– Off The slot is not online.
FAIL Red On steadily Card has failed.
FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

An FPC takes up two DPC slots when installed in an MX Series router. The LEDs, labeled
0 through 5, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. The LED corresponds
to the lowest DPC slot number in which the FPC is installed. Table 11 on page 18 describes
the functions of the FPC LEDs.

Table 11: FPC LEDs on the Craft Interface

OK Green On steadily FPC is functioning normally.
Blinking FPC is transitioning online or offline.
FAIL Red On steadily FPC has failed.
SCB LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

Each SCB has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicates its status. The SCB LEDs,
labeled 0 and 1, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. Table 12 on page 18
describes the functions of the SCB LEDs.
Table 12: SCB LEDs on the Craft Interface

OK Green On steadily SCB: Fabric and control board functioning normally.
Blinking SCB is transitioning online or offline.
FAIL Red On steadily SCB has failed.
Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface

The fan LEDs are located on the top left of the craft interface. Table 13 on page 18
describes the functions of the fan LEDs.
Table 13: Fan LEDs on the Craft Interface

FAN Green On steadily Fan is functioning normally.
Red On steadily Fan has failed.

Documentation
page 15

MX480 Cable Management Brackets
The cable management brackets (see Figure 6 on page 19 and Figure 7 on page 19)
consist of plastic dividers located on the left and right sides of each DPC, FPC, or MPC
slot, and SCB slot. The cable management brackets allow you to route the cables outside
the router and away from the DPCs, MPCs, MICs, PICs, and SCBs.
Figure 6: Cable Management Brackets
Figure 7: Cable Management Brackets Installed on the Router
Related • Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs on page 434
Documentation
• Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets on page 291


CHAPTER 4
Cooling System Components and

Descriptions

• MX480 Fan LED on page 23
MX480 Cooling System Description
The cooling system consists of the following components:
• Fan tray
• Air filter
The cooling system components work together to keep all router components within the
acceptable temperature range (see Figure 8 on page 21, Figure 9 on page 22, and
Figure 10 on page 22). The router has one fan tray and one air filter that install vertically
in the rear of the router. The fan tray contains six fans. The MX Series high-capacity fan
trays satisfy cooling requirements for high-density DPCs and MPCs, and must be upgraded
for proper cooling.
The air intake to cool the chassis is located on the side of the chassis next to the air filter.
Air is pulled through the chassis toward the fan tray, where it is exhausted out the side
of the system. The air intake to cool the power supplies is located in the front of the router
above the craft interface. The exhaust for the power supplies is located on the rear
bulkhead power supplies.
Figure 8: Airflow Through the Chassis

The host subsystem monitors the temperature of the router components. When the
router is operating normally, the fans function at lower than full speed. If a fan fails or
the ambient temperature rises above a threshold, the speed of the remaining fans is
automatically adjusted to keep the temperature within the acceptable range. If the
ambient maximum temperature specification is exceeded and the system cannot be
adequately cooled, the Routing Engine shuts down the system by disabling output power
from each power supply.
Figure 9: Fan Tray
Figure 10: Air Filter

Chapter 4: Cooling System Components and Descriptions
Related • MX480 Fan LED on page 23

Documentation
• Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter on page 415
• Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray on page 416
• Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System on page 442
MX480 Fan LED
Each fan has an LED that displays its status. The fan LEDs are located on the top left of
the craft interface. For more information, see “Fan LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface”
on page 18.
Related • MX480 Cooling System Description on page 21

Documentation


CHAPTER 5
Host Subsystem Components and

Descriptions

• MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs on page 26
• MX480 Midplane Description on page 26
• MX480 Routing Engine Description on page 27
• RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Description for MX Series on page 29
• RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs on page 31
• RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description on page 32
• RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs on page 34
• Routing Engine Specifications on page 35
• MX480 Routing Engine LEDs on page 38
• Supported Routing Engines by Router on page 40
MX480 Host Subsystem Description
The host subsystem provides the routing and system management functions of the
router. You can install one or two host subsystems on the router. Each host subsystem
functions as a unit; the Routing Engine must be installed directly into the Switch Control
Board.
NOTE: We recommend that you install two host subsystems for redundant
protection. If you install only one host subsystem, we recommend that you
install it in slot 0.
Each host subsystem has three LEDs that display its status. The host subsystem LEDs
are located in the middle of the craft interface.
Related • MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs on page 26

Documentation
• Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem on page 418
• Taking an MX480 Host Subsystem Offline

MX480 Host Subsystem LEDs
Each host subsystem has three LEDs that display its status. The host subsystem LEDs
are located on the upper left of the craft interface. For more information, see “Host
Subsystem LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface” on page 16.
Related • MX480 Host Subsystem Description on page 25

Documentation
MX480 Midplane Description
The midplane is located toward the rear of the chassis and forms the rear of the card
cage (see Figure 11 on page 26). The line cards and SCBs install into the midplane from
the front of the chassis, and the power supplies install into the midplane from the rear
of the chassis. The cooling system components also connect to the midplane.
The midplane performs the following major functions:
• Data path—Data packets are transferred across the midplane between the line cards
through the fabric ASICs on the SCBs.
• Power distribution—The router power supplies connect to the midplane, which

distributes power to all the router components.
• Signal path—The midplane provides the signal path to the line cards, SCBs, Routing
Engines, and other system components for monitoring and control of the system.
Figure 11: Midplane

Chapter 5: Host Subsystem Components and Descriptions

Documentation
• MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description on page 55
• MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description on page 87
• MX480 SCB Description on page 107
• MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description on page 63
MX480 Routing Engine Description
The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PC platform that runs Junos OS. Software processes
that run on the Routing Engine maintain the routing tables, manage the routing protocols
used on the router, control the router interfaces, control some chassis components, and
provide the interface for system management and user access to the router.
You can install one or two Routing Engines in the router. The Routing Engines install into
the front of the chassis in horizontal slots in the SCBs labeled 0 and 1. If two Routing
Engines are installed, one functions as the master and the other acts as the backup. If
the master Routing Engine fails or is removed, and the backup is configured appropriately,
the backup takes over as the master.
The Routing Engines are hot-pluggable. Each Routing Engine must be installed directly
into an SCB. A USB port on the Routing Engine accepts a USB memory card that allows
you to load Junos OS. Figure 12 on page 27 shows RE-S-1800 Routing Engine and
Figure 13 on page 28 shows the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine.
Figure 12: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine

Figure 13: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View
1— Extractor clips 6—ONLINE/OFFLINE Button
2— Auxiliary port (AUX) 7— SSD LEDs—DISK1 and DISK2
3— Console port (Con) 8—Ports—USB1 and USB2
4— Management port (MGMT) 9—RESET Button
5— LEDs—ONLINE, OK/FAIL, and MASTER 10—SSD card slot cover
Figure 14: RE-S-X6-64G-LT Routing Engine Front View
1— Extractor clips 6—ONLINE/OFFLINE Button
3— Console port (Con) 8—Ports—USB1 and USB2
4— Management port (MGMT) 9—RESET Button
Routing Engine Components
NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for

example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show vmhost hardware command.
Routing Engine Interface Ports

Three ports, located on the right side of the Routing Engine, connect the Routing Engine
to one or more external devices on which system administrators can issue Junos OS
command-line interface (CLI) commands to manage the router.
The ports with the indicated labels function as follows:
• AUX—Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device

through a serial cable with an RJ-45 connector.
• CONSOLE—Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through a serial cable

with an RJ-45 connector.

• ETHERNET or MGMT—Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection

to a management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection)
for out-of-band management. The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support
10-Mbps or 100-Mbps connections. Two small LEDs on the right of the port indicate
the connection in use: The LED on the left indicates speed—green for 1000-Mbps,
yellow for 100-Mbps and when the LED is dark, it indicates 10-Mbps speed. The LED
on the right indicates activity—flashing green when packets are passing through the
port.
Routing Engine Boot Sequence

The Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the USB device (if present),
then the CompactFlash card, then the hard disk, then the LAN. The disk from which the
router boots is called the primary boot device, and the other disk is the alternate boot
device.
NOTE: If the router boots from an alternate boot device, a yellow alarm lights
the LED on the router’s craft interface.
Booting in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine follows this sequence—the USB device, SSD1,
SSD2, and LAN. SSD1 is the primary boot device. Boot sequence is tried twice for SSD1
and SSD2.
If the Routing Engines are configured for graceful switchover, the backup Routing Engine
automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with the master Routing Engine.
Any update to the master Routing Engine state is replicated on the backup Routing Engine.
If the backup Routing Engine assumes mastership, packet forwarding continues through
the router without interruption. For more information about graceful switchover, see the
Junos OS Administration Library.
NOTE: If two Routing Engines are installed, they must both be the same
hardware model.

Documentation
• MX480 Routing Engine LEDs on page 38
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Description for MX Series
Figure 15 on page 30 shows the Routing Engine 1800.

Figure 15: RE-S-1800 Front View

Auxiliary Ethernet SSD SSD
port port slot 1 slot 2
g006040
Extractor
clip
Console USB Reset
port port button
Extractor
clip
• RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Components on page 30

• RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Boot Sequence on page 31
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Components

Figure 16 on page 30 shows the RE-S-1800 Routing Engine.
Auxiliary Ethernet SSD SSD

port port slot 1 slot 2
g006040
Extractor
clip
Console USB Reset
port port button
Extractor
clip
Each Routing Engine consists of the following components:
• CPU—Runs Junos OS to maintain the router's routing tables and routing protocols..
• DRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing
Engine processes.
• USB port—Provides a removable media interface through which you can install Junos
OS manually. Junos OS supports USB version 1.0.
• CompactFlash card—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration files,

and microcode. The CompactFlash card is fixed and is inaccessible from outside the
router.
• Solid-state Drive (SSD)—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps,
and rebooting the system if the CompactFlash card fails.
• Interface ports—The AUX, CONSOLE, and ETHERNET provide access to management

devices. Each Routing Engine has one 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting
to a management network, and two asynchronous serial ports—one for connecting to
a console and one for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary device.
• EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.

• RESET button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
• ONLINE/OFFLINE button—Takes the Routing Engine online or offline when pressed.
• Extractor clips—Used for inserting and extracting the Routing Engine.
• Captive screws—Secure the Routing Engine in place.

example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show chassis routing-engine
command.
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine Boot Sequence

The router is shipped with Junos OS preinstalled on the Routing Engine. There are three
copies of software:
• One copy on the CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine.
• One copy on the hard disk in the Routing Engine.
• One copy on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot on the Routing Engine
faceplate.
The Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the USB device (if present),
then the CompactFlash card, then the Solid State Disk (SSD), then the LAN. Normally,
the router boots from the copy of the software on the CompactFlash card.
Related • RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports
Documentation
• RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port
• Replacing an MX960 Routing Engine
• Supported Routing Engines by Router on page 40
RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs
Each Routing Engine has four LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled MASTER,
STORAGE, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL, are located directly on the faceplate of the Routing
Engine. Table 14 on page 31 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Table 14: Routing Engine LEDs

MASTER Blue On steadily Routing Engine is the Master.
STORAGE Green Blinking Indicates activity on the SSD or Compact Flash.

Table 14: Routing Engine LEDs (continued)

ONLINE Green Blinking Routing Engine is transitioning online.
On steadily Routing Engine is functioning normally.
OK/FAIL Red On steadily Routing Engine has failed.
Related • MX240 Routing Engine Description

Documentation
• MX960 Routing Engine Description
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description
Figure 17 on page 32 shows the Routing Engine.
Figure 17: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Front View
1— Extractor clips 6—ONLINE/OFFLINE button
3— Console port (CONSOLE) 8—Ports—USB1 and USB2
4— Management port (MGMT) 9—RESET button
• RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Components on page 32

• RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Boot Sequence on page 33
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Components

In routers with dual Routing Engines, both Routing Engines must be RE-S-X6-64G Routing
Engines.
Each RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine (shown in Figure 17 on page 32) consists of the
following components:
• CPU—Runs Junos OS to maintain the routing tables and routing protocols.
• EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.

• DRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing
Engine processes.
• One 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface between the Routing Engine and Switch Control
Board.
• Two 50-GB slim solid-state drives—SSD1 (primary) and SSD2 (secondary)—Provide

storage for software images, configuration files, microcode, log files, and memory
dumps. The Routing Engine reboots from SSD2 when boot from primary SSD fails.
• Two USB ports (USB1 and USB2)—Provide a removable media interface through which
you can install Junos OS manually. The Junos OS supports USB versions 3.0, 2.0, and
1.1.
• Interface ports—The AUX, CONSOLE, and MGMT provide access to management

devices. Each Routing Engine has one 10/100/1000-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting
to a management network, and two asynchronous serial ports—one for connecting to
a console and one for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary device.
• RESET button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
• ONLINE/OFFLINE button—Brings the Routing Engine online or takes it offline when

pressed.
NOTE: The ONLINE/OFFLINE button must be pressed for a minimum of 4

seconds for the power off or power on to occur.
• Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the Routing Engine.
• LEDs—“RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs” on page 34 describes the functions of

these LEDs.

example, the amount of DRAM), issue the show vmhost hardware command.
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Boot Sequence

Booting in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine follows this sequence—the USB device, SSD1,
SSD2, LAN. SSD1 is the primary boot device. The boot sequence is tried twice for SSD1
and SSD2.
Related • Routing Engine Specifications on page 35

Documentation
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem on
page 313
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem

on page 319

RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs
Each Routing Engine has five LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs—labeled MASTER,
DISK1, DISK2, ONLINE, and OK/FAIL—are located on the faceplate of the Routing Engine.
Table 15 on page 34 describes the functions of the Routing Engine LEDs.
Figure 18: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs
1— ONLINE LED 4— DISK2 LED
2— OK/FAIL LED 5— ONLINE/OFFLINE button
3— DISK1 LED 6—MASTER LED
Table 15: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs

ONLINE Green Blinking slowly Routing Engine is in the process of booting BIOS, and the host
OS.
Blinking rapidly Routing Engine is in the process of booting Junos OS.
- Off Routing Engine is not online or not functioning normally.
DISK1 Green Blinking Indicates presence of disk activity.
- Off There is no disk activity.
DISK2 Green Blinking Indicates presence of disk activity.
OK/FAIL Green On steadily Routing Engine is powering up.
Yellow On steadily Routing Engine is not powering up, which indicates failure.
MASTER Blue On steadily This Routing Engine is the Master Routing Engine.
Related • MX240 Routing Engine Description

Documentation

• MX960 Routing Engine Description
Routing Engine Specifications
Table 16 on page 35 lists the current specifications for Routing Engines supported on
M Series, MX Series, and T Series routers. Table 17 on page 37 lists the specifications for
end-of-life Routing Engines.
NOTE: For a list of the routing engines that are supported on the M Series,
MX Series, T Series, and PTX routers, see “Supported Routing Engines by
Router” on page 40.
NOTE: For information about PTX Series Routing Engine specifications, see
Routing Engines Supported on PTX Series Routers. For information about
Table 16: Routing Engine Specifications

Routing Connection First Junos OS
Engine Processor Memory to PFEs Disk Media Support
RE-400-768 400-MHz 768 MB Fast Ethernet 40 GB hard 1 GB 9.0

Celeron disk CompactFlash
card
RE-A-1000-2048 1.0-GHz 2048 MB Gigabit 40 GB hard 1 GB 8.1

Pentium Ethernet disk CompactFlash
card
RE-A-2000-4096 2.0-GHz 4096 MB Gigabit 40 GB hard 1 GB 8.1

card
RE-S-1300-2048 1.3-GHz 2048 MB Gigabit 40 GB hard 1 GB 8.2

card
RE-S-2000-4096 2.0-GHz 4096 MB Gigabit 40 GB hard 1 GB 8.2

card
RE-C1800 1.8-GHz 8 GB Gigabit SSD 4 GB T1600 router in a

Ethernet CompactFlash routing matrix: 9.6R2
card
Standalone T640 or
T1600 router:11.2
RE-C2600 2.6-GHz 16 GB Gigabit SSD 4 GB TX Matrix Plus

Ethernet CompactFlash router: 9.6R2
card

Table 16: Routing Engine Specifications (continued)

Engine Processor Memory to PFEs Disk Media Support
RE-A-1800x2 1800-MHz 8 GB or 16 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4 GB 10.4

Ethernet CompactFlash
card
RE-S-1800x2 1800-MHz 8 GB or 16 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4 GB 10.4

card
RE-S-1800x4 1800-MHz 8GB or 16 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4 GB 10.4

card
RE-S-MX104 1.8-GHz 4 GB Gigabit – 8 GB NAND 13.2

Ethernet Flash
RE-B-1800x1-4G 1.73-GHz 4 GB Gigabit 64 GB SSD 4 GB 12.1R2, 11.4R4, and

Ethernet CompactFlash 12.2R1
card
RE-MX2000-1800x4 1.8- GHz 16 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4 GB Fixed 12.3R2

Ethernet Internal
CompactFlash
card
RE-S-1800X4-32G-S 1.8- Ghz 32 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4 GB Fixed • 12.3R4

Ethernet Internal • 13.2R1
CompactFlash
card
REMX2K-1800-32G-S 1.8- Ghz 32 GB Gigabit 32 GB SSD 4GB Fixed • 12.3R4

Ethernet Internal • 13.2R1
CompactFlash
card
RE-S-X6-64G 2 Ghz 64 GB Gigabit Two 50-GB - 15.1F4, 16.1

Ethernet SSDs
RE-S-X6-64G 2 Ghz 64 GB Gigabit Two 50-GB - 15.1F4, 16.1

Ethernet SSDs
REMX2K-X8-64G 2.3 Ghz 64 GB Gigabit Two 100-GB - 15.1F5-S1, 16.1R2, and

Ethernet SSDs 16.2R1
REMX2008-X8-64G 2.3 Ghz 64 GB Gigabit Two 50-GB - 15.1F7

Ethernet SSDs
RE-S-2X00x6 1.6 Ghz 64 GB Gigabit Two 50-GB - 17.3

Ethernet SSDs

NOTE: Use shielded CAT5e cable for connecting the AUX, CONSOLE, and
MGMT ports in RE-S-X6-64G, REMX2K-X8-64G, and REMX2008-X8-64G
Routing Engines.
Table 17: End-of-Life Routing Engine Specifications

Engine Processor Memory to PFEs Disk Media Support EOL Details
RE-333-256 333-MHz 256 MB Fast 6.4 GB hard 80 MB 3.4 PSN-2003-01-063

Pentium II Ethernet disk CompactFlash
card
RE-333-768 333-MHz 768 MB Fast 6.4 GB hard 80 MB 3.4 PSN-2003-01-063

card
RE-600-512 600-MHz 512 MB Fast 30 GB hard 256 MB 5.4 PSN-2004-07-019

Pentium III Ethernet disk CompactFlash
card
RE-600-2048 600-MHz 2048 MB Fast 40 GB hard 1 GB 5.3 PSN-2008-02-018

card
RE-850-1536 850-MHz 1536 MB Fast 40 GB hard 1 GB 7.2 PSN-2011-04-226

card
RE-M40 200-MHz 256 MB Fast 6.4 GB hard 80 MB 3.2 FA-HW-0101-001

card
RE-M40-333-768 333-MHz 768 MB Fast 10 GB hard 80 MB 4.2 PSN-2003-01-063

card
RE-M40-600-2048 600-MHz 2048 MB Fast 30 GB hard 128 MB 5.4 PSN-2004-11-020

card
RE-1600-2048 1.6-GHz 2048 MB Gigabit 40 GB hard 1 GB 6.2 PSN-2008-02-019

Pentium M Ethernet disk CompactFlash
card
NOTE: The memory in Table 16 on page 35 indicates the amount of total

memory. To determine the amount of available memory, issue the show
chassis routing-engine CLI command.

On routers that accept two Routing Engines, you cannot mix Routing Engine types except
for a brief period (one minute or so) during an upgrade or downgrade to two Routing
Engines of the same type.
Related • Supported Routing Engines by Router on page 40

Documentation
MX480 Routing Engine LEDs
Each Routing Engine has four LEDs that indicate its status. The LEDs, labeled MASTER,
HDD, ONLINE, and FAIL, are located directly on the faceplate of the Routing Engine.
Table 18 on page 38 and Table 19 on page 39 describe the functions of the Routing Engine
LEDs.
Figure 19: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine
Table 18: RE-S-1800 Routing Engine LEDs

MASTER Blue On steadily Routing Engine is the Master.
HDD Green Blinking Indicates activity on the hard disk drive.
ONLINE Green Blinking Routing Engine is transitioning online.
On steadily Routing Engine is functioning normally.
FAIL Red On steadily Routing Engine has failed.

Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G)
Figure 20: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine LEDs
1— ONLINE LED 4— DISK2 LED
2— OK/FAIL LED 5— ONLINE/OFFLINE Button
3— DISK1 LED 6—MASTER LED
Table 19: Routing Engine LEDs (RE-S-X6-64G)

ONLINE Green Blinking slowly Routing Engine is in the process of booting BIOS, and the host
OS.
Blinking rapidly Routing Engine is in the process of booting Junos OS.
- Off Routing Engine is not online or not functioning normally
DISK1 Green Blinking Indicates presence of the disk activity.
DISK2 Green Blinking Indicates presence of the disk activity.
OK/FAIL Green On steadily Routing Engine is powering up.
Yellow On steadily Routing Engine is not powering up indicating failure.
MASTER Blue On steadily This Routing Engine is the Master Routing Engine.
Related • MX480 Routing Engine Description on page 27

Documentation
• Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 301

Supported Routing Engines by Router
The following tables list the Routing Engines that each router supports, the first supported
release for the Routing Engine in the specified router, the management Ethernet interface,
and the internal Ethernet interfaces for each Routing Engine.
• M7i Routing Engines on page 40

• M10i Routing Engines on page 41
• M40e Routing Engines on page 41
• M120 Routing Engines on page 41
• M320 Routing Engines on page 42
• MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine on page 43
• MX104 Routing Engines on page 43
• MX2020 Supported Routing Engines on page 47
• PTX1000 Routing Engines on page 47
• T320 Routing Engines on page 49
• TX Matrix Routing Engines on page 51
• TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines on page 52
• TX Matrix Plus (with 3D SIBs) Routing Engines on page 52
M7i Routing Engines

Table 20 on page 40 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M7i router. The M7i router
supports 32-bit Junos OS only.
Table 20: M7i Routing Engines

Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Ethernet Interface Interface
RE-400-768 (EOL details: RE-5.0 9.0 fxp0 fxp1

TSB16445)

Table 20: M7i Routing Engines (continued)

Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Ethernet Interface Interface
RE-850-1536 (EOL details: RE-850 7.2 fxp0 fxp1

TSB15553)
RE-B-1800X1-4G RE-B-1800x1 11.4R4 fxp0 em0
12.1R2
M10i Routing Engines

Table 21 on page 41 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M10i router. The M10i
router supports 32-bit Junos OS only.
Table 21: M10i Routing Engines

First Supported
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Release Ethernet Interface Interface

TSB16445)
fxp2
RE-850-1536 (EOL details: RE-850 7.2 fxp0 fxp1

TSB15553)
fxp2
RE-B-1800X1-4G RE-B-1800x1 11.4R4 fxp0 em0
12.1R2
M40e Routing Engines

Table 22 on page 41 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M40e router.
Table 22: M40e Routing Engines

First Supported Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Name in CLI Output Junos OS Release Ethernet Interface Interface
RE-600-2048 (EOL details: RE-3.0 or RE-3.0 5.3 fxp0 fxp1

TSB14373) (RE-600)
fxp2
RE-A-1000-2048 RE-A-1000 8.1 fxp0 fxp1
fxp2
M120 Routing Engines

Table 23 on page 42 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M120 router.

Table 23: M120 Routing Engines

First
First Supported Supported Management
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos Ethernet Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Release OS Release Interface Interface
RE-A-1000-2048 RE-A-1000 8.0R2 – fxp0 fxp1
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.0R2 – fxp0 em0
bcm0
RE-A-1800X2-8G RE-A-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 fxp1

• 12.1R3
fxp2
RE-A-1800X2-16G RE-A-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 fxp1

• 12.1R3
fxp2
RE-A-1800X4-16G RE-A-1800x4 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

• 12.1R3
em1
M320 Routing Engines

Table 24 on page 42 lists the Routing Engines supported by the M320 router.
Table 24: M320 Routing Engines

First
RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0 6.2 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14374)
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.1 – fxp0 em0
bcm0

• 12.1R3
bcm0

• 12.1R3
bcm0

Table 24: M320 Routing Engines (continued)

First
RE-A-1800X4-8G RE-A-1800X4 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

• 12.1R3
em1
• 12.2
MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine

Table 25 on page 43 lists the Routing Engines supported by the MX5, MX10, MX40, and
MX80 routers.
Table 25: MX5, MX10, MX40, and MX80 Routing Engine

First Supported First Supported Management
Model Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet
Number Output Release Release Interface Internal Ethernet Interface
Built-in Routing Routing Engine 12.3 - fxp0 em0

Engine RE-MX80
em1
NOTE: em1 is used to

communicate with the
MS-MIC when it is inserted.
MX104 Routing Engines

Table 26 on page 43 lists the Routing Engines supported by MX104 routers.
Table 26: MX104 Routing Engines

Model Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Internal Ethernet
Number Output Release Release Interface Interface
RE-S-MX104 Routing Engine 13.2 – fxp0 fxp1
fxp2


Table 27: MX240 Supported Routing Engines

Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Release Release Interface Interface
RE-S-1300-2048 RE-S-1300 9.0 – fxp0 fxp1

(EOL details:
TSB16556 fxp2
RE-S-2000-4096 RE-S-2000 9.0 – fxp0 fxp1

(EOL details:
TSB16735 fxp2
RE-S-1800X2-8G RE-S-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

(EOL details: • 12.1R3
TSB16556 em1
RE-S-1800x2-16G RE-S-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

TSB16556 em1
RE-S-1800X4-8G RE-S-1800X4 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

• 12.1R3
em1

• 12.1R3
em1
RE-S-1800X4-32G-S RE-S-1800X4 • 12.3R4 • 12.3R4 fxp0 em0,

• 13.2R1 • 13.2R1
em1
RE-S-X6-64G RE-S-2X00x6 – 15.1F4 fxp0 ixlv0, igb0
16.1R1


RE-S-1300-2048 RE-S-1300 8.4 – fxp0 fxp1

(EOL details:
TSB16556 fxp2
RE-S-2000-4096 RE-S-2000 8.4 – fxp0 fxp1

(EOL details:
TSB16735 fxp2

Table 28: MX480 Supported Routing Engines (continued)


TSB16556 em1

TSB16556 em1
RE-S-1800X4-8G RE-S-1800X4 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

• 12.1R3
em1

• 12.1R3
em1
RE-S-1800X4-32G-S RE-S-1800X4 • 12.3R4 • 12.3R4 fxp0 em0

• 13.2R1 • 13.2R1
em1
16.1R1


First
First Supported Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos Ethernet Ethernet
RE-S-1300-2048 (EOL RE-S-1300 8.2 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB16556
fxp2
RE-S-2000-4096 (EOL RE-S-2000 8.2 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB16735
fxp2
RE-S-1800X2-8G (EOL RE-S-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

details: TSB16556 • 12.1R3
em1
RE-S-1800X2-16G (EOL RE-S-1800x2 • 11.4R5 10.4 fxp0 em0

details: TSB16556 • 12.1R3
em1


First
First Supported Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos Ethernet Ethernet

• 12.1R3
em1

• 12.1R3
em1
RE-S-1800X4-32G-S RE-S-1800x4 • 12.3R4 • 12.3R4 fxp0 em0

• 13.2R1 • 13.2R1
em1
16.1R1


Management Internal
Name in CLI First Supported 64-bit Junos Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output OS Release Interface Interface
REMX2008-X8-64G RE-MX2008-X8-64G 15.1F7 fxp0 ixlv0
ixlv1


Management Internal
RE-MX2000-1800X4 RE-S-1800x4 12.3R2 fxp0 em0
em1
REMX2K-1800-32G-S RE-S-1800x4 • 12.3R4 fxp0 em0

• 13.2R1
em1


Management Internal
REMX2K-X8-64G RE-S-2X00x8 • 15.1F5-S1 fxp0 ixlv0

• 16.1R2
ixlv1
• 16.2R1
MX2020 Supported Routing Engines


Management Internal
RE-MX2000-1800X4 RE-S-1800x4 12.3R2 fxp0 em0
em1
REMX2K-1800-32G-S RE-S-1800x4 • 12.3R4 fxp0 em0

• 13.2R1
em1
REMX2K-X8-64G RE-S-2X00x8 • 15.1F5-S1 fxp0 ixlv0

• 16.1R2
ixlv1
• 16.2R1


Management Internal
JNP10003-RE1 RE-S-2X00x6 17.3R1 fxp0 ixlv0
ixlv1
PTX1000 Routing Engines

Table 34 on page 48 lists the Routing Engine supported on the PTX1000.
NOTE: The PTX1000 supports 64-bit Junos OS only.

Table 34: PTX1000 Routing Engines

Name in CLI First Supported Junos OS Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Release Ethernet Interface Interface
Built-in Routing RE-PTX1000 • 16.1X65-D30 em0 bme0

Engine • 17.2R1
em1

Table 35 on page 48 lists the Routing Engines supported on the PTX3000.

First Supported Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Name in CLI Output Junos OS Release Ethernet Interface Interface
RE-DUO-C2600-16G RE-DUO-2600 13.2R2 em0 ixgbe0
ixgbe1
RCB-PTX-X6-32G RE-PTX-2X00x6 16.1R4 em0 ixlv0
ixlv1

Table 36 on page 48 lists the Routing Engines supported on the PTX5000.

Management
Name in CLI First Supported Junos OS Ethernet Internal Ethernet
Model Number Output Release Interface Interface
RE-DUO-C2600-16G RE-DUO-2600 12.1X48 em0 ixgbe0
12.3 ixgbe1
13.2
NOTE: The PTX5000 does not

support Junos OS Releases 12.1,
12.2, or 13.1.

Table 36: PTX5000 Routing Engines (continued)

Management
Name in CLI First Supported Junos OS Ethernet Internal Ethernet
RE-PTX-X8-64G RE-PTX-2X00x8 15.1F4 em0 ixlv0
16.1R1 ixlv1
em1
T320 Routing Engines

Table 37 on page 49 lists the Routing Engines supported by the T320 router.
Table 37: T320 Routing Engines

First Supported
32-bit Junos OS Management Internal Ethernet
Model Number Name in CLI Output Release Ethernet Interface Interface
RE-600-2048 (EOL details: RE-3.0 or RE-3.0 5.3 fxp0 fxp1

TSB14373) (RE-600)
fxp2

TSB14374
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.1 fxp0 fxp1
fxp2


Management Internal
Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit First Supported 64-bit Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Interface Interface
RE-600-2048 (EOL RE-3.0 or 5.3 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14373) RE-3.0
(RE-600) fxp2
RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0 6.2 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14374
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.1 – fxp0 em0
bcm0

Table 38: T640 Routing Engines (continued)

Management Internal
Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit First Supported 64-bit Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Junos OS Release Interface Interface
RE-DUO-C1800-8G RE-DUO-1800 32-bit Junos OS on a 64-bit Junos OS on a em0 bcm0

standalone T640 router: standalone T640 router:
11.2 11.3 em1
32-bit Junos OS on a 64-bit Junos OS on a

T640 router in a routing T640 router in a routing
matrix: 11.4R9 matrix: 11.4R9

standalone T640 router: standalone T640 router:
11.4R2 11.4R2 em1
32-bit Junos OS on a 64-bit Junos OS on a

T640 router in a routing T640 router in a routing
matrix: 11.4R9 matrix: 11.4R9

NOTE: (Two RE-DUO-C1800-8G or two RE-DUO-C1800-16G are required

to connect to a Routing Matrix)

First Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Release Interface Interface
RE-600-2048 (EOL RE-3.0 or 8.5 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14373) RE-3.0
(RE-600) fxp2
RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0 8.5 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14374 (RE-1600)
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.5 – fxp0 em0
bcm0

Table 39: T1600 Routing Engines (continued)

First Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI First Supported 32-bit 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output Junos OS Release Release Interface Interface
RE-DUO-C1800-8G RE-TXP-LCC 32-bit Junos OS on a T1600 64-bit Junos OS on a em0 bcm0

or router in a routing matrix: 9.6 T1600 router in a
RE-DUO-1800 routing matrix: 9.6 em1
NOTE: Junos OS Releases
9.6 through 10.4 support 64-bit Junos OS on a
RE-DUO-C1800-8G only standalone T1600
during upgrade to a line-card router: 11.1
chassis (LCC) in a routing
matrix.
32-bit Junos OS on a
standalone T1600 router: 11.1

standalone T1600 router: standalone T1600
11.4R2 router: 11.4R2 em1
32-bit Junos OS on a T1600 64-bit Junos OS on a

router in a routing matrix: T1600 router in a
11.4R2 routing matrix: 11.4R2

NOTE: The T4000 router supports 64-bit Junos OS only.

Management
Name in CLI First Supported 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Internal Ethernet
RE-DUO-C1800-8G RE-DUO-1800 Standalone T4000 router: 12.1 em0 bcm0
T4000 router in a routing matrix: 13.1 em1
RE-DUO-C1800-16G RE-DUO-1800 Standalone T4000 router: 12.1R2 em0 bcm0
T4000 router in a routing matrix: 13.1 em1
TX Matrix Routing Engines

Table 41 on page 52 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix router.

Table 41: TX Matrix Routing Engines

First First
Supported Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos 64-bit Junos Ethernet Ethernet
Model Number Output OS Release OS Release Interface Interface
RE-600-2048 (EOL RE-3.0 or RE-3.0 7.0 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14373) (RE-600)
fxp2
RE-1600-2048 (EOL RE-4.0 (RE-1600) 7.0 – fxp0 fxp1

details: TSB14374
fxp2
RE-A-2000-4096 RE-A-2000 8.5 – fxp0 em0
bcm0
RE-DUO-C1800-8G RE-DUO-1800 11.4R9 11.4R9 em0 bcm0
em1
RE-DUO-C1800-16G RE-DUO-1800 11.4R9 11.4R9 em0 bcm0
em1
TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines

Table 42 on page 52 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix Plus router.
Table 42: TX Matrix Plus Routing Engines

First Supported First Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Ethernet
RE-DUO-C2600-16G RE-TXP-SFC or 32-bit Junos OS: 9.6 64-bit Junos OS: 11.4 em0 ixgbe0
RE-DUO-2600
ixgbe1
TX Matrix Plus (with 3D SIBs) Routing Engines

Table 43 on page 52 lists the Routing Engines supported by the TX Matrix Plus router
with 3D SIBs.
Table 43: Routing Engines on TX Matrix Plus with 3D SIBs

First Supported First Supported Management Internal
Name in CLI 32-bit Junos OS 64-bit Junos OS Ethernet Ethernet
RE-DUO-C2600-16G RE-TXP-SFC or - 64-bit Junos OS: 11.4 em0 ixgbe0

RE-DUO-2600
ixgbe1

Related • Routing Engine Specifications on page 35

Documentation
• Understanding Internal Ethernet Interfaces
• Understanding Management Ethernet Interfaces


CHAPTER 6
Line Card Components and Descriptions
• Interface Modules—DPCs on page 55

• Interface Modules—FPCs and MICs on page 63
• Interface Modules—MPCs and MICs on page 69
Interface Modules—DPCs

• MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering on page 57
• MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs on page 60
• DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 60
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description

A Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) is optimized for Ethernet density (see
Figure 21 on page 56). The DPC assembly combines packet forwarding and Ethernet
interfaces on a single board, with either two or four 10-Gbps Packet Forwarding Engines.
Each Packet Forwarding Engine consists of one I-chip for Layer 3 processing and one
Layer 2 network processor. The DPCs interface with the power supplies and Switch
Control Boards (SCBs).
The DPC slots are located in the front of the router (see Figure 21 on page 56). The router
has six dedicated DPC slots that are numbered 0 through 5. A DPC can be installed in
any DPC slot on the router. You can install any combination of DPC types in the router.
If a slot is not occupied by a DPC, a DPC blank panel must be installed to shield the empty
slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router.
DPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “MX480 Field-Replaceable

Units (FRUs)” on page 247. When you install a DPC in an operating router, the Routing
Engine downloads the DPC software, the DPC runs its diagnostics, and the Packet
Forwarding Engines housed on the DPC are enabled. Forwarding on other DPCs continues
uninterrupted during this process.
Figure 21 on page 56 shows typical DPCs supported on the MX480 router. For more
information about DPCs, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.

Figure 21: Typical DPCs Supported on the Router

DPC 40x1GE DPC 4x10GE
OK/FAIL
0/0 0/5 2/0 2/5
OK/FAIL
0/0
TUNNEL
LINK
1/0
TUNNEL
LINK
1/0 1/5
3/0 3/5
2/0
TUNNEL
LINK
3/0
TUNNEL
LINK
g004005
Figure 22: DPC Installed Horizontally in the Router
DPC Components
Each DPC consists of the following components:
• DPC cover, which functions as a ground plane and a stiffener.
• Fabric interfaces.
• Two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that allow control information, route information, and
statistics to be sent between the Routing Engine and the CPU on the DPCs.
• Two interfaces from the SCBs that enable the DPCs to be powered on and controlled.

Chapter 6: Line Card Components and Descriptions
• Physical DPC connectors.
• Two or four Packet Forwarding Engines.
• Midplane connectors and power circuitry.
• Processor subsystem, which includes a 1.2-GHz CPU, system controller, and 1 GB of

SDRAM.
• Online button—Takes the DPC online or offline when pressed.
• LEDs on the DPC faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the DPC faceplate,
see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the DPC, display the status of the DPC
and are labeled OK and FAIL.
See Also • MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs on page 60
• Replacing an MX480 DPC on page 323
MX480 DPC Port and Interface Numbering

Each port on a DPC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI.
In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the DPC
number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The DPC slot number corresponds to the first
number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the logical
PIC number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the DPC.
Slashes (/) separate the DPC number from the logical PIC number and port number.
type-fpc/pic/port
• type—Media type, which identifies the network device. For example:
• ge—Gigabit Ethernet interface
• so—SONET/SDH interface
• xe—10-Gigabit Ethernet interface
For a complete list of media types, see Interface Naming Overview.
• fpc—Slot in which the DPC is installed. On the MX480 router, the DPCs are represented
in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 5.
• pic—Logical PIC on the DPC. The number of logical PICs varies depending on the type
of DPC. For example, a:
• 20-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 through 1.
• 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC has four logical PICs, numbered 0 through 3.
• 2-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 through 1.
• 4-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC has four logical PICs, numbered 0 through 3.

For more information on specific DPCs, see “DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and
MX960 Routers” on page 60 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
• port—Port number.
The MX480 router supports up to six DPCs that install horizontally and are numbered 0
through 5 from bottom to top.
Figure 23 on page 58 shows a 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP installed in slot 3
on the MX480 router.
Figure 23: MX480 DPC Interface Port Mapping
The DPC contains four logical PICs, numbered PIC 0 through PIC 3 in the CLI. Each logical
PIC contains 10 ports numbered 0 through 9.
The show chassis hardware command output displays a 40-port Gigabit Ethernet DPC
with SFP (DPCE-R-40GE-SFP) installed in DPC slot 3. The DPC (DPCE 40x 1GE R) is shown
as FPC 3 in the CLI. The DPC’s four logical PICs — 10x 1GE(LAN) — are shown as PIC 0
through PIC 3.
user@host> show chassis hardware
...
FPC 3 REV 07 750-018122 KB8222 DPCE 40x 1GE R
CPU REV 06 710-013713 KA9010 DPC PMB
PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN)
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2NU4 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P4R SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2NYL SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UW6 SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P4N SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UME SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 01 740-011613 PCE1H5P SFP-SX

Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UFG SFP-SX

Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-011613 AM0947SEYU2 SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-011613 AM0947SEYTQ SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UYF SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P4L SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UCL SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P4X SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P1E SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UD2 SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2PLC SFP-SX
Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UDJ SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-011613 AM0947SEX7S SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2NV7 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P6Q SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2NUG SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P10 SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-011613 AM0947SEXBT SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2PL4 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2P1K SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2PLM SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PCH2UFF SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-011613 AM1003SFV5S SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-011613 AM0947SEXBX SFP-SX
...
The show interfaces terse command output displays the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that
correspond to the 40 ports located on the DPC.
user@host>show interfaces terse ge-3*
Interface Admin Link Proto Local Remote

ge-3/0/0 up up
ge-3/0/1 up down
ge-3/0/2 up up
ge-3/0/3 up up
ge-3/0/4 up up
ge-3/0/5 up up
ge-3/0/6 up up
ge-3/0/7 up up
ge-3/0/8 up up
ge-3/0/9 up up
ge-3/1/0 up down
ge-3/1/1 up down
ge-3/1/2 up down
ge-3/1/3 up down
ge-3/1/4 up up
ge-3/1/5 up up
ge-3/1/6 up up
ge-3/1/7 up up
ge-3/1/8 up up
ge-3/1/9 up down
ge-3/2/0 up down
ge-3/2/1 up down
ge-3/2/2 up down
ge-3/2/3 up down
ge-3/2/4 up down
ge-3/2/5 up down

ge-3/2/6 up down
ge-3/2/7 up down
ge-3/2/8 up down
ge-3/2/9 up down
ge-3/3/0 up down
ge-3/3/1 up down
ge-3/3/2 up down
ge-3/3/3 up down
ge-3/3/4 up down
ge-3/3/5 up down
ge-3/3/6 up down
ge-3/3/7 up down
ge-3/3/8 up down
ge-3/3/9 up down
See Also • MX480 Router Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping on page 12
MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs

Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the DPC, display the status of the DPC
and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the DPC LEDs on the craft
interface, see “DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface” on page 17.
Each DPC also has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on
the DPC faceplate, see the “LEDs” section for each DPC in the MX Series Interface Module
Reference.
See Also • MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) Description on page 55
• Maintaining MX480 DPCs on page 420
DPCs Supported on MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers
NOTE: These DPCs have all been announced as End of Life (EOL). The End
of Support (EOS) milestone dates for each model are published at
http://www.juniper.net/support/eol/mseries_hw.html.
Table 44 on page 60 lists the DPCs supported by the MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers.
Table 44: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

Maximum
DPC Model Throughput First Junos
DPC Name Number Ports per DPC OS Release
Gigabit Ethernet

Table 44: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (continued)
Maximum
Gigabit Ethernet DPC with SFP DPC-R-40GE-SFP 40 40 Gbps 8.2
EOL (see
PSN-2009-06-400)
Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPC with SFP DPCE-R-40GE-SFP 40 40 Gbps 8.4
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)
Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC with SFP DPCE-X-40GE-SFP 40 40 Gbps 8.4
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)
Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPC DPCE-X-Q-40GE-SFP 40 40 Gbps 8.5
with SFP
EOL (see
PSN-2013-02-851)
Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with DPCE-R-Q-20GE-SFP 20 20 Gbps 9.1
SFP
EOL (see
PSN-2013-02-851)
Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs with DPCE-R-Q-40GE-SFP 40 40 Gbps 8.5
SFP
EOL (see
PSN-2011-07-314)
10-Gigabit Ethernet DPC with XFP DPC-R-4XGE-XFP 4 40 Gbps 8.2
EOL (see
PSN-2009-06-400)
10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPCs with XFP DPCE-R-2XGE-XFP 2 20 Gbps 9.1
EOL (see
PSN-2011-02-314)
10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced DPCs with XFP DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP 4 40 Gbps 8.4
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)
10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC with DPCE-X-4XGE-XFP 4 40 Gbps 8.4
XFP
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)

Table 44: DPCs Supported in MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (continued)
Maximum
10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPCE-X-Q-4XGE-XFP 4 40 Gbps 8.5

DPC with XFP
EOL (see
PSN-2013-02-851)
10-Gigabit Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPC DPCE-R-Q-4XGE-XFP 4 40 Gbps 8.5

with XFP
EOL (see
PSN-2011-02-314)
Mulit-Rate Ethernet
Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced DPC with SFP and XFP DPCE-R-20GE-2XGE 22 40 Gbps 9.2
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)
Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC with DPCE-X-20GE-2XGE 22 40 Gbps 9.2
SFP and XFP
EOL (see
PSN-2011-02-314)
Multi-Rate Ethernet Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPC DPCE-R-Q-20GE-2XGE 22 40 Gbps 9.3

with SFP and XFP
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16810)
Tri-Rate Ethernet
Tri-Rate Enhanced DPC DPCE-R-40GE-TX 40 40 Gbps 9.1
EOL (see
PSN-2013-02-851)
Tri-Rate Enhanced Ethernet Services DPC DPCE-X-40GE-TX 40 40 Gbps 9.1
EOL (see
PSN-2011-07-315.)
Services
Multiservices DPC MS-DPC 2 (Not – 9.3
supported)
EOL (see
PSN-TSB16812)
See Also • MX Series DPC Overview
• Protocols and Applications Supported by DPCs and Enhanced DPCs (DPC and DPCE-R)
• Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Ethernet Services DPCs (DPCE-X)

• Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Queuing IP Services DPCs

(DPCE-R-Q)
• Protocols and Applications Supported by Enhanced Queuing Ethernet Services DPCs

(DPCE-X-Q)
• Protocols and Applications Supported by the Multiservices DPC (MS-DPC)
Interface Modules—FPCs and MICs
• MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description on page 63

• MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs on page 65
• FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 65
• MX480 PIC Description on page 66
• MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering on page 66
• MX480 PIC LEDs on page 68
• PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 68
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description

A Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) occupies two DPC slots on an MX Series router. The
router has six dedicated DPC slots that are numbered 0 through 5, bottom to top. Up to
three FPCs can be installed horizontally on the front of the router (see
Figure 24 on page 63). The interface corresponds to the lowest numbered DPC slot for
which the FPC is installed.
Figure 24: FPC Installed in the MX480 Router Chassis
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
FAIL OK 2 3 YELLOW ALARM
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004414
Figure 25 on page 64 shows the typical FPCs supported on the MX480 router.

Figure 25: Typical FPCs Supported on the MX480 Router

MX-FPC2 FPC3
DPCE-X-Q-40GE
DPCE-X-Q-40GE
MX-FPC2
g004417
If a slot is not occupied by a DPC, an FPC, or an SCB, a blank panel must be installed to
shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router.
Each FPC supports up to two PICs. On an FPC2, one Packet Forwarding Engine receives
incoming packets from the PICs installed on the FPC and forwards them through the
switch planes to the appropriate destination port. On an FPC3, two Packet Forwarding
Engines receive incoming packets from the PICs installed on the FPC and forwards them
through the switch planes to the appropriate destination port. The FPCs interface with
the power supplies and SCBs.
FPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “MX480 Component

Redundancy” on page 11. When you install an FPC into a functioning router, the Routing
Engine downloads the FPC software, the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs, housed
on the FPC, are enabled. Forwarding continues uninterrupted during this process. When
you remove or install an FPC, packet forwarding between other DPCs or FPCs is not
affected.
FPC Components
Each FPC consists of the following components:
• FPC card carrier, which includes two PIC slots
• Up to two Packet Forwarding Engines, each consisting of one I-chip for Layer 3
processing and one Layer 2 network processor
• Midplane connectors and power circuitry
• Processor subsystem (PMB), which includes a 1.2-GHz CPU, system controller, 1 GB of

SDRAM, and two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

• Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the FPC, that display the status of the
FPC and are labeled OK and FAIL
• FPC online/offline button, located on the craft interface above the FPC
See Also • MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs on page 65
• Maintaining MX480 FPCs on page 425
• MX480 FPC Terminology
• Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs on page 444
• Replacing an MX480 FPC on page 332
MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs

Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the FPC, that display the status of the
FPC and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the FPC LEDs located on
the craft interface, see “FPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface” on page 17.
See Also • MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description on page 63
FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

An FPC occupies two slots when installed in an MX240, MX480, or MX960 router. The
maximum number of supported FPCs varies per router:
• MX960 router—6 FPCs
• MX480 router—3 FPCs
• MX240 router—1 FPC
Table 45 on page 65 lists FPCs supported by MX Series routers.
Table 45: FPCs Supported by MX Series Routers

Maximum Maximum
Number of PICs Throughput per FPC First Junos OS
FPC Type FPC Name FPC Model Number Supported (Full-duplex) Release
3 FPC3 MX-FPC3 2 20 Gbps 9.4
2 FPC2 MX-FPC2 2 10 Gbps 9.5

See Also • MX Series FPC and PIC Overview
• PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 68
• High Availability Features
MX480 PIC Description
PICs provide the physical connection to various network media types, receiving incoming
packets from the network and transmitting outgoing packets to the network. During this
process, each PIC performs framing and line-speed signaling for its media type. Before
transmitting outgoing data packets, the PICs encapsulate the packets received from the
FPCs. Each PIC is equipped with an ASIC that performs control functions specific to the
media type of that PIC.
PICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. Up to two PICs can be installed in the slots
in each FPC. Up to three FPCs can be installed in an MX480 router. PICs used in a Type
2 FPC have captive screws at their upper and lower corners. PICs used in a Type 3 FPC
have an upper ejector handle and a lower captive screw.
See Also • PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 68
• Replacing an MX480 PIC on page 350
MX480 PIC Port and Interface Numbering

Each port on a PIC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI.
In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the FPC
number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The FPC slot number corresponds to the first
number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the PIC
number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the PIC. Slashes
(/) separate the FPC number from the PIC number and port number:
type-fpc/pic/port
• fpc—Lowest slot number in which the FPC is installed. On the MX480 router, FPCs
occupy two line card slots and are represented in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 4.
• pic—PIC number, 0 or 1 depending on the FPC slot.

For more information on specific PICs, see “PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and
MX960 Routers” on page 68 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
The MX480 supports up to three FPCs that install horizontally and are numbered from
bottom to top.
Figure 26 on page 67 shows a Channelized OC12/STM4 Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP
installed in PIC slot 0 of an FPC installed in slot 3 and slot 4.
Figure 26: MX480 PIC Interface Port Mapping
The show chassis hardware command output displays a Channelized OC12/STM4

Enhanced IQ (IQE) PIC (4x CHOC12 IQE SONET) installed in MX FPC Type 2.
...
FPC 3 REV 01 710-024386 JW9571 MX FPC Type 2
CPU REV 03 710-022351 KE2986 DPC PMB
PIC 0 REV 00 750-022630 DS1284 4x CHOC12 IQE SONET
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PB821SG SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PB829Q6 SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011613 P9F15NQ SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 P7N036X SFP-SX...
The show interfaces terse command output displays the channelized SONET OC12
interfaces (coc12), that correspond to the four ports located on the PIC.
user@host>show interfaces terse
...
coc12-3/0/0 up up

lc-3/0/0 up up
lc-3/0/0.32769 up up vpls
pfe-3/0/0 up up
pfe-3/0/0.16383 up up inet
inet6
pfh-3/0/0 up up
pfh-3/0/0.16383 up up inet
coc12-3/0/1 up up
coc12-3/0/2 up up
coc12-3/0/3 up up
...
MX480 PIC LEDs

Each PIC has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the
PIC faceplate, see the “LEDs” section for each PIC in the MX Series Interface Module
Reference.
See Also • PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 68
• Maintaining MX480 PICs on page 433
PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

Table 46 on page 68 lists the PICs supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 routers.
Table 46: PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers

PIC Name PIC Model Number Ports Type First Junos OS Release
Channelized IQ PICs
Channelized OC12/STM4 Enhanced PB-4CHOC12-STM4-IQE-SFP 4 2 9.5
IQ (IQE) PIC with SFP
Channelized OC48/STM16 Enhanced PB-1CHOC48-STM16-IQE 1 2 9.5

SONET/SDH PICs
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) PB-4OC3-1OC12-SON2-SFP 4 2 9.5
PIC with SFP
SONET/SDH OC12/STM4 PB-4OC3-4OC12-SON-SFP 4 2 9.5

(Multi-Rate) PIC with SFP
SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 Enhanced PC-4OC48-STM16-IQE-SFP 4 3 10.4R2


Table 46: PICs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers (continued)
PIC Name PIC Model Number Ports Type First Junos OS Release
SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 PB-1OC48-SON-B-SFP 1 2 9.5

(Multi-Rate) PIC with SFP
SONET/SDH OC48/STM16 PIC with PC-4OC48-SON-SFP 4 3 9.4

SFP
SONET/SDH OC192c/STM64 PIC PC-1OC192-SON-VSR 1 3 9.4
SONET/SDH OC192c/STM64 PIC with PC-1OC192-SON-XFP 1 3 9.4

XFP
See Also • MX Series FPC and PIC Overview
• FPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, and MX960 Routers on page 65
• High Availability Features
Interface Modules—MPCs and MICs
• MIC/MPC Compatibility on page 69

• MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description on page 76
• MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering on page 77
• MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs on page 80
• MICs Supported by MX Series Routers on page 80
• MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description on page 87
• MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs on page 90
• MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers on page 90
• MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description on page 93
• MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description on page 96
• MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description on page 97
• MX480 AS MSC LEDs on page 97
• MX480 AS MXC LEDs on page 98
MIC/MPC Compatibility
The following tables provide a compatibility matrix for the MICs currently supported by
MPC1, MPC2, MPC3, MPC6, MPC8, and MPC9 on MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008,
MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 routers. Each table lists the first Junos OS release in
which the MPC supports the MIC. For example, Junos OS Release 10.2 is the first release
in which the MX-MPC1-3D supports the Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP. An en dash
indicates that the MIC is not supported.

Table 47: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility

MIC Name MPC1 MPC1E MPC1 Q MPC1E Q
MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM — — 12.1 12.1R4
(ATM MIC with SFP)
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 10.2 11.2R4 10.2 11.2R4
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC

with SFP)
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC

with SFP (E))
MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 10.2 11.2R4 10.2 11.2R4
(10-Gigabit Ethernet
MICs with XFP)
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP — — — —
(10-Gigabit Ethernet
MICs with XFP)
MIC-3D-40GE-TX 10.2 11.2R4 10.2 11.2R4
(Tri-Rate MIC)
MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48, 11.2 11.2R4 11.2 11.2R4

MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48
(SONET/SDH
OC3/STM1
(Multi-Rate) MICs with
SFP)
MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE — — 12.2 12.2
(Channelized
OC3/STM1
(Multi-Rate) Circuit
Emulation MIC with
SFP)
MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2
(SONET/SDH
OC192/STM64 MIC
with XFP)

Table 47: MIC/MPC1 Compatibility (continued)

MIC Name MPC1 MPC1E MPC1 Q MPC1E Q
MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12, — — 11.4 11.4

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12
MIC-4COC3-2COC12-G,
MIC-8COC3-4COC12-G
(Channelized
SONET/SDH
OC3/STM1
(Multi-Rate) MICs with
SFP)
MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 13.2 13.2 12.3 12.3
(Channelized E1/T1 NOTE: Support for NOTE: Support for

Circuit Emulation MIC) Non-Channelized MIC Non-Channelized MIC
only. only.
MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 11.4 11.4 11.4 11.4

MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B
(DS3/E3 MIC)
NOTE: You cannot run

Channelized DS3
(MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3)
on non-Q MPCs.
Channelized DS3 is
supported only on Q
and EQ-based MPCs.
MS-MIC-16G 13.2 13.2 13.2 13.2
(Multiservices MIC)

MPC2E MPC2 MPC2E MPC2 MPC2E MPC2E MPC2E
MIC Name MPC2 MPC2E NG Q Q EQ EQ P NG Q
MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM — — 14.1R4, 12.1 12.1R4 12.1 12.1R4 — 14.1R4,

14.2R3 14.2R3
(ATM MIC with SFP) with Junos with Juno
Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 10.1 11.2R4 14.1R4, 10.1 11.2R4 10.1 11.2R4 12.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with with Junos with Juno
SFP) Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1


MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 13.2R2 13.2R2 14.1R4, 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with with Junos with Juno
SFP (E)) Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 10.2 11.2R4 14.1R4, 10.2 11.2R4 10.2 11.2R4 12.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with with Junos with Juno
XFP) Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP 10.1 11.2R4 14.1R4, 10.1 11.2R4 10.1 11.2R4 12.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with Junos with Juno
with XFP) Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-40GE-TX 10.2 11.2R4 14.1R4, 10.2 11.2R4 10.2 11.2R4 12.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(Tri-Rate MIC) with Junos with Juno
Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48, 11.4 11.4 14.1R4, 11.4 11.4 11.4 11.4 - 14.1R4,

MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48 14.2R3 14.2R3
with Junos with Juno
(SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 Continuity Continui
(Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP)
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE — — — 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 14.1R4,

14.2R3
(Channelized OC3/STM1 with Juno
(Multi-Rate) Circuit Continui
Emulation MIC with SFP)
15.1
MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 12.2 12.2 14.1R4, 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 12.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 with Junos with Juno
MIC with XFP) Continuity Continui
15.1 15.1


MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12, — — 15.1 with 11.4 11.4 11.4 11.4 — 15.1

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12 flexible
queuing 14.1R4,
MIC-4COC3-2COC12-G, option 14.2R3
MIC-8COC3-4COC12-G with Juno
Continui
(Channelized SONET/SDH
OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs
with SFP)
MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 13.2 13.2 15.1 with 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 — 14.1R4,
flexible 14.2R3
(Channelized E1/T1 Circuit NOTE: Support NOTE: Support queuing with Juno
Emulation MIC) for for option Continui
Non-Channelized Non-Channelized
MIC only. MIC only. 15.1
MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 11.4 11.4 14.1R4, 11.4 11.4 11.4 11.4 12.2 14.1R4,
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B 14.2R3 14.2R3
with Junos with Juno
(DS3/E3 MIC) Continuity Continui
NOTE: You cannot run 15.1 15.1

Channelized DS3
(MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3) on
non-Q MPCs. Channelized
DS3 is supported only on Q
and EQ-based MPCs.
MS-MIC-16G 13.2 13.2 14.1R4, 13.2 13.2 13.2 13.2 13.2 14.1R4,
14.2R3 14.2R3
(Multiservices MIC) with Junos with Juno
Continuity Continui
NOTE: Only one
MS-MIC-16G can be installed 15.1 15.1
into any MPC.
Table 49: MPC/MPC3 Compatibility

MIC Name MPC3E MPC3E NG MPC3E NG Q
MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM — 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos

Continuity Continuity
(ATM MIC with SFP)
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 12.1 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP)
15.1 15.1

Table 49: MPC/MPC3 Compatibility (continued)

MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 13.2R2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E))
15.1 15.1
MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP 12.1 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP)
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 12.2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP — 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos

(10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with XFP)
15.1 15.1
MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP 12.3 14.1R4, 14.2 R3 and Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP+ (10 Ports))
15.1 15.1
MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP 12.2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with QSFP+)
15.1 15.1
MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP 12.2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP)
15.1 15.1
MIC3-100G-DWDM 15.1F5 15.1F5 15.1F5

15.1F6 15.1F6 15.1F6
(100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC with CFP2-ACO) 17.1R1 17.1R1 17.1R1
MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48 13.3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
15.1 15.1
(SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with
SFP)
MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 13.3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC with XFP)
15.1 15.1

Table 49: MPC/MPC3 Compatibility (continued)

MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE — — 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos

Continuity
(Channelized OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) Circuit
Emulation MIC with SFP) 15.1
MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE — 15.1 with flexible queuing 15.1

option
(Channelized E1/T1 Circuit Emulation MIC)
MS-MIC-16G 13.2R2 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
(Multiservices MIC)
15.1 15.1
NOTE: On MPC3E, the installation of the
Multiservices MIC (MS-MIC-16G) with
MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP,
MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP, or MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP
does not meet the NEBS criteria.
NOTE: Only one MS-MIC-16G can be installed

into any MPC.
MIC-3D-40GE-TX — 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos

Tri-Rate MIC Continuity Continuity
15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48, 12.1 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48 Continuity Continuity
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) MICs with
SFP 15.1 15.1
MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12, — 15.1 with flexible queuing 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos

MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12 option Continuity
MIC-4COC3-2COC12-G, MIC-8COC3-4COC12-G
Channelized SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 (Multi-Rate) 15.1
MICs with SFP
MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B 12.1 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos 14.1R4, 14.2R3 with Junos
DS3/E3 MIC Continuity Continuity
NOTE: You cannot run Channelized DS3 15.1 15.1

(MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3) on non-Q MPCs.
Channelized DS3 is supported only on Q and
EQ-based MPCs.

MIC Name MPC6E
MIC6-10G 13.3R2
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP+ (24 Ports)


MIC Name MPC6E
MIC6-10G-OTN 13.3R3
10-Gigabit Ethernet OTN MIC with SFP+ (24 Ports)
MIC6-100G-CXP 13.3R2
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CXP (4 Ports)
MIC6-100G-CFP2 13.3R3
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP2

MIC Name MPC8E
MIC-MRATE • 15.1F5 with Junos Continuity

• 16.1R1 and later
MIC MRATE

MIC Name MPC9E
MIC-MRATE • 15.1F5 with Junos Continuity

• 16.1R1 and later
MIC MRATE

MIC Name MPC10003
Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC 17.3
Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC
See Also • MICs Supported by MX Series Routers on page 80
• Junos Continuity Software User Guide (Junos OS Release 14.1R4 and Later Releases)
MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description
Modular Interface Cards (MICs) install into Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) and
provide the physical connections to various network media types. MICs allow different
physical interfaces to be supported on a single line card. You can install MICs of different
media types on the MPC as long as the MPC supports those MICs.

MICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the
network. During this process, each MIC performs framing and high-speed signaling for
its media type. Before transmitting outgoing data packets through the MIC interfaces,
the MPCs encapsulate the packets received.
MICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. You can install up to two MICs in the slots
in each MPC.
• Maintaining MX480 MICs on page 430
• Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs on page 446
• Replacing an MX480 MIC on page 337
MX480 MIC Port and Interface Numbering

Each port on a MIC corresponds to a unique interface name in the CLI.
NOTE: Fixed configuration MPCs, that is, MPCs with built-in MICs follow the
port numbering of DPCs.
In the syntax of an interface name, a hyphen (-) separates the media type from the MPC
number (represented as an FPC in the CLI). The MPC slot number corresponds to the
first number in the interface. The second number in the interface corresponds to the
logical PIC number. The last number in the interface matches the port number on the
MIC. Slashes (/) separate the MPC number from the logical PIC number and port number:
type-fpc/pic/port
• fpc—Slot in which the MPC is installed. On the MX480 router, the MPCs are represented
in the CLI as FPC 0 through FPC 5.
• pic—Logical PIC on the MIC, numbered 0 or 1 when installed in slot 0, and 2 or 3 when
installed in slot 1. The number of logical PICs varies depending on the type of MIC. For
example, a:
• 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC has two logical PICs, numbered 0 and 1 when installed
in slot 0, or 2 and 3 when installed in slot 1.

• 4-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC has two logical PICs numbered 0 and 1 when installed
in slot 0, or 2 and 3 when installed in slot 1.
• 100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with CFP has one logical PIC numbered 0 when installed
in slot 0, or 2 when installed in slot 1.
For more information on specific MICs, see “MICs Supported by MX Series Routers” on
page 80 in the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
NOTE: The MIC number is not included in the interface name.
The MX480 router supports up to six MPCs that install horizontally and are numbered
from bottom to top. Each MPC accepts up to two MICs.
Figure 27 on page 78 shows a 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP installed in slot 0of
an MPC in slot 3.
NOTE: The 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP-E has a different port
numbering. See Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP (E)
Figure 27: MX480 MIC Interface Port Mapping

The MIC contains two logical PICs, numbered PIC 0 through PIC 1 in the CLI. Each logical
PIC contains 10 ports numbered 0 through 9.
The following sample CLI output displays a 20-port Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP — 3D
20x 1GE(LAN) SFP — installed in slot 0 of an MPC in slot 3.
...
FPC 3 REV 28 750-031090 YH8181 MPC Type 2 3D EQ
CPU REV 06 711-030884 YH9437 MPC PMB 2G
MIC 0 REV 22 750-028392 YD0439 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP
PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011613 PCE14D5 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 P9C280T SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 P9C2512 SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-011613 AM0951SFF3Z SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-011613 AM0951SFF33 SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-011613 AM0951SFF3Y SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-011613 AM0951SFF4B SFP-SX
Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011613 E08H01273 SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-011613 AM0951SFFWK SFP-SX
PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011613 E08H00516 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011613 E08G03648 SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011613 E08H00514 SFP-SX
...
The show chassis hardware command output shows an MPC (MPC Type 2 3D EQ) installed
in slot 3 and is shown as FPC 3 in the CLI. The MIC’s two logical PICs — 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP
— are shown as PIC 0 and PIC 1.
The show interfaces terse command output displays the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, that
correspond to the 20 ports located on the MIC.
user@host>show interfaces terse ge-3*
Interface Admin Link Proto Local Remote

ge-3/0/0 up down
ge-3/0/1 up down
ge-3/0/2 up down
ge-3/0/3 up up
ge-3/0/4 up up
ge-3/0/5 up up
ge-3/0/6 up up
ge-3/0/7 up up
ge-3/0/8 up up
ge-3/0/9 up down
ge-3/1/0 up up
ge-3/1/1 up up
ge-3/1/2 up up
ge-3/1/3 up down
ge-3/1/4 up down
ge-3/1/5 up down
ge-3/1/6 up down
ge-3/1/7 up down
ge-3/1/8 up down
ge-3/1/9 up down

MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) LEDs

Each MIC has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the
MIC faceplate, see the “LEDs” section for each MIC in the MX Series Interface Module
Reference.
• MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description on page 76
MICs Supported by MX Series Routers

The following tables list the first supported Junos OS release for the MX Series.
• Table 54 on page 80 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX240,
MX480, MX960, and MX2008 routers.
• Table 55 on page 82 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX2010 and
MX2020 routers.
• Table 56 on page 84 list the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX5, MX10,
and MX40 routers.
• Table 57 on page 86 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX80 and
MX104 routers.
• Table 58 on page 87 lists the first supported Junos OS release for MICs on MX10003
router.
Table 54: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers
MX240, MX480,
and MX960
MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports Routers MX2008 Routers
ATM
ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM 8 12.1 15.1F7
DS3/E3
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8 11.4 15.1F7
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B
Circuit Emulation

Table 54: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers (continued)
MX240, MX480,
and MX960
Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 16 12.3 15.1F7

Emulation MIC
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20 10.1 15.1F7
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 20 13.3 15.1F7

(E)
10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2 10.2 15.1F7
XFP
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP 4 10.1 15.1F7

XFP
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP 10 12.3 15.1F7

SFP+ (10 Ports)
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-10G 24 - 15.1F7

SFP+ (24 Ports)
10-Gigabit Ethernet OTN MIC MIC6-10G-OTN 24 - 15.1F7

with SFP+ (24 Ports)
40-Gigabit Ethernet
40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP 2 12.2 15.1F7
QSFP+
100-Gigabit Ethernet
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP 1 12.1 15.1F7
CFP
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP 1 12.2 15.1F7

CXP
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-100G-CXP 4 - 15.1F7

CXP (4 Ports)
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-100G-CFP2 2 - 15.1F7

CFP2
100-Gigabit DWDM OTN

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC MIC3-100G-DWDM 1 15.1F5 15.1F7
with CFP2-ACO 15.1F6
17.1R1

Table 54: MICs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960 and MX2008 Routers (continued)
MX240, MX480,
and MX960
Multi-Rate
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48 4 11.2 15.1F7
(Multi-Rate) MICs with SFP
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48 8 11.2 15.1F7

Channelized SONET/SDH MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12 4 11.4 15.1F7

with SFP
Channelized SONET/SDH MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12 8 11.4 15.1F7

with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 4 12.2 15.1F7

(Multi-Rate) Circuit Emulation
MIC with SFP
MIC MRATE (12-Port Multi-Rate MIC-MRATE 12 - 15.1F7

MIC with QSFP+)
Tri-Rate
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40 10.2 15.1F7
Services
Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G 0 13.2 15.1F7
SONET/SDH
SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 1 12.2 15.1F7
with XFP
Table 55: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers

MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports MX2010 Routers MX2020 Routers
ATM
ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM 8 12.3 12.3
DS3/E3
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8 12.3 12.3
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B
Circuit Emulation

Table 55: MICs Supported by MX2010 and MX2020 Routers (continued)

Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 16 – –

Emulation MIC
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20 12.3 12.3
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 20 13.3 13.3

(E)
10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2 12.3 12.3
XFP
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP 4 12.3 12.3

XFP
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP 10 12.3 12.3

SFP+ (10 Ports)
10-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-10G 24 13.3R2 13.3R2

SFP+ (24 Ports)
10-Gigabit Ethernet OTN MIC MIC6-10G-OTN 24 13.3R3 13.3R3

with SFP+ (24 Ports)
40-Gigabit Ethernet
40-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP 2 12.3 12.3
QSFP+
100-Gigabit Ethernet
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP 1 12.3 12.3
CFP
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP 1 12.3 12.3

CXP
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-100G-CXP 4 13.3R2 13.3R2

CXP (4 Ports)
100-Gigabit Ethernet MIC with MIC6-100G-CFP2 2 13.3R3 13.3R3

CFP2
100-Gigabit DWDM OTN

100-Gigabit DWDM OTN MIC MIC3-100G-DWDM 1 15.1F5 15.1F5
with CFP2-ACO 15.1F6 15.1F6
17.1R1 17.1R1
Multi-Rate


SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48 4 12.3 12.3


Channelized SONET/SDH MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12 4 12.3 12.3

with SFP

with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 4 12.3 12.3

MIC with SFP
MIC MRATE (12-Port Multi-Rate MIC-MRATE 12 • 15.1F5 with Junos • 15.1F5 with Junos
MIC with QSFP+) Continuity Continuity
• 16.1R1 and later • 16.1R1 and later
Tri-Rate
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40 12.3 12.3
Services
Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G 0 13.2 13.2
SONET/SDH
SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 1 12.3 12.3
with XFP
Table 56: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers

MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports MX5 MX10 MX40
ATM
ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM 8 12.1 12.1 12.1
DS3/E3
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8 11.4 11.4 11.4
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B
Circuit Emulation
Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 16 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2
Emulation MIC

Table 56: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers (continued)
Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE-H 16 – – –

Emulation MIC (H)
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20 11.2R4 11.2R4 11.2R4
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 20 13.2R2 13.2R2 13.2R2

(E)
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-EH 20 – – –

(EH)
10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2 11.2R4 11.2R4 11.2R4
XFP
Multi-Rate
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48 4 11.2R4 11.2R4 11.2R4
SONET/SDH OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-8OC3OC12-4OC48 8 11.2R4 11.2R4 11.2R4

Channelized SONET/SDH MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12 4 11.4 11.4 11.4

with SFP
Channelized SONET/SDH MIC-3D-8CHOC3-4CHOC12 8 11.4 11.4 11.4

with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 4 12.2 12.2 12.2

MIC with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-4COC3-1COC12-CE-H - - - -

MIC with SFP (H)
Tri-Rate
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40 – 11.2R4 11.2R4
Services
Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G 0 13.2 13.2 13.2
Rear slot only. Rear slot Rear slot

only. only.

Table 56: MICs Supported by MX5, MX10, and MX40 Routers (continued)
SONET/SDH
SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 1 12.2 12.2 12.2
with XFP
Table 57: MICs Supported by MX80 and MX104 Routers

MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports MX80 MX104
ATM
ATM MIC with SFP MIC-3D-8OC3-2OC12-ATM 8 12.1 13.3
DS3/E3
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3, 8 11.4 13.3
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B
Circuit Emulation
Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 16 13.2R2 13.2R2
Emulation MIC
Channelized E1/T1 Circuit MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE-H 16 – 13.2R2

Emulation MIC (H)
Gigabit Ethernet
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP 20 10.2 13.2R2
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-E 20 13.2R2 13.2R2

(E)
Gigabit Ethernet MIC with SFP MIC-3D-20GE-SFP-EH 20 – 13.2R2

(EH)
10-Gigabit Ethernet
10-Gigabit Ethernet MICs with MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP 2 10.2 13.2R2
XFP
Multi-Rate


with SFP


MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports MX80 MX104

with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 4 12.2 13.2R2

MIC with SFP
Channelized OC3/STM1 MIC-4COC3-1COC12-CE-H - - 13.2R2

MIC with SFP (H)
Tri-Rate
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 40 10.2 13.2R2
Services
Multiservices MIC MS-MIC-16G 0 13.2 13.3R2
Rear slot only. Supported on

the modular MX80 and fixed
MX80-48T
SONET/SDH
SONET/SDH OC192/STM64 MIC MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 1 12.2 13.3
with XFP
Table 58: MICs Supported by MX10003 Router

MIC Name MIC Model Number Ports MX10003
Multi-Rate
Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC JNP-MIC1 12 17.3
Multi-Rate Ethernet MIC JNP-MIC1-MACSEC 12 17.3
See Also • MX Series MIC Overview
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description

Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs) provide packet forwarding services. The MPCs are
inserted into a slot in a router. Modular Interface Cards (MICs) provide the physical
interfaces and install into the MPCs. You can install up to two MICs of different media
types on the same MPC as long as the MPC supports those MICs.

A specialized fixed configuration MPC provides higher port density over MICs and combines
packet forwarding and Ethernet interfaces onto a single line card. The fixed configuration
MPC is inserted into a slot in a router and contains no slots for MICs.
MICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the
network. During this process, each MIC performs framing and high-speed signaling for
its media type. Before transmitting outgoing data packets through the MIC interfaces,
the MPCs encapsulate the packets received. Each MPC is equipped with up to four Junos
Trio chipsets, which perform control functions tailored to the MPC’s media type. The
MPCs interface with the power supplies and Switch Control Boards (SCBs). You must
install redundant SCBs to support full line-rate.
The MX480 router supports up to six MPCs. You must install a high-capacity fan tray to
use an MPC. For power requirements, see “Calculating Power Requirements for MX480
Routers” on page 149.
The router has six dedicated line card slots for DPCs, MPCs, or FPCs that are numbered
0 through 5 bottom to top. An MPC can be installed in any slot on the router that supports
MPCs. You can install any combination of line card types in the router.
When a slot is not occupied by an MPC or other line card, you must insert a blank DPC
panel to fill the empty slot and ensure proper cooling of the system.
MPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. When you install an MPC in an operating
router, the Routing Engine downloads the MPC software, the MPC runs its diagnostics,
and the Packet Forwarding Engines housed on the MPC are enabled. Forwarding on other
MPCs continues uninterrupted during this process.
Figure 29 on page 89 shows a typical MPC supported on the MX480 router. For more
information about MPCs, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.

Figure 28: Typical MPC Supported on the MX Series Router
MPC (empty)
g004902
Figure 29: MPC Installed Horizontally in the MX480 Router
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
MPC
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
g004909
SCB
MPC Components
Each MPC consists of the following components:
• MPC card carrier, which includes two MIC slots (excludes the fixed configuration MPC).
• Fabric interfaces.
• Two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces that allow control information, route information, and
statistics to be sent between the Routing Engine and the CPU on the MPCs.
• Two interfaces from the SCBs that enable the MPCs to be powered on and controlled.

• Physical MPC connectors.
• Up to four Junos Trio chipsets, which perform control functions tailored to the MPC’s
media type.
• Midplane connectors and power circuitry.
• Processor subsystem, which includes a 1.5-GHz CPU, system controller, and 1 GB of

SDRAM.
• Online button which takes the MPC online or offline when pressed.
• OK/Fail LED on the MPC faceplate. For more information about LEDs on the MPC
faceplate, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the MPC, display the status of the line
cards and are labeled OK and FAIL.
See Also • MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers on page 90
• MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 247
• Replacing an MX480 MPC on page 345
MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) LEDs

Two LEDs, located on the craft interface above the MPC, display the status of the line
cards and are labeled OK and FAIL. For more information about the line card LEDs on the
craft interface, see “DPC and MPC LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface” on page 17.
Each MPC also has LEDs located on the faceplate. For more information about LEDs on
the MPC faceplate, see the “LEDs” section for each MPC in the MX Series Interface Module
Reference.
See Also • MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description on page 87
• Maintaining MX480 MPCs on page 431
• Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs on page 447
MPCs Supported by MX Series Routers

Table 59 on page 91 lists the MPCs and their first supported Junos OS release on MX240,
MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and MX10003 routers.

Table 59: MPCs Supported by MX240, MX480, MX960, MX2008, MX2010, MX2020, and
MX10003 Routers
First Junos OS
Release on First Junos OS First Junos OS First Junos OS First Junos OS
MPC MX240, Release on Release on Release on Release on
MPC Model MX480, and MX2008 MX2010 MX2020 MX10003
Name Number MX960 Routers Routers Routers Routers Routers
Fixed Configuration MPCs

16x10GE MPC-3D- 10.0R2 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC
16XGE-SFP
Multiservices MS-MPC 13.2R4 15.1F7 15.1 15.1 –

MPC
32x10GE MPC4E-3D- 12.3R2 15.1F7 12.3R2 12.3R2 –

MPC4E
32XGE-SFPP
2x100GE + MPC4E-3D- 12.3R2 15.1F7 12.3R2 12.3R2 –

8x10GE
MPC4E 2CGE-8XGE
6x40GE + MPC5E-40G10G 13.3R2 15.1F7 13.3R2 13.3R2 –

24x10GE
MPC5E
6x40GE + MPC5EQ-40G10G 13.3R2 15.1F7 13.3R2 13.3R2 –

24x10GE
MPC5EQ
2x100GE + MPC5E-100G10G 13.3R3 15.1F7 13.3R3 13.3R3 –

4x10GE
MPC5E
2x100GE + MPC5EQ-100G10G 13.3R3 15.1F7 13.3R3 13.3R3 –

4x10GE
MPC5EQ
MPC7E MPC7E-MRATE • 15.1F4 with 15.1F7 • 15.1F4 with • 15.1F4 with –

(Multi-Rate) Junos Junos Junos
Continuity Continuity Continuity
• 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and later
later later
MPC7E 10G MPC7E-10G • 15.1F5 with 15.1F7 • 15.1F5 with • 15.1F5 with –
Junos Junos Junos
Continuity Continuity Continuity
• 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and later
later later
MPCs
MPC1 MX-MPC1-3D 10.2 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –

MX10003 Routers (continued)
First Junos OS
MPC1E MX-MPC1E-3D 11.2R4 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC1 Q MX-MPC1-3D-Q 10.2 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC1E Q MX-MPC1E-3D-Q 11.2R4 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2 MX-MPC2-3D 10.1 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2E MX-MPC2E-3D 11.2R4 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2 Q MX-MPC2-3D-Q 10.1 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2E Q MX-MPC2E-3D-Q 11.2R4 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2 EQ MX-MPC2-3D-EQ 10.1 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2E EQ MX-MPC2E-3D-EQ 11.2R4 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2E P MX-MPC2E-3D-P 12.2 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC2E NG MX-MPC2E-3D-NG 14.1R4, 14.2R3 15.1F7 14.1R4, 14.2R3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 and –
and Junos and Junos Junos Continuity
15.1
15.1 15.1
MPC2E NG MX-MPC2E-3D-NG-Q 14.1R4, 14.2R3 15.1F7 14.1R4, 14.2R3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 and –
Q and Junos and Junos Junos Continuity
15.1
15.1 15.1
MPC3E MX-MPC3E-3D 12.1 15.1F7 12.3 12.3 –
MPC3E NG MX-MPC3E-3D-NG 14.1R4, 14.2R3 15.1F7 14.1R4, 14.2R3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 and –
and Junos and Junos Junos Continuity
15.1
15.1 15.1
MPC3E NG MX-MPC3E-3D-NG-Q 14.1R4, 14.2R3 15.1F7 14.1R4, 14.2R3 14.1R4, 14.2R3 and –
Q and Junos and Junos Junos Continuity
15.1
15.1 15.1

MX10003 Routers (continued)
First Junos OS
MPC6E MX2K-MPC6E – 15.1F7 13.3R2 13.3R2 –
MPC8E MX2K-MPC8E – 15.1F7 • 15.1F5 with • 15.1F5 with –

Junos Junos
• 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and later
later
MPC9E MX2K-MPC9E – 15.1F7 • 15.1F5 with • 15.1F5 with –

Junos Junos
• 16.1R1 and • 16.1R1 and later
later
MX10003 MX10003-LC2103 – – – – 17.3

MPC
(Multi-Rate)
See Also • MX Series MPC Overview
• MX Series MIC Overview
• MICs Supported by MX Series Routers on page 80
• Junos Continuity Software Overview
• Pathfinder: Hardware Supported by Junos Continuity Software
MX480 Application Services Modular Line Card Description

The Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC) is an X86-based card for MX960,
MX480, and MX240 routers to deliver integrated application service solutions. The first
application that network operators can take advantage of is the Junos Content Encore
system, a high-throughput, solid state storage platform for media rich content delivery.
Additionally, the AS MLC can serve as the platform for Juniper Networks JunosV App
Engine, powering a host of network applications directly embedded into your MX Series
3D Universal Edge Routers.
The AS MLC is modular and decouples CPU and storage in individual field-upgradeable
units. The AS MLCs are designed to enable application throughput up to 50 Gbps and a
storage capacity of 400 gigabytes (GB) of NAND Flash.

Figure 30: Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC)
g006671
MX480 AS MLC Function
The AS MLC provides modular processing and modular storage. Installed on the AS MLC,
the Junos Content Encore system operates as a caching application, in either HTTP
reverse proxy mode or HTTP transparent proxy mode, to manage client requests for
content and the distribution of the content to clients from origin servers. In the future,
the AS MLC will run other Juniper Networks router services and applications, and serve
as a virtualized platform for third-party applications. The AS MLC provides Ethernet
switching and high-speed fabric interface to MX routers. Graceful Routing Engine
switchover is also supported on the AS MLC.
Integrated with application forwarding on MX Series routers, the AS MLC provides

increased service flexibility with reduced power and space requirements for the network
infrastructure.
AS MLC Components
Each AS MLC consists of the following components:
• AS MLC Modular Carrier Card (AS MCC), which fits horizontally in front of the MX480
router, includes two slots for the Application Services Modular Storage Card (AS MSC)
and Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC)
• AS MXC with 64 GB RAM for processing
• AS MSC with 400 GB of NAND Flash capacity for modular storage
NOTE: The AS MCC, AS MXC, and AS MSC are hot-removable and

hot-insertable.

• Switch fabric interfaces to the chassis
• XM ASIC chip, which owns and manages the packet data memory built from external
DDR3 memory chips, the fabric queuing system, a portion of the WAN queuing system,
and the host queuing system
• LU ASIC chip, which performs all functions relating to header processing including input
processing, route lookup, classification, filtering, policing, accounting, encapsulation,
and statistics
• Midplane connectors and power circuitry
• Processor Mezzanine Board (PMB), which contains the host processor and supporting
peripherals.
• LED on the AS MCC, which displays the status of the AS MLC
MX480 SCB, Power Supply, and Cooling System Requirements for AS MLC
Each MX480 router requires specific SCB, power supply, and cooling system models to
run the AS MLC:
• SCB—Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (SCBE-MX). See “MX480 SCBE Description”

on page 110 for details
• Power supply:
• 2520W AC power supply—Model PWR-MX480-2520-AC
• 2400W DC power supply—Model PWR-MX480-2400-DC
• Power requirement for AS MLC:
• AS MCC—191W
• AS MXC—259W
• AS MSC—50W
• Cooling system—Required fan and fan tray models:
• Fans:
• For AC power supply: PWR-FAN-MX480-AC-HC-U and PWR-MX480-2520-AC-S
• For DC power supply: PWR-FAN-MX480-DC-HC-U and PWR-MX480-2520-DC-S
• Fan tray—FFANTRAY-MX480-HC
See Also • Replacing an MX480 AS MLC on page 355
• Replacing an MX480 AS MSC on page 359
• Replacing an MX480 AS MXC on page 363

MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description
Application Services Modular Storage Card (AS MSC) is a NAND Flash––based card that
is inserted into the upper slot of the Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC).
The AS MSC (see Figure 31 on page 96) serves as the second tier caching storage for
platforms such as the Junos Content Encore system. This card is equivalent to a PIC or
a Modular Interface Card (MIC) and provides a maximum of 3.6 Gbps read and 2 Gbps
of write memory.
The AS MSC has the following features:
• 400 GB NAND Flash memory
• Up to 48K of write cycle
• Multilevel cell (MLC) NAND memory support
• Best-in-class NAND controller for maximum performance and reliability
AS MSCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. One AS MSC can be installed in the top
slot of each AS MLC. Each AS MSC has these components:
• SATA-3 controller—An eight-port, 6 Gbps SAS/SATA controller.
• NAND Flash controller— NAND Flash and NAND Flash controller are used in an AS
MSC.
• Control plane—Inter-integrated circuit control plane that allows Peripheral Component

Interconnect Express (PCIe) control.
• LEDs—Two LEDs display the status of the AS MSC and storage.
• Online/offline button—To power on or power off the AS MSC.
Figure 31: Application Services Modular Storage Card

g006673
See Also • MX480 AS MSC LEDs on page 97

MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description
The Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC) is a pluggable X86-based
card that can be inserted into the lower slot of the Application Services Modular Line
Card (AS MLC). The AS MXC serves as the processing card for the Junos Content Encore
system and contains the two X86, Intel 8-core processors with interface ability greater
than 80 Gbps. The AS MXC (see Figure 32 on page 97) is equivalent to a PIC or MIC
(Modular Interface Card).
AS MXCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable. One MXC can be installed in the lower
slot of each AS MLC. Each MXC has these components:
• Two 8-core Intel processors—Contains eight execution cores with Ring Interconnect
architecture. Each core supports two threads, up to 16 threads per socket.
• 64 GB DRAM—On DIMM sockets.
• LEDs—Two LEDs on the faceplate display the CPU and application status.
Figure 32: Application Services Modular Processing Card (AS MXC)

g006672
See Also • MX480 AS MXC LEDs on page 98
MX480 AS MSC LEDs

Two LEDs (CPU and AP) indicate the status of the AS MSC and are located on the AS
MSC. Table 60 on page 97 describes the functions of the AS MSC LEDs.
Table 60: AS MSC LEDs

CPU Green On steadily AS MSC operates normally.
Red On steadily AS MSC has an error or has failed.
– Off AS MSC is offline.

Table 60: AS MSC LEDs (continued)

AP Green On steadily AS MSC storage operation is normal.
Red On steadily AS MSC storage operation has an error.
– Off AS MSC storage operation is not activated.
See Also • MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description on page 96
MX480 AS MXC LEDs

Two LEDs (CPU and AP) indicate the status of the AS MXC and are located on the AS
MXC. Table 61 on page 98 describes the functions of the AS MXC LEDs.
Table 61: AS MXC LEDs

CPU Green On steadily AS MXC operates normally.
Red On steadily AS MXC has an error or has failed.
– Off AS MXC is offline.
AP Green On steadily AS MXC applications operation is normal.
Red On steadily AS MXC applications operation has an error.
– Off AS MXC applications are not activated.
See Also • MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description on page 97

CHAPTER 7
Power System Components and

Descriptions

• MX480 AC Power Supply Description on page 100
• MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs on page 102
• MX480 DC Power Supply Description on page 102
• MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs on page 104
MX480 Power System Description
The MX480 router uses either AC or DC power supplies. The MX480 router is configurable
with two, three, or four AC power supplies or two or four DC power supplies. The power
supplies connect to the midplane, which distributes the different output voltages produced
by the power supplies to the router components, depending on their voltage requirements.
Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
CAUTION: The router cannot be powered from AC and DC power supplies

simultaneously.
Redundant power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “MX480

Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 247.
CAUTION: When you remove a power supply from a router that uses a
nonredundant power supply configuration, the router might shut down
depending on your configuration.
NOTE:
Enhanced AC and DC power supplies are an upgrade for the MX480 router,
and satisfy power requirements for higher-density DPCs. When upgrading to
enhanced power supplies, always upgrade power supplies in adjacent slots.

NOTE: Routers configured with DC power supplies are shipped with a blank
panel installed over the power distribution modules. Routers configured with
AC power supplies have no blank panel.
Related • MX480 AC Power Supply Description on page 100

Documentation
• Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power

Supplies on page 219
• Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power

• Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 367
• MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications on page 127
• MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications
MX480 AC Power Supply Description
Each AC power supply weighs approximately 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) and consists of one AC
appliance inlet, an AC input switch, a fan, and LEDs to monitor the status of the power
supply. Figure 33 on page 100 shows the power supply. For existing power supplies, each
inlet requires a dedicated AC power feed and a dedicated 15 A (250 VAC) circuit breaker.
For high-capacity power supplies, each inlet requires a dedicated AC power feed and a
dedicated 16.0 A @ 100 VAC or 16.0 A @ 200 VAC circuit breaker, or as required by local
code.
The maximum inrush current for a high-capacity AC power supply is 49A at 264VAC.
Figure 33: AC Power Supply

Chapter 7: Power System Components and Descriptions
Figure 34: High-Capacity AC Power Supply
AC OK
DC OK
PS
FAIL
For more information about the AC power specifications, see the MX480 3D Universal
Edge Router Hardware Guide.
WARNING: The router is pluggable type A equipment installed in a

restricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal
(sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to the
grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthing
terminal must be permanently connected to earth.
AC Power Supply Configurations

The MX480 high-capacity and normal-capacity power supplies each support either of
the following AC power configurations:
• In the low-line (110 V) AC power configuration, the MX480 router contains three or
four AC power supplies (see Figure 33 on page 100), located horizontally at the rear of
the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides
power to all components in the router. When three power supplies are present, they
share power almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies
provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining
power supplies assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Three power
supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the router
is operational. The low-line configuration requires three power supplies and the fourth
power supply provides redundancy. With high-capacity power supplies, you must have
a minimum of three power supplies installed in the router.
• In the high-line (220 V) AC power configuration, the MX480 router contains two or
four AC power supplies (see Figure 33 on page 100), located horizontally at the rear of
the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). In a high-line AC power
configuration, each AC power supply provides power to all components in the router.
When two or more power supplies are present, they share power almost equally within
a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If
one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies assume the entire
electrical load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum

configuration with full power for as long as the router is operational. In the two-PEM
high-line configuration, slots PEM0 and PEM1 or PEM2 and PEM3 are used. The high-line
configuration requires two power supplies, with the third and fourth providing
redundancy. With high-capacity power supplies, you must have a minimum of two
power supplies installed in the router.
Related • MX480 Chassis Description on page 9

Documentation
• MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs on page 102
MX480 AC Power Supply LEDs
Each AC power supply faceplate contains three LEDs that indicate the status of the
power supply (see Table 62 on page 102). The power supply status is also reflected in
two LEDs on the craft interface. In addition, a power supply failure triggers the red alarm
LED on the craft interface.
Table 62: AC Power Supply LEDs

AC OK Yellow Off AC power input voltage is below 78 VAC.
Green On AC power input voltage is within 78–264 VAC.
DC OK Green Off DC power outputs generated by the power supply are not within the normal
operating ranges.
On DC power outputs generated by the power supply are within the normal operating
ranges.
PS FAIL Red Off Power supply is functioning normally.
On Power supply is not functioning normally and its output voltage is out of regulation
limits. Check AC OK and DC OK LEDs for more information.

Documentation
MX480 DC Power Supply Description
Each DC power supply weighs approximately 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) and consists of one DC input
(–48 VDC and return), one 40 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker, a fan, and LEDs to monitor
the status of the power supply. Figure 35 on page 103 shows the power supply. Each DC

power supply has a single DC input (–48 VDC and return) that requires a dedicated circuit
breaker.
For high capacity power supplies, we recommend that you provision 60 A or 70 A per
feed, depending on the selected DIP switch setting.
Figure 35: DC Power Supply
Figure 36: High-Capacity DC Power Supply
g004725
DC Power Supply Configurations

In the DC power configuration, the MX480 router contains either two or four DC power
supplies (see Figure 35 on page 103) located at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0
through PEM3 (left to right). You can upgrade your DC power system from two to four
power supplies.
Four power supplies provide full redundancy. If a DC power supply in a redundant

configuration is removed or fails, its redundant power supply takes over without
interruption. The DC power supply in PEM2 serves as redundant to the DC power supply
in slot PEM0, and the DC power supply in PEM3 serves as redundant to the DC power
supply in slot PEM1. If only two DC power supplies are installed, they must be installed
in slots PEM0 and PEM1 or in slots PEM2 and PEM3.
Table 63 on page 104 shows the components that are powered by each DC power supply
slot. It applies to existing and high-capacity power supplies.

Table 63: Power Supply Redundancy and Power Distribution

DC Power Supply Slot Power Supply Provides Power to the Following Components
PEM0 Fan tray, DPC slots 0 and 1, and SCB slots 0 and 1
PEM1 Fan tray and DPC slots 2 through 5
PEM2 Fan tray, DPC slots 0 and 1, and SCB slots 0 and 1
PEM3 Fan tray and DPC slots 2 through 5
Related • Power Supply LEDs on the MX480 Craft Interface on page 17

Documentation
• MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs on page 104
• DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 157
MX480 DC Power Supply LEDs
Each DC power supply faceplate contains three LEDs that indicate the status of the
power supply (see Table 64 on page 104). The power supply status is also reflected in
two LEDs on the craft interface.In addition, a power supply failure triggers the red alarm
LED on the craft interface.
NOTE: An SCB must be present for the PWR OK LED to go on.
Table 64: DC Power Supply LEDs

PWR OK Green Off Power supply is not functioning normally. Check the INPUT OK LED for more
information.

Table 64: DC Power Supply LEDs (continued)

On Power supply is functioning normally.
Yellow On The main output voltage is out of range (lower limit: 37.5 V to 39.5 V; upper limit:
72.5 V to 76 V).
BRKR ON Green Off DC power supply circuit breaker is turned off.
On DC power input is present and the DC power supply circuit breaker is turned on.
INPUT OK Green Off DC input to the PEM is not present.
On DC input is present and is connected in correct polarity.
Yellow On DC input is present, but not in valid operating range or connected in reverse polarity.

Documentation


CHAPTER 8
Switch Fabric Components and

Descriptions

• SCB-MX LEDs on page 109
• MX480 SCBE Description on page 110
• MX480 SCBE LEDs on page 111
• MX480 SCBE2 Description on page 113
• MX480 SCBE2 LEDs on page 114
MX480 SCB Description
The SCB provides the following functions:
• Powers on and powers off DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs
• Controls clocking, system resets, and booting
• Monitors and controls system functions, including fan speed, board power status, PDM
status and control, and the craft interface
• Provides interconnections to all the DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs within the chassis through
the switch fabrics integrated into the SCB
The Routing Engine installs directly into a slot on the SCB (see Figure 37 on page 108).

Figure 37: SCB
SCB Slots
You can install one or two. The SCBs install horizontally into the front of the chassis in
the slots labeled 0 and 1. If any slots are empty, you must install a blank panel.
SCB Redundancy
If two SCBs are installed, one SCB functions as the master SCB and the other as its
backup. If the master fails or is removed, the backup restarts and becomes the master.
SCB Components
Each SCB consists of the following components:
• Chassis management Ethernet switch
• I2C bus logic, used for low-level communication with each component
• Component redundancy circuitry
• Control Board/Routing Engine mastership mechanism
• Gigabit Ethernet switch that is connected to the embedded CPU complex on all
components
• Switch fabric—Provides the switching functions for the DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs
• Control field-programmable gate array (FPGA)—Provides the Peripheral Component

Interconnect (PCI) interface to the Routing Engine
• 1000Base-T Ethernet controller—Provides a 1-Gbps Ethernet link between the Routing

Engines

Chapter 8: Switch Fabric Components and Descriptions
• Ethernet switch—Provides 1-Gbps link speeds between the Routing Engine and the
DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs
• Circuits for chassis management and control
• Power circuits for the Routing Engine and SCB
• LEDs—Provide status
Related • MX480 Host Subsystem Description on page 25

Documentation
• SCB-MX LEDs on page 109
SCB-MX LEDs
FABRIC ACTIVE, FABRIC ONLY, and OK/FAIL LEDs indicate the status of the SCB-MX.
Refer to Table 65 on page 109.
Table 65: SCB-MX LEDs

FABRIC Green On steadily Fabric is in active mode.

ACTIVE
FABRIC Green On steadily SCB-MX operates in fabric-only mode.

ONLY
– Off SCB-MX operates in fabric/control board mode.
OK/FAIL Green On steadily SCB-MX is online.
Red On steadily SCB-MX has failed.
– Off SCB-MX is offline.
Each SCB-MX also has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The
SCB-MX LEDs, labeled 0 and 1, are located along the bottom of the craft interface. For
more information about the SCB-MX LEDs on the craft interface, see “SCB LEDs on the
MX480 Craft Interface” on page 18.
Related • MX-Series Switch Control Board (SBC) Overview

Documentation
• SCBE2-MX Description
• SCBE2-MX LEDs

MX480 SCBE Description
The MX SCBE serves the carrier Ethernet services router and carrier Ethernet transport
markets that require higher-capacity traffic support demanding greater interface density
(slot and capacity scale), as well as improved services. The upgraded SCB is supported
on MX960, MX480, and MX240 routers. Some key attributes of the MX SCBEs are:
• 160 Gbps/slot bandwidth with redundant fabric support, and improved fabric
performance by using the next-generation fabric (XF) chip
• A central clocking module and a centralized clocking architecture that supports clock
cleanup and distribution. The Stratum 3 clock module performs clock monitoring,
filtering, and holdover in a centralized chassis location
• Full performance with fabric redundancy for higher capacity line cards such as 16x10GE
and MPC3
The Routing Engine installs directly into a slot on the MX SCBE (see Figure 38 on page 110).
Figure 38: MX SCBE

SCBE-MX
g006589

MX SCBE Slots
You can install one or two MX SCBEs. The MX SCBEs install horizontally into the front
of the chassis in the slots labeled 0 and 1. If any slots are empty, you must install a blank
panel.
MX SCBE Redundancy
If two MX SCBEs are installed, one MX SCBE functions as the master MX SCBE and the
other as its backup. If the master fails or is removed, the backup restarts and becomes
the master.
MX SCBE Components
Each MX SCBE consists of the following components:
• Component redundancy circuitry
components
• External clock interface—Allows BITS or GPS clock source input to the centralized
timing circuit, or allows centralized timing to be output to BITS or GPS
• Switch fabric—Provides the switching functions for the DPCs, FPCs, and MPCs


Engines
• Power circuits for the Routing Engine and SCBE
• LEDs—Provide status of the SCBE and clocking interface
Related • MX480 SCB Description on page 107

Documentation
• MX480 SCBE LEDs on page 111
• Upgrading an MX480 SCB on page 385
MX480 SCBE LEDs
The FABRIC ACTIVE, FABRIC ONLY, and OK/FAIL LEDs indicate the status of the MX
SCBE. The BITS, GPS, and UTI LEDs, located next to the EXT CLK port, indicate the status
of the respective clocking interface. Table 66 on page 112 describes the functions of the
MX SCBE LEDs.

Table 66: MX SCBE LEDs


ACTIVE
FABRIC Green On steadily MX SCBE operates in fabric-only mode.

ONLY
– Off MX SCBE operates in fabric/control board mode.
OK/FAIL Green On steadily MX SCBE is online.
Red On steadily MX SCBE has failed.
– Off MX SCBE is offline.
Red On steadily GPS clocking interface has failed.
– Off GPS clocking interface is offline.
NOTE: The LEDs BITS, GPS, and UTI are not currently supported.
BITS Green On steadily Building-integrated timing supply (BITS) clocking

interface is active.
Red On steadily BITS clocking interface has failed.
– Off BITS clocking interface is offline.
GPS Green On steadily Global positioning system (GPS) clocking interface

is active.
UTI Green On steadily Universal Timing Interface (UTI) clocking interface

is active.
Red On steadily UTI clocking interface has failed.
– Off UTI clocking interface is offline.
Related • MX480 SCBE Description on page 110

Documentation

MX480 SCBE2 Description
The Switch Control Board (SCBE2) serves the carrier Ethernet services router and carrier
Ethernet transport markets that require higher-capacity traffic support, demanding
greater interface density (slot and capacity scale) as well as improved services. The
upgraded SCB is supported on MX960, MX480, and MX240 routers. Some key attributes
of the SCBE2 are:
• A bandwidth of up to 340 Gbps per slot with redundant fabric support and 480 Gbps
per slot without redundancy, and improved fabric performance on account of using
the next-generation fabric (XF2) chip.
• A central clocking module and a centralized clocking architecture that support clock
cleanup and distribution. The Stratum 3 clock module performs clock monitoring,
filtering, and holdover at a centralized chassis location.
• Full performance with fabric redundancy for higher-capacity line cards such as MPC4.
• Support for MPC line cards only.
• Two 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports. SFP+ port 0 can be used to connect an external
device as a Route Reflector. SFP+ port 1 is unused.
• Support for cross-coupling of clock input (which requires an enhanced midplane:

CHAS-BP3-MX480-S). You can configure the system such that one SCBE2 supports
a GPS interface, and the other SCBE2 supports a BITS interface.
The Routing Engine is installed directly into a slot on the SCBE2 (see Figure 39 on page 113).
Figure 39: SCBE2

SCBE2 Slots
You can install either one or two SCBE2s. SCBE2s are installed horizontally into the front
of the chassis in the slots labeled 0 and 1. If any slots are empty, you must install a blank
panel.
SCBE2 Redundancy
The control boards operate in redundancy fabric mode by default. You can configure the
control board to be in redundancy mode or in increased fabric bandwidth mode.
For the MX480 router in redundant fabric mode, four of the fabric planes from the first
SCBE2 will be in Active mode, and four from the second SCBE2 will be in Spare mode.
Whereas, in an increased fabric bandwidth mode, all the eight fabric planes will be in
Active mode.
SCBE2 Components
Each SCBE2 consists of the following components:
• Component-redundancy circuitry
components
• External clock interface—Allows BITS or GPS clock source input to the centralized
timing circuit, or allows centralized timing to be output to BITS or GPS
• Switch fabric—Provides switching functions for the MPCs


Engines
• Power circuits for the Routing Engine and SCBE2
• LEDs—Provide status of the SCBE2 and clocking interface
Related •
Documentation
MX480 SCBE2 LEDs
FABRIC ACTIVE, FABRIC ONLY, and OK/FAIL LEDs indicate the status of the SCBE2. The
BITS, GPS, and UTI LEDs, located next to the EXT CLK port, indicate the status of the
respective clocking interface. The LINK LED located next to the two Ethernet ports,

indicate the status of the respective SFP+ interface. Table 67 on page 115 describes the
functions of the SCBE2 LEDs.
Table 67: SCBE2 LEDs


ACTIVE
FABRIC Green On steadily SCBE2 operates in fabric-only mode.

ONLY
– Off SCBE2 operates in fabric or control-board mode.
OK/FAIL Green On steadily SCBE2 is online.
Red On steadily SCBE2 has failed.
– Off SCBE2 is offline.
BITS Green On steadily Building-integrated timing supply (BITS) clocking

interface is active.
Red On steadily BITS clocking interface has failed.
– Off BITS clocking interface is offline.
GPS Green On steadily Global positioning system (GPS) clocking interface

is active.
UTI Green On steadily Universal Timing Interface (UTI) clocking interface

is active.
Red On steadily UTI clocking interface has failed.
– Off UTI clocking interface is offline.
LINK Green On steadily Port is enabled and link is established.
– Off Port is disabled or no link is established.
Related •
Documentation


PART 2
Site Planning, Preparation, and

Specifications
• Preparation Overview on page 119
• Transceiver and Cable Specifications on page 131
• Cable and Pinout Specifications on page 137
• AC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines on page 139
• DC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines on page 157


CHAPTER 9
Preparation Overview

• MX480 Router Environmental Specifications on page 121
• MX480 Site Preparation Checklist on page 121
• MX480 Router Rack Requirements on page 122
• MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware
Maintenance on page 125
• MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements on page 126
• MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements on page 126
MX480 Router Physical Specifications
Table 68 on page 119 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis.
Table 68: Physical Specifications

Description Weight Width Depth Height
Chassis dimensions Chassis with 17.45 in. (44.3 cm) 24.5 in. (62.2 cm) 14.0 in. (35.6 cm)
midplane, fan tray, air (from front to chassis
filter, and cable rear)
management
brackets: 65.5 lb Total depth (including
(29.7 kg) cable management
brackets) 27.75 in.
Maximum (70.5 cm)
configuration:
221.03 lb (100.26 kg)
Routing Engine (RE-S-1800) 2.4 lb (1.1 kg) 11 in (27.9 cm) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
Routing Engine (RE-S-X6-64G) 2.69 lb (1.18 kg) 10.7 in (27.18 cm) 7.47 in (18.97 cm) 1.19 in (3.02 cm)
SCB 9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
Routing Engine
installed)

Table 68: Physical Specifications (continued)

Description Weight Width Depth Height
SCBE 9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
Routing Engine
installed)
SCBE2 9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (with 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
Routing Engine
installed)
DPC Maximum up to 14.5 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
lb (6.6 kg)
Blank panel in DPC

slot: 9 lb
FPC FPC2: 13 lb (5.9 kg) 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 2.5 in (6.4 cm)
FPC3: 14 lb (6.5 kg)
PIC 2 lb (0.9 kg) 7.75 in (28.3 cm) 11.125 in (19.7 cm) 4.125 in (10.5 cm)
MPC (fixed configuration) 18.35 lb (8.3 kg) 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
MPC (without MICs) 14 lb (6.4 kg) 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
MIC Maximum up to 1.2 lb 6.25 in (15.9 cm) 6.8 in (17.3 cm) 1.25 in (3.2 cm)
(0.54 kg)
Craft interface 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) 21.25 in (54 cm) 8.5 in (21.6 cm) 6.25 in (15.9 cm)
Fan tray 6.8 lb (3.08 kg) 17 in (43.2 cm) 22 in (55.9 cm) 1.5 in (3.8 cm)
Air filter 1.0 lb (0.5 kg) 0.31 in (0.8 cm) 22.23 in (56.5 cm) 10.1 in (25.6 cm)
Cable management brackets 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 0.25 in (0.6 cm) 4.5 in (11.4 cm) 9.9 in (25.0 cm)
DC power supply 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) 14.5 in (36.8 cm) 4 in (10.2 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm)
High-capacity DC power supply 6.2 lb (2.81 kg) 14.5 in (36.8 cm) 4 in (10.2 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm)
AC power supply 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) 14.5 in (36.8 cm) 4 in (10.2 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm)
High-capacity AC power supply 6.6 lb (2.99 kg) 14.5 in (36.8 cm) 4 in (10.2 cm) 1.75 in (4.4 cm)
Related • MX480 Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 488

Documentation
• MX480 Router Description on page 3

Chapter 9: Preparation Overview
MX480 Router Environmental Specifications
Table 69 on page 121 specifies the environmental specifications required for normal router
operation. In addition, the site should be as dust-free as possible.
Table 69: Router Environmental Specifications

Description Value
Altitude No performance degradation to 10,000 ft (3048 m)
Relative humidity Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to 90%,

noncondensing
Temperature Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32°F (0°C) to

104°F (40°C)
Nonoperating storage temperature in shipping container:

–40°F (–40°C) to 158°F (70°C)
Seismic Designed to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake

requirements
Maximum thermal output AC power: 11,322 BTU/hour (3,318 W)
DC power: 9,632 BTU/hour (2,823 W)
NOTE: These specifications are estimates and subject to change.
NOTE: Install the router only in restricted areas, such as dedicated equipment
rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and
110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
Related • Tools and Parts Required to Maintain the MX480 Router on page 415
Documentation
• In Case of an Electrical Accident
MX480 Site Preparation Checklist
The checklist in Table 70 on page 121 summarizes the tasks you must perform when
preparing a site for router installation.
Table 70: Site Preparation Checklist

Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date
Verify that environmental factors such as “MX480 Router Environmental

temperature and humidity do not exceed router Specifications” on page 121
tolerances.

Table 70: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)

Item or Task For More Information Performed By Date
Select the type of rack or cabinet. “MX480 Router Rack Requirements”

on page 122,
“MX480 Router Cabinet Size and
Clearance Requirements” on page 126
Plan rack or cabinet location, including required “MX480 Router Rack Requirements”
space clearances. on page 122,
“MX480 Router Clearance
Requirements for Airflow and
Hardware Maintenance” on page 125,
“MX480 Router Cabinet Size and
Clearance Requirements” on page 126
If a rack is used, secure rack to floor and building “MX480 Router Rack Requirements”
structure. on page 122
Acquire cables and connectors.
Locate sites for connection of system “MX480 Chassis Grounding

grounding. Specifications” on page 127,
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug
Specifications,
MX480 Router Grounding Cable
Specifications
Measure distance between external power

sources and router installation site.
Calculate the optical power budget and optical “Calculating Power Budget and
power margin. Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables”
on page 131
Related • MX480 Router Rack Requirements on page 122

Documentation
• MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on
page 125
• MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements on page 126
MX480 Router Rack Requirements
The router can be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable, including
four-post (telco) racks and open-frame racks. An example of an open-frame rack appears
in Figure 40 on page 124.
• Rack Size and Strength on page 123

• Spacing of Mounting Bracket Holes on page 124
• Connection to Building Structure on page 124

Rack Size and Strength

The router is designed for installation in a 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels,
and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronic
Components Industry Association (ECIA) (http://www.ecianow.org).
With the use of adapters or approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the
rails, the router fits into a 600-mm-wide rack or cabinet , as defined in the four-part
Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunications standard for equipment practice
(document number ETSI EN 300 119) published by the European Telecommunications
Standards Institute (http://www.etsi.org).
The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis's
external dimensions: 14.0 in. (356 mm) high, 24.5 in. (622 mm) deep, and
17.45 in. (443 mm) wide. The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the
clearances around the router and rack that are specified in “MX480 Router Clearance
Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance” on page 125.
In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because the more

even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability.
For instructions about installing the mounting hardware, see “Installing the MX480 Router
Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet” on page 183.
The chassis height of 14.0 in. (35.6 cm) is approximately 8 U. A U is the standard rack
unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number
EIA-310-D) published by the Electronic Components Industry Association (ECIA)
(http://www.ecianow.org). You can stack five MX480 routers in a rack that has at least
48 U (84 in. or 2.13 m) of usable vertical space.
The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured router, up
to 163.5 lb (74.2 kg). If you stack five fully configured routers in one rack, it must be capable
of supporting up to 818 lb (371.0 kg).

Figure 40: Typical Open-Frame Rack
Spacing of Mounting Bracket Holes

The router can be mounted in any rack that provides holes or hole patterns spaced at 1
U (1.75 in.) increments. The mounting brackets used to attach the chassis to a rack are
designed to fasten to holes spaced at those distances.
Connection to Building Structure

Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical area is subject
to earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum stability, also secure the rack to
ceiling brackets.
Related • MX480 Site Preparation Checklist on page 121

Documentation
• Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices

MX480 Router Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
When planning the installation site, you need to allow sufficient clearance around the
rack (see Figure 41 on page 125):
• For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be
unrestricted. Allow at least 8 in. (20.3 cm) of clearance between side-cooled routers.
Allow 5.5 in. (14 cm) between the side of the chassis and any non-heat-producing
surface such as a wall.
• For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must be
adequate space at the front and back of the router. At least 24 in. (61 cm) is required
both in front of and behind the router. NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at
least 30 in. (72.6 cm) in front of the rack and 24 in. (61.0 cm) behind the rack.
Airflow must always be from front to back with respect to the rack. If the device has
side to rear airflow, then provisions must be made to ensure that fresh air from the
front of the rack is supplied to the inlets, and exhaust exits the rear of the rack. The
device must not interfere with the cooling of other systems in the rack. Fillers must be
used as appropriate in the rack to ensure there is no recirculation of heated exhaust
air back to the front of the rack. Care must also be taken around cables to ensure that
no leakage of air in situations where recirculation may result.
Figure 41: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance

for an MX480 Router Chassis

Documentation

MX480 Router Cabinet Size and Clearance Requirements
The minimum size cabinet that can accommodate the router is 482 mm wide and 800 mm
deep. A cabinet larger than the minimum requirement provides better airflow and reduces
the chance of overheating. To accommodate a single router, the cabinet must be at least
13 U high. If you provide adequate cooling air and airflow clearance, you can stack five
routers in a cabinet that has at least 48 U (84 in. or 2.13 m) of usable vertical space.
The minimum front and rear clearance requirements depend on the mounting
configuration you choose. The minimum total clearance inside the cabinet is 30.7 in.
between the inside of the front door and the inside of the rear door.

Documentation
• MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements on page 126
MX480 Router Cabinet Airflow Requirements
Before you install the router in a cabinet, you must ensure that ventilation through the
cabinet is sufficient to prevent overheating. Consider the following requirements to when
planning for chassis cooling:
• Ensure that the cool air supply you provide through the cabinet can adequately dissipate
the thermal output of the router.
• Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassis hot exhaust air to exit from the cabinet
without recirculating into the router. An open cabinet (without a top or doors) that
employs hot air exhaust extraction from the top allows the best airflow through the
chassis. If the cabinet contains a top or doors, perforations in these elements assist
with removing the hot air exhaust. For an illustration of chassis airflow, see
Figure 42 on page 127.
• Install the router as close as possible to the front of the cabinet so that the cable
management brackets just clear the inside of the front door. This maximizes the
clearance in the rear of the cabinet for critical airflow.
• Route and dress all cables to minimize the blockage of airflow to and from the chassis.

Figure 42: Airflow Through the Chassis

Documentation
MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications
• MX480 Chassis Grounding Points Specifications on page 127

• MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications on page 128
• MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications on page 129
MX480 Chassis Grounding Points Specifications

To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, the router must be adequately grounded before power is connected.
To ground AC-powered and DC-powered routers, you must connect a grounding cable
to earth ground and then attach it to the chassis grounding points using the two screws
provided.
Two threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the upper rear of the chassis for
connecting the router to earth ground. The grounding points fit UNC 1/4–20 screws
(American). The grounding points are spaced at 0.625-in. (15.86-mm) centers (see
Figure 43 on page 128 or Figure 44 on page 128).
NOTE: Additional grounding is provided to an AC-powered router when you

plug its power supplies into grounded AC power receptacles.

Figure 43: Connecting AC Power to the Router
Figure 44: Connecting DC Power to the Router
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Lug Specifications

The accessory box shipped with the router includes one cable lug that attaches to the
grounding cable (see Figure 45 on page 129) and two UNC 1/4–20 screws used to secure
the grounding cable to the grounding points.

Figure 45: Grounding Cable Lug

2.25
End view
0.28
6 AWG conductor
0.55 diameter
each hole
Crimp area
g001188
0.08 0.25 0.625 0.37 All measurements in inches
CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach

a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with
an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router.
NOTE: The same cable lug is used for the DC power cables.
MX480 Router Grounding Cable Specifications

The grounding cable that you provide must meet the specifications in Table 71 on page 129.
Table 71: Grounding Cable Specifications

Cable Type Quantity and Specification
2
Grounding One 6-AWG (13.3 mm ), minimum 60°C wire, or as required by the local code

Related • Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections on
• Grounding the MX480 Router on page 218
• Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router on page 484


CHAPTER 10
Transceiver and Cable Specifications
• Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables on page 131
• Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion on page 133
• Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers on page 134
Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables
Use the information in this topic and the specifications for your optical interface to
calculate the power budget and power margin for fiber-optic cables.
TIP: You can use the Hardware Compatibility Tool to find information about
the pluggable transceivers supported on your Juniper Networks device.
To calculate the power budget and power margin, perform the following tasks:
1. Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable on page 131

2. Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable on page 132
Calculating Power Budget for Fiber-Optic Cable

To ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation, you
need to calculate the link's power budget, which is the maximum amount of power it
can transmit. When you calculate the power budget, you use a worst-case analysis to
provide a margin of error, even though all the parts of an actual system do not operate
at the worst-case levels. To calculate the worst-case estimate of power budget (P ),
B
you assume minimum transmitter power (P ) and minimum receiver sensitivity (P ):
T R
P =P –P
B T R
The following hypothetical power budget equation uses values measured in decibels
(dB) and decibels referred to one milliwatt (dBm):
P =P –P
B T R
P = –15 dBm – (–28 dBm)

B
P = 13 dB
B

Calculating Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cable

After calculating a link's power budget, you can calculate the power margin (P ), which
M
represents the amount of power available after subtracting attenuation or link loss (LL)
from the power budget (P ). A worst-case estimate of P assumes maximum LL:
B M
P = P – LL
M B
P greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to operate the receiver.
M
Factors that can cause link loss include higher-order mode losses, modal and chromatic
dispersion, connectors, splices, and fiber attenuation. Table 72 on page 132 lists an
estimated amount of loss for the factors used in the following sample calculations. For
information about the actual amount of signal loss caused by equipment and other
factors, refer to vendor documentation.
Table 72: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss

Link-Loss Factor Estimated Link-Loss Value
Higher-order mode losses Single-mode—None
Multimode—0.5 dB
Modal and chromatic dispersion Single-mode—None
Multimode—None, if product of bandwidth and distance is less than 500

MHz-km
Connector 0.5 dB
Splice 0.5 dB
Fiber attenuation Single-mode—0.5 dB/km
Multimode—1 dB/km
The following sample calculation for a 2-km-long multimode link with a power budget
(P ) of 13 dB uses the estimated values from Table 72 on page 132 to calculate link loss
B
(LL) as the sum of fiber attenuation (2 km @ 1 dB/km, or 2 dB) and loss for five connectors
(0.5 dB per connector, or 2.5 dB) and two splices (0.5 dB per splice, or 1 dB) as well as
higher-order mode losses (0.5 dB). The power margin (P ) is calculated as follows:
M
P = P – LL
M B
P = 13 dB – 2 km (1 dB/km) – 5 (0.5 dB) – 2 (0.5 dB) – 0.5 dB

M
P = 13 dB – 2 dB – 2.5 dB – 1 dB – 0.5 dB
M
P = 7 dB
M

Chapter 10: Transceiver and Cable Specifications
The following sample calculation for an 8-km-long single-mode link with a power budget
(P ) of 13 dB uses the estimated values from Table 72 on page 132 to calculate link loss
B
(LL) as the sum of fiber attenuation (8 km @ 0.5 dB/km, or 4 dB) and loss for seven
connectors (0.5 dB per connector, or 3.5 dB). The power margin (P ) is calculated as
M
follows:
P = P – LL
M B
P = 13 dB – 8 km (0.5 dB/km) – 7(0.5 dB)

M
P = 13 dB – 4 dB – 3.5 dB
M
P = 5.5 dB
M
In both examples, the calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the
link has sufficient power for transmission and does not exceed the maximum receiver
input power.
Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion
This topic describes signal loss, attenuation, and dispersion in fiber-optic cable. For
information about calculating power budget and power margin for fiber-optic cable, see
“Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables” on page 131.
• Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable on page 133

• Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable on page 133
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable

Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally
(bounce off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs
as light sources. However, LEDs are not coherent sources. They spray varying wavelengths
of light into the multimode fiber, which reflects the light at different angles. Light rays
travel in jagged lines through a multimode fiber, causing signal dispersion. When light
traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber cladding, higher-order mode loss results.
Together these factors limit the transmission distance of multimode fiber compared with
single-mode fiber.
Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light can reflect internally through
one layer only. Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers
generate a single wavelength of light, which travels in a straight line through the
single-mode fiber. Compared with multimode fiber, single-mode fiber has higher
bandwidth and can carry signals for longer distances.
Exceeding the maximum transmission distances can result in significant signal loss, which
causes unreliable transmission.
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable

Correct functioning of an optical data link depends on modulated light reaching the
receiver with enough power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the reduction in
power of the light signal as it is transmitted. Attenuation is caused by passive media

components, such as cables, cable splices, and connectors. Although attenuation is

significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media, it still occurs in both multimode
and single-mode transmission. An efficient optical data link must have enough light
available to overcome attenuation.
Dispersion is the spreading of the signal over time. The following two types of dispersion
can affect an optical data link:
• Chromatic dispersion—Spreading of the signal over time resulting from the different
speeds of light rays.
• Modal dispersion—Spreading of the signal over time resulting from the different
propagation modes in the fiber.
For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic dispersion or

attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length. For single-mode
transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However, at higher bit rates and over longer
distances, chromatic dispersion rather than modal dispersion limits maximum link length.
An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that
the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion
must be less than the limits specified for the type of link in Telcordia Technologies
document GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International Telecommunications Union
(ITU) document G.957.
When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered as
a power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum
of component attenuation, power penalties (including those from dispersion), and a
safety margin for unexpected losses.
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers
Table 73 on page 134 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management
ports and the wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts.
NOTE: In routers where the Routing Engine (RE) and Control Board (CB) are
integrated into a single board, a CB-RE is known as Routing and Control Board
(RCB). The RCB is a single FRU that provides RE and CB functionality.
Table 73: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine and RCB
Management and Alarm Interfaces
Cable Cable/Wire Maximum Router
Port Specification Supplied Length Receptacle
Routing Engine RS-232 1.83-m length 1.83 m RJ-45 female

console or (EIA-232) serial with RJ-45/DB-9
auxiliary cable connectors
interface

Chapter 10: Transceiver and Cable Specifications
Table 73: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine and RCB
Management and Alarm Interfaces (continued)
Cable Cable/Wire Maximum Router
Port Specification Supplied Length Receptacle
Routing Engine Category 5 cable One 4.57-m 100 m RJ-45

Ethernet or equivalent length with autosensing
interface suitable for RJ-45/RJ-45
100Base-T connectors
operation
Alarm relay Wire with gauge No None —

contacts between
28-AWG and
14-AWG (0.08
2
and 2.08 mm )
Related • Understanding Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and Dispersion on page 133
Documentation
• Calculating Power Budget and Power Margin for Fiber-Optic Cables on page 131


CHAPTER 11
Cable and Pinout Specifications
• RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port on page 137
• RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE
Ports on page 138
RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for an MX Series Routing Engine ETHERNET Port
The port on the Routing Engine labeled ETHERNET is an autosensing 10/100-Mbps

Ethernet RJ-45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the Routing
Engine to a management LAN (or other device that supports out-of-band management).
Table 74 on page 137 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.
Table 74: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port
Pin Signal
1 TX+
2 TX–
3 RX+
4 Termination network
6 RX–

Documentation
• RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports on
page 138

RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for MX Series Routing Engine AUX and CONSOLE Ports
The ports on the Routing Engine labeled AUX and CONSOLE are asynchronous serial
interfaces that accept an RJ-45 connector. The ports connect the Routing Engine to an
auxiliary or console management device. Table 75 on page 138 describes the RJ-45
connector pinout.
Table 75: RJ-45 Connector Pinout for the AUX and CONSOLE Ports
Pin Signal Description
1 RTS Request to Send
2 DTR Data Terminal Ready
3 TXD Transmit Data
4 Ground Signal Ground
5 Ground Signal Ground
6 RXD Receive Data
7 DSR/DCD Data Set Ready
8 CTS Clear to Send

Documentation

CHAPTER 12
AC Power Requirements, Specifications,

and Guidelines
• AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 139

• Power Requirements for an MX480 Router on page 140
• Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers on page 149
• AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router on page 153
• AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 153
AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router
Table 76 on page 139 lists the AC power supply electrical specifications;

Table 77 on page 140 lists the AC power system specifications.
Table 76: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications

Item Specification
Normal-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power 1027 W (low line)
1590 W (high line)
AC input voltage Operating range: 100 – 240 VAC (nominal)
AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz (nominal)
AC input current rating 11.0 A @ 200 VAC or 14.5 A @ 110 VAC maximum
Efficiency 85% (low line and high line)
NOTE: This value is at full

load and nominal voltage.
High-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power 1167 W (low line)
2050 W (high line)

Table 76: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
AC input voltage Operating range: 100 – 240 VAC (nominal)
AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz (nominal)
AC input current rating 16 A @ 110 VAC maximum
15.1 A @ 200 VAC maximum
Efficiency 84% (low line)
NOTE: This value is at full 89% (high line)

Table 77: AC Power System Specifications

Normal Normal-Capacity–High High-Capacity–Low High-Capacity–High
Item Capacity–Low Line Line Line Line
Redundancy 3+1 2+2 3+1 2+2
Output power (maximum) 1027 W 3200 W 1167 W 2050 W

per power supply
Output power (maximum) 3081 W 3200 W 3501 W 4100 W

per system
Related • Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers on page 149

Documentation
Power Requirements for an MX480 Router
The following tables list the MX480 component power requirements. Table 78 on page 140
lists the MX480 base system power requirement. Table 79 on page 141 lists the FRU
power requirements for Switch Control Boards (SCBs), Routing Engines, Modular Port
Concentrators (MPCs), Modular Interface Cards (MICs), and Dense Port Concentrators
(DPCs). In addition, Table 79 on page 141 lists the MPC power requirements with MICs
and optics at various operating temperatures.
Table 78: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements

Component Power Requirement (Watts)
Base system 40 W
Normal-capacity cooling system 110 W

Chapter 12: AC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines
Table 78: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements (continued)

High-capacity cooling system 160 W
NOTE: The power for the cooling system comes from a different tap on the
power supply, reserved for the cooling system only. The cooling system power
requirement does not need to be deducted from the output power budget
of the power supply.
Table 79: FRU Power Requirements

Component Part Number Maximum Power Requirement
Switch Control Boards (SCBs)

SCB SCB-MX960 150 W
(applies to
MX240, MX480,
and MX960)
SCBE SCBE-MX 160 W at 55° C

(applies to
MX240, MX480, 130 W at 40° C
and MX960)
120 W at 25° C
SCBE2 SCBE2-MX 185 W at 55° C

(applies to
MX240, MX480, 160 W at 40° C
and MX960)
155 W at 25° C
Routing Engines
Routing RE-S-1300-2048 90 W
Engines
RE-S-1800X2-8G
RE-S-1800X4-8G
RE-S-1800X2-16G
RE-S-1800X4-16G
RE-S-1800X4-32G
RE-S-2000-4096
RE-S-X6-64G

16x10GE MPC MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP 440 W at 55° C ambient
MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP-R-B 423 W at 25° C ambient

Table 79: FRU Power Requirements (continued)

Multiservices MS-MPC-128G 590 W

MPC
32x10GE MPC4E-3D-32XGE-SFPP 610 W

MPC4E
With optics:
607 W at 55° C, with SFPP ZR optics
2x100GE + MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE 610 W

8x10GE
MPC4E With optics:
607 W at 55° C, with SFPP ZR and CFP LR4 optics
6x40GE + MPC5E-40G10G With optics:

24x10GE 607 W at 55° C
MPC5E MPC5EQ-40G10G
541 W at 40° C
6x40GE +
24x10GE 511 W at 25° C
MPC5EQ

4x10GE 607 W at 55° C
MPC5E MPC5EQ-100G10G
541 W at 40° C
2x100GE +
4x10GE 511 W at 25° C
MPC5EQ
MPC7E MPC7E-MRATE With optics:

(Multi-Rate) 545 W at 55° C
465 W at 40° C
440 W at 25° C
MPCs
MPC1 MX-MPC1-3D 165 W
MPC1E MX-MPC1E-3D With MICs and optics:

239 W at 55° C
227 W at 40° C
219 W at 25° C


MPC1 Q MX-MPC1-3D-Q 175 W
MPC1E Q MX-MPC1E-3D-Q With MICs and optics:

249 W at 55° C
237 W at 40° C
228 W at 25° C

348 W at 55° C
329 W at 40° C
315 W at 25° C

368 W at 55° C
MPC2 EQ MX-MPC2-3D-EQ
347 W at 40° C
MPC2E EQ MX-MPC2E-3D-EQ
333 W at 25° C
MPC2E P MX-MPC2E-3D-P 294 W
With MICs and optics:

368 W at 55° C
347 W at 40° C
333 W at 25° C
MPC2E NG MPC2E-3D-NG 474 W

474 W at 55° C
417 W at 40° C
400 W at 25° C
MPC2E NG Q MPC2E-3D-NG-Q 529 W

529 W at 55° C
460 W at 40° C
438 W at 25° C


MPC3E MX-MPC3E-3D 440 W

500 W at 55° C, two 40W MICs
485 W at 40° C, two CFP MICs with LR4 optics

534 W at 55° C
485 W at 40° C
461 W at 25° C

583 W at 55° C
532 W at 40° C
503 W at 25° C
MICs
ATM MIC with MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE 610 W 35 W
SFP
With optics:
Gigabit MIC-3D-20-GE-SFP 37 W
Ethernet MIC
with SFP
10-Gigabit 2-Port: 2-Port: 29 W

Ethernet MIC MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP
with XFP 4-Port: 37 W
4-Port:
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP
10-Gigabit MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP 24.2 W at 55° C with SR and LR optics

Ethernet MIC
with SFP+ 29.8 W at 55° C with ER optics
29.8 W at 40° C with ZR optics


40-Gigabit MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP 18 W
Ethernet MIC
with QSFP+
100-Gigabit MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP 40 W
Ethernet MIC
with CFP
100-Gigabit MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP 20 W
Ethernet MIC
with CXP
100-Gigabit MIC3-100G-DWDM With optics:

DWDM OTN 91 W at 55° C
MIC with CFP2
83 W at 25° C
Multiservices MS-MIC-16G 60 W
MIC
SONET/SDH 4-Port: 4-Port:

OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48
Multi-Rate 24 W at 55° C
MIC
22.75 W at 40° C
21.5 W at 25° C
8-Port: 8-Port:
29 W at 55° C
27.75 W at 40° C
26.5 W at 25° C
SONET/SDH MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 41 W at 55° C

OC192/STM64
MIC with XFP 38.5 W at 40° C
36 W at 25° C


Channelized 4-Port: 4-Port:

SONET/SDH MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12
OC3/STM1 41 W at 55° C
Multi-Rate
MIC 40 W at 40° C
39 W at 25° C
8-Port: 8-Port:
52 W at 55° C
50.5 W at 40° C
49 W at 25° C
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 41 W
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3 36 W at 55° C
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B 35 W at 40° C
34 W at 25° C
Channelized MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 29.08 W at 55° C

E1/T1 Circuit
Emulation MIC 27.84 W at 40° C
26.55 W at 25° C
Channelized MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 36.48 W at 55° C

OC3/STM1
(Multi-Rate) 35.04 W at 40° C
Circuit
with SFP
DPCs
Gigabit DPC-R-40GE-SFP 335 W
Ethernet DPC
with SFP
Gigabit DPCE-R-40GE-SFP 335 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-40GE-SFP
with SFP


Gigabit DPCE-R-Q-40GE-SFP 365 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPCE-X-Q-40GE-SFP
Queuing
Ethernet
Services DPC
with SFP
(40-Port)

Ethernet
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPCs
with SFP
(20-Port)
10-Gigabit DPC-R-4XGE-XFP 310 W

Ethernet DPC
with XFP
10-Gigabit DPCE-R-2XGE-XFP 175 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC
with XFP
(2-Port)

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-4XGE-XFP
with XFP
(4-Port)
10-Gigabit DPCE-R-Q-4XGE-XFP 330 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPCE-X-Q-4XGE-XFP
Queuing
Ethernet
Services DPC
with XFP or
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPC
with XFP


Multi-Rate DPCE-R-20GE-2XGE 333 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-20GE-2XGE
with SFP and
XFP or
Multi-Rate
Ethernet
Enhanced
Ethernet
Services DPC
with SFP and
XFP
Multi-Rate DPCE-R-Q-20GE-2XGE 335 W

Ethernet
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPC
with SFP and
XFP
Tri-Rate DPCE-R-40GE-TX 320 W

Enhanced DPC
or Tri-Rate DPCE-X-40GE-TX
Enhanced
Ethernet
Services DPC
Multiservices MS-DPC 265 W

DPC
FPCs
FPC Type 2 MX-FPC2 190 W (with PICs and optics)
Related • DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 157
Documentation

Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers
The information in this topic helps you determine which power supplies are suitable for
various configurations, as well as which power supplies are not suitable because output
power is exceeded. You determine suitability by subtracting the total power draw from
the maximum output of the power supplies. Afterward, the required input power is
calculated. Finally, you calculate the thermal output. A sample configuration is provided
in Table 81 on page 151.
We recommend that you provision power according to the maximum input current listed
in the power supply electrical specifications (see “AC Electrical Specifications for the
MX480 Router” on page 139and “DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480
Router” on page 157).
Use the following procedures to calculate the power requirement:
1. Calculate the power requirement.
2. Evaluate the power budget.
3. Calculate input power.
4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs) for cooling requirements.

Both normal-capacity and high-capacity MX480 chassis with DC power supplies are
zoned, meaning that certain components are powered by specific power supplies (see
Table 80 on page 150 for information on zoning). When calculating power requirements,
be sure that there is adequate power for each zone.
For an AC-powered chassis, there is one overall zone. Two AC power supplies are
mandatory for high-line, and three AC power supplies are mandatory for low-line power.
Table 80: MX480 DC Zoning

Zone Power Supply (PEM) Components Receiving Power
Zone 0 PEM 0 or 2 • Fan Tray

• DPC/MPC slots 0 and 1
• SCB slots 0 and 1

• DPC slots 2 through 5
The following sample configuration shows a DC-powered MX480 with:
• Two 16-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet MPCs with SFP+(slots 0 and 1)
• Two SCBs with two (redundant) RE-1800x2 routing engines (SCB slot 0 and SCB slot
1)
• One DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP (slot 3)
• High-capacity cooling system
NOTE: The high-capacity cooling system satisfies cooling requirements

of MPCs, and must be used for proper cooling.

1. Calculate the power requirements (usage) using the values in “Power Requirements
for an MX480 Router” on page 140 as shown in Table 81 on page 151.
Table 81: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router

Chassis Component Part Number Power Requirement Zone
Base system MX480BASE-DC-HIGH 40 W Zone 0 and Zone 1
High-capacity cooling system FFANTRAY-MX480-HC 160 W Zone 0 and Zone 1
MPC - Slot 2 MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP-R-B 440 W Zone 1
SCB 1 SCBE2-MX with 185 W Zone 0
RE-S-1800X2-8G 90 W
SCB 0 SCBE2 with 185 W Zone 0
RE-S-1800X2-8G 90 W
DPC - Slot 3 DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP 310 W Zone 1
Zone 0 total output power 1090 W
Zone 0 total output power (excluding cooling system) 1010 W
2. Evaluate the power budget. In the case of a DC-powered chassis, evaluate the budget
for each zone. In this step, we check the required power against the maximum output
power of available power supply options.
NOTE: The power for the cooling system comes from a different tap on
the power supply, reserved for the cooling system only. The cooling system
power requirement does not need to be deducted from the output power
budget of the power supply.
Table 82 on page 152 lists the power supplies, their maximum output power, and
unused power (or a power deficit) for MX480 AC chassis.Table 83 on page 152 lists
the power supplies, their maximum output power, and unused power (or a power
deficit) for MX480 DC chassis. See “AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router”
on page 139 and “DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router”
on page 157 for more information about the MX480 power supply electrical
specifications.

Table 82: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis

1
Power Supply Maximum System Output Power Unused Power
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (low-line) 3081 W 2071 W
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 3200 W 2190 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (low-line) 3501 W 2491 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 4100 W 3090 W
1
For this configuration, output power excluding the cooling system is 1360 W.
Table 83: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 DC Chassis
Maximum System Zone 0 Unused Zone 1 Unused

1 2
Power Supply Output Power Power Power
MX480 DC Normal-capacity 3200 W 2190 W 2430 W
MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=0) 4800 W 3790 W 4030 W
NOTE: The DIP switch position is expected input current;

the correct feeds must be present to obtain the desired
output power.
MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=1) 5200 W 4190W 4430W

output power.
1
2
3. Calculate input power. In this step, the input power requirements for the example
configuration are calculated. To do this, divide the total output requirement by the
efficiency of the power supply as shown in Table 84 on page 152.
Table 84: Calculating Input Power Examples

1 2
Power Supply Power Supply Efficiency Input Power Requirement
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 85 % 1282 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 89 % 1225 W
3
MX480 DC Normal-capacity ~98 % 1112 W
3
MX480 DC High-capacity ~98 % 1112 W

1
These values are at full load and nominal voltage.
2
For this configuration, total power is 1090 W.
3
Zone 0 requirement.
4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs). To calculate this, multiply the input power
requirement (in watts) by 3.41.
Table 85: Calculating Thermal Output

Power Supply Thermal Output (BTUs per hour)
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 1282 * 3.41 = 4372 BTU/hr
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 1225 * 3.41 = 4177 BTU/hr
1
MX480 DC Normal-capacity 1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr
1
MX480 DC High-capacity 1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr
1
Zone 0 output.
Related • Power Requirements for an MX480 Router on page 140

Documentation
AC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that
requires a dedicated AC power feed. We recommend that you use a customer site circuit
breaker rated for 15 A (250 VAC) minimum for each AC power supply, or as required by
local code. Doing so enables you to operate the router in any configuration without
upgrading the power infrastructure.
Related • AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 139

Documentation
AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that
requires a dedicated AC power feed. Most sites distribute power through a main conduit
that leads to frame-mounted power distribution panels, one of which can be located at
the top of the rack that houses the router. An AC power cord connects each power supply
to the power distribution panel.

You can order detachable AC power cords, each approximately 8 ft (2.5 m) long that
supply AC power to the router. The C19 appliance coupler at the female end of the cord
inserts into the AC appliance inlet coupler, type C20 (right angle) as described by
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug at the male
end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your
geographical location.
Table 86 on page 154 provides specifications and Figure 46 on page 155 depicts the plug
on the AC power cord provided for each country or region.
Table 86: AC Power Cord Specifications

Electrical
Country Model Number Specification Plug Type
Australia CBL-M-PWR-RA-AU 240 VAC, 50 Hz AC SAA/3/15
China CBL-M-PWR-RA-CH 220 VAC, 50 Hz AC CH2-16P
Europe (except Denmark, Italy, Switzerland, CBL-M-PWR-RA-EU 220 or 230 VAC, 50 Hz CEE 7/7
and United Kingdom) AC
Italy CBL-M-PWR-RA-IT 230 VAC, 50 Hz AC CEI 23-16/VII
Japan CBL-PWR-RA-JP15 125 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz JIS 8303

AC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-JP 220 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz NEMA L6-20P

AC
North America CBL-PWR-RA-US15 125 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA 5-15P
CBL-PWR-RA-TWLK-US15 125 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA L5-15P
CBL-M-PWR-RA-US 250 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA 6-20
CBL-M-PWR-RA-TWLK-US 250 VAC, 60 Hz AC NEMA L6-20P
United Kingdom CBL-M-PWR-RA-UK 240 VAC, 50 Hz AC BS89/13

Figure 46: AC Plug Types
WARNING: The AC power cord for the router is intended for use with the
router only and not for any other use.
WARNING:
Translation from Japanese: The attached power cable is only for this product.
Do not use the cable for another product.
NOTE: In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 m

(approximately 14.75 ft) in length, to comply with National Electrical Code
(NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52, and Canadian Electrical
Code (CEC) Section 4-010(3). You can order AC power cords that are in
compliance.


CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to device
components or drape where people could trip on them.
Related • Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power

Documentation Supplies on page 219
• Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376

CHAPTER 13
DC Power Requirements, Specifications,

and Guidelines
• Power Requirements for an MX480 Router on page 158
• DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router on page 171
• DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router on page 172
• DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 173
DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router
Table 87 on page 157 lists the DC power supply electrical specifications.

Table 88 on page 158 lists the DC power system specifications.
Table 87: Power Supply Electrical Specifications

Item Specification
Normal-Capacity Power Supplies

Maximum output power 1600 W
DC input current rating 33.3 A @ –48 V nominal operating voltage
Maximum Input Current 40 A
DC input voltage Operating Range: –40.5 VDC to –72 VDC
Nominal: –48 VDC
Efficiency ~98%

Internal Circuit Breaker 40 A
High-Capacity Power Supplies

Table 87: Power Supply Electrical Specifications (continued)

Item Specification
Maximum Input Current 60 A (DIP=0) 70 A (DIP=1)
Maximum output power 2240 W 2440 W
DC input current rating 50 A @ -48 VDC normal operating 54.2 A @ -48 VDC normal operating
voltage voltage
DC input voltage Operating Range: –40.5 VDC to –72 VDC
Nominal: –48 VDC
Efficiency ~98%

Table 88: Power System Specifications

Item Normal-Capacity High-Capacity
Redundancy 2+2 2+2
Output power 1600 W 60 A (DIP=0) 70 A (DIP=1)

(maximum) per
supply
2240 W 2440 W
Output power 3200 W 4800 W 5200 W

(maximum) per
system
Related • Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers on page 149

Documentation
• DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router on page 171
Power Requirements for an MX480 Router
The following tables list the MX480 component power requirements. Table 78 on page 140
lists the MX480 base system power requirement. Table 79 on page 141 lists the FRU
power requirements for Switch Control Boards (SCBs), Routing Engines, Modular Port
Concentrators (MPCs), Modular Interface Cards (MICs), and Dense Port Concentrators
(DPCs). In addition, Table 79 on page 141 lists the MPC power requirements with MICs
and optics at various operating temperatures.

Chapter 13: DC Power Requirements, Specifications, and Guidelines
Table 89: MX480 Router Common Component Power Requirements

Base system 40 W
Normal-capacity cooling system 110 W
High-capacity cooling system 160 W
NOTE: The power for the cooling system comes from a different tap on the
power supply, reserved for the cooling system only. The cooling system power
requirement does not need to be deducted from the output power budget
of the power supply.
Table 90: FRU Power Requirements

Switch Control Boards (SCBs)

SCB SCB-MX960 150 W
(applies to
MX240, MX480,
and MX960)
SCBE SCBE-MX 160 W at 55° C

(applies to
MX240, MX480, 130 W at 40° C
and MX960)
120 W at 25° C
SCBE2 SCBE2-MX 185 W at 55° C

(applies to
MX240, MX480, 160 W at 40° C
and MX960)
155 W at 25° C
Routing Engines
Routing RE-S-1300-2048 90 W
Engines
RE-S-1800X2-8G
RE-S-1800X4-8G
RE-S-1800X2-16G
RE-S-1800X4-16G
RE-S-1800X4-32G
RE-S-2000-4096
RE-S-X6-64G



16x10GE MPC MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP 440 W at 55° C ambient
MPC-3D-16XGE-SFPP-R-B 423 W at 25° C ambient
Multiservices MS-MPC-128G 590 W

MPC
32x10GE MPC4E-3D-32XGE-SFPP 610 W

MPC4E
With optics:
2x100GE + MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE 610 W

8x10GE
MPC4E With optics:

24x10GE 607 W at 55° C
MPC5E MPC5EQ-40G10G
541 W at 40° C
6x40GE +
24x10GE 511 W at 25° C
MPC5EQ

4x10GE 607 W at 55° C
MPC5E MPC5EQ-100G10G
541 W at 40° C
2x100GE +
4x10GE 511 W at 25° C
MPC5EQ
MPC7E MPC7E-MRATE With optics:

(Multi-Rate) 545 W at 55° C
465 W at 40° C
440 W at 25° C
MPCs



239 W at 55° C
227 W at 40° C
219 W at 25° C

249 W at 55° C
237 W at 40° C
228 W at 25° C

348 W at 55° C
329 W at 40° C
315 W at 25° C

368 W at 55° C
MPC2 EQ MX-MPC2-3D-EQ
347 W at 40° C
MPC2E EQ MX-MPC2E-3D-EQ
333 W at 25° C
MPC2E P MX-MPC2E-3D-P 294 W

368 W at 55° C
347 W at 40° C
333 W at 25° C

474 W at 55° C
417 W at 40° C
400 W at 25° C



529 W at 55° C
460 W at 40° C
438 W at 25° C
MPC3E MX-MPC3E-3D 440 W

500 W at 55° C, two 40W MICs

534 W at 55° C
485 W at 40° C
461 W at 25° C

583 W at 55° C
532 W at 40° C
503 W at 25° C
MICs
ATM MIC with MPC4E-3D-2CGE-8XGE 610 W 35 W
SFP
With optics:
Gigabit MIC-3D-20-GE-SFP 37 W
Ethernet MIC
with SFP


10-Gigabit 2-Port: 2-Port: 29 W

Ethernet MIC MIC-3D-2XGE-XFP
with XFP 4-Port: 37 W
4-Port:
MIC-3D-4XGE-XFP
10-Gigabit MIC3-3D-10XGE-SFPP 24.2 W at 55° C with SR and LR optics

Ethernet MIC
with SFP+ 29.8 W at 55° C with ER optics
29.8 W at 40° C with ZR optics
40-Gigabit MIC3-3D-2X40GE-QSFPP 18 W
Ethernet MIC
with QSFP+
100-Gigabit MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CFP 40 W
Ethernet MIC
with CFP
100-Gigabit MIC3-3D-1X100GE-CXP 20 W
Ethernet MIC
with CXP
100-Gigabit MIC3-100G-DWDM With optics:

DWDM OTN 91 W at 55° C
MIC with CFP2
83 W at 25° C
Multiservices MS-MIC-16G 60 W
MIC
SONET/SDH 4-Port: 4-Port:

OC3/STM1 MIC-3D-4OC3OC12-1OC48
Multi-Rate 24 W at 55° C
MIC
22.75 W at 40° C
21.5 W at 25° C
8-Port: 8-Port:
29 W at 55° C
27.75 W at 40° C
26.5 W at 25° C
SONET/SDH MIC-3D-1OC192-XFP 41 W at 55° C

OC192/STM64
MIC with XFP 38.5 W at 40° C
36 W at 25° C


Channelized 4-Port: 4-Port:

SONET/SDH MIC-3D-4CHOC3-2CHOC12
OC3/STM1 41 W at 55° C
Multi-Rate
MIC 40 W at 40° C
39 W at 25° C
8-Port: 8-Port:
52 W at 55° C
50.5 W at 40° C
49 W at 25° C
Tri-Rate MIC MIC-3D-40GE-TX 41 W
DS3/E3 MIC MIC-3D-8DS3-E3 36 W at 55° C
MIC-3D-8CHDS3-E3-B 35 W at 40° C
34 W at 25° C
Channelized MIC-3D-16CHE1-T1-CE 29.08 W at 55° C

E1/T1 Circuit
26.55 W at 25° C
Channelized MIC-3D-4COC3-1COC12-CE 36.48 W at 55° C

OC3/STM1
(Multi-Rate) 35.04 W at 40° C
Circuit
with SFP
DPCs
Gigabit DPC-R-40GE-SFP 335 W
Ethernet DPC
with SFP
Gigabit DPCE-R-40GE-SFP 335 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-40GE-SFP
with SFP



Ethernet
Enhanced DPCE-X-Q-40GE-SFP
Queuing
Ethernet
Services DPC
with SFP
(40-Port)

Ethernet
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPCs
with SFP
(20-Port)
10-Gigabit DPC-R-4XGE-XFP 310 W

Ethernet DPC
with XFP

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC
with XFP
(2-Port)

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-4XGE-XFP
with XFP
(4-Port)
10-Gigabit DPCE-R-Q-4XGE-XFP 330 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPCE-X-Q-4XGE-XFP
Queuing
Ethernet
Services DPC
with XFP or
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPC
with XFP


Multi-Rate DPCE-R-20GE-2XGE 333 W

Ethernet
Enhanced DPC DPCE-X-20GE-2XGE
with SFP and
XFP or
Multi-Rate
Ethernet
Enhanced
Ethernet
Services DPC
with SFP and
XFP
Multi-Rate DPCE-R-Q-20GE-2XGE 335 W

Ethernet
Enhanced
Queuing IP
Services DPC
with SFP and
XFP
Tri-Rate DPCE-R-40GE-TX 320 W

Enhanced DPC
or Tri-Rate DPCE-X-40GE-TX
Enhanced
Ethernet
Services DPC
Multiservices MS-DPC 265 W

DPC
FPCs
Documentation

Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers
The information in this topic helps you determine which power supplies are suitable for
various configurations, as well as which power supplies are not suitable because output
power is exceeded. You determine suitability by subtracting the total power draw from
the maximum output of the power supplies. Afterward, the required input power is
calculated. Finally, you calculate the thermal output. A sample configuration is provided
in Table 81 on page 151.
We recommend that you provision power according to the maximum input current listed
in the power supply electrical specifications (see “AC Electrical Specifications for the
MX480 Router” on page 139and “DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480
Use the following procedures to calculate the power requirement:
1. Calculate the power requirement.
2. Evaluate the power budget.
3. Calculate input power.
4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs) for cooling requirements.

Both normal-capacity and high-capacity MX480 chassis with DC power supplies are
zoned, meaning that certain components are powered by specific power supplies (see
Table 80 on page 150 for information on zoning). When calculating power requirements,
be sure that there is adequate power for each zone.
For an AC-powered chassis, there is one overall zone. Two AC power supplies are
mandatory for high-line, and three AC power supplies are mandatory for low-line power.
Table 91: MX480 DC Zoning

Zone Power Supply (PEM) Components Receiving Power

• DPC/MPC slots 0 and 1
• SCB slots 0 and 1

• DPC slots 2 through 5
The following sample configuration shows a DC-powered MX480 with:
• Two 16-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet MPCs with SFP+(slots 0 and 1)
• Two SCBs with two (redundant) RE-1800x2 routing engines (SCB slot 0 and SCB slot
1)
• One DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP (slot 3)
• High-capacity cooling system
NOTE: The high-capacity cooling system satisfies cooling requirements

of MPCs, and must be used for proper cooling.

1. Calculate the power requirements (usage) using the values in “Power Requirements
for an MX480 Router” on page 140 as shown in Table 81 on page 151.
Table 92: Sample Power Requirements for an MX480 Router

Chassis Component Part Number Power Requirement Zone
Base system MX480BASE-DC-HIGH 40 W Zone 0 and Zone 1
High-capacity cooling system FFANTRAY-MX480-HC 160 W Zone 0 and Zone 1
SCB 1 SCBE2-MX with 185 W Zone 0
RE-S-1800X2-8G 90 W
SCB 0 SCBE2 with 185 W Zone 0
RE-S-1800X2-8G 90 W
DPC - Slot 3 DPCE-R-4XGE-XFP 310 W Zone 1
2. Evaluate the power budget. In the case of a DC-powered chassis, evaluate the budget
for each zone. In this step, we check the required power against the maximum output
power of available power supply options.
NOTE: The power for the cooling system comes from a different tap on
the power supply, reserved for the cooling system only. The cooling system
power requirement does not need to be deducted from the output power
budget of the power supply.
Table 82 on page 152 lists the power supplies, their maximum output power, and
unused power (or a power deficit) for MX480 AC chassis.Table 83 on page 152 lists
the power supplies, their maximum output power, and unused power (or a power
deficit) for MX480 DC chassis. See “AC Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router”
on page 139 and “DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router”
on page 157 for more information about the MX480 power supply electrical
specifications.

Table 93: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 AC Chassis

1
Power Supply Maximum System Output Power Unused Power
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (low-line) 3081 W 2071 W
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 3200 W 2190 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (low-line) 3501 W 2491 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 4100 W 3090 W
1
Table 94: Calculating Power Budget for a MX480 DC Chassis
Maximum System Zone 0 Unused Zone 1 Unused

1 2
Power Supply Output Power Power Power
MX480 DC Normal-capacity 3200 W 2190 W 2430 W
MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=0) 4800 W 3790 W 4030 W

output power.
MX480 DC High-capacity (DIP=1) 5200 W 4190W 4430W

output power.
1
2
3. Calculate input power. In this step, the input power requirements for the example
configuration are calculated. To do this, divide the total output requirement by the
efficiency of the power supply as shown in Table 84 on page 152.
Table 95: Calculating Input Power Examples

1 2
Power Supply Power Supply Efficiency Input Power Requirement
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 85 % 1282 W
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 89 % 1225 W
3
MX480 DC Normal-capacity ~98 % 1112 W
3
MX480 DC High-capacity ~98 % 1112 W

1
These values are at full load and nominal voltage.
2
For this configuration, total power is 1090 W.
3
Zone 0 requirement.
4. Calculate thermal output (BTUs). To calculate this, multiply the input power
requirement (in watts) by 3.41.
Table 96: Calculating Thermal Output

Power Supply Thermal Output (BTUs per hour)
MX480 AC Normal-capacity (high-line) 1282 * 3.41 = 4372 BTU/hr
MX480 AC High-capacity (high-line) 1225 * 3.41 = 4177 BTU/hr
1
MX480 DC Normal-capacity 1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr
1
MX480 DC High-capacity 1112 * 3.41 = 3792 BTU/hr
1
Zone 0 output.
Related • Power Requirements for an MX480 Router on page 140

Documentation
DC Power Circuit Breaker Requirements for the MX480 Router
Each DC power supply has a single DC input (–48 VDC and return) that requires a
dedicated circuit breaker. If you plan to operate a maximally configured DC-powered
router with normal-capacity power supplies, we recommend that you use a dedicated
customer site circuit breaker rated for 40 A (–48 VDC) minimum, or as required by local
code. If you plan to operate a maximally configured DC-powered router with high-capacity
power supplies, we recommend that you use a circuit breaker rated for 70 A (–48 VDC),
or as required by local code.
If you plan to operate a DC-powered router at less than the maximum configuration, we
recommend that you provision a circuit breaker according to respective National Electrical
Code and customer site internal standards to maintain proper level of protection for the
current specified above or each DC power supply rated for at least 125% of the continuous
current that the system draws at –48 VDC.
Documentation

DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router
Figure 47 on page 172 shows a typical DC source cabling arrangement.
Figure 47: Typical DC Source Cabling to the Router
The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by dedicated power feeds
derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies in PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by
dedicated power feeds derived from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly
deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.
CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper
polarity. The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate
their polarity. There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The
color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines
the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal
studs on each power supply.
WARNING: For field-wiring connections, use copper conductors only.
CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to device
components or drape where people could trip on them.
Related • In Case of an Electrical Accident

Documentation

• Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 377

DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router
DC Power Cable Lug Specifications—The accessory box shipped with the router includes
the cable lugs that attach to the terminal studs of each power supply (see
Figure 48 on page 173).
Figure 48: DC Power Cable Lug

2.25
End view
0.28
6 AWG conductor
0.55 diameter
each hole
Crimp area
g001188
0.08 0.25 0.625 0.37 All measurements in inches
CAUTION: Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician must attach

a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with
an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router.
NOTE: The same cable lug is used for the grounding cable.
DC Power Cable Specifications—Table 97 on page 173 summarizes the specifications for

the power cables, which you must supply.
Table 97: DC Power Cable Specifications

Cable Type Quantity and Specification
2
Power Eight 6-AWG (13.3 mm ), minimum 60°C wire, or as required by the local
code
Related • DC Power Source Cabling for the MX480 Router on page 172
Documentation


PART 3
Initial Installation and Configuration

• Unpacking the MX480 Router on page 177
• Installing the Mounting Hardware on page 183
• Installing the MX480 Router on page 187
• Connecting the MX480 Router to Power on page 217
• Connecting the MX480 Router to the Network on page 231
• Initially Configuring the MX480 Router on page 241


CHAPTER 14
Unpacking the MX480 Router
• Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router on page 177
• Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received on page 179
Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router
To unpack the router and prepare for installation, you need the following tools:
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
• 1/2-in. or 13-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove bracket bolts from the shipping
pallet
• Blank panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component
Related • Unpacking the MX480 Router on page 177

Documentation
• Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received on page 179
Unpacking the MX480 Router
The router is shipped in a wooden crate. A wooden pallet forms the base of the crate.
The router chassis is bolted to this pallet. Quick Start installation instructions and a
cardboard accessory box are also included in the shipping crate.
The shipping container measures 21 in. (53.3 cm) high, 23.5 in. (60.0 cm) wide, and
32.5 in. (82.5 cm) deep. The total weight of the container containing the router and
accessories can range from 93 lb (42.2 kg) to 169 lb (76.7 kg).
NOTE: The router is maximally protected inside the shipping crate. Do not
unpack it until you are ready to begin installation.

To unpack the router (see Figure 49 on page 178):
1. Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible,
where you have enough room to remove the components from the chassis. While the
chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift or pallet jack to move it.
2. Position the shipping crate with the arrows pointing up.
3. Open all the latches on the shipping crate.
4. Remove the front door of the shipping crate cover and set it aside.
5. Slide the remainder of the shipping crate cover off the pallet.
6. Remove the foam covering the top of the router.
7. Remove the accessory box and the Quick Start installation instructions.
8. Verify the parts received against the lists.
9. Remove the vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) packs attached to the pallet, being careful
not to break the VCI packs open.
10. To remove the brackets holding the chassis on the pallet, use a 1/2-in. socket wrench
and a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the bolts and screws from the brackets.
11. Store the brackets and bolts inside the accessory box.
12. Save the shipping crate cover, pallet, and packing materials in case you need to move
or ship the router at a later time.
Figure 49: Contents of the Shipping Crate

Chapter 14: Unpacking the MX480 Router
Related • Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received on page 179

Documentation
• Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet on page 183
• Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 194
• Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift
• Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift on page 201
Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received
A packing list is included in each shipment. Check the parts in the shipment against the
items on the packing list. The packing list specifies the part numbers and descriptions of
each part in your order.
If any part is missing, contact a customer service representative.
A fully configured router contains the router chassis with installed components, listed in
Table 98 on page 179, and an accessory box, which contains the parts listed in
Table 99 on page 180. The parts shipped with your router can vary depending on the
configuration you ordered.
Table 98: Parts List for a Fully Configured Router

Component Quantity
Chassis, including midplane, craft interface, and 1

center-mounting brackets
DPCs Up to 6
FPCs Up to 3
MPCs Up to 6
MICs Up to 12
PICs Up to 6
Routing Engines 1 or 2
SCBs 1 or 2
Power supplies Up to 4
Fan tray 1
Air filter 1
Air filter tray 1

Table 98: Parts List for a Fully Configured Router (continued)

Component Quantity
Quick start installation instructions 1
Small mounting shelf 1
Blank panels for slots without components installed One blank panel for each slot not
occupied by a component
Table 99: Accessory Box Parts List

Part Quantity
Screws to mount chassis and small shelf 22
DC power terminal Lugs, 6-AWG 9
RJ-45-to-DB-9 cable to connect the router through the 1

serial port
Cable management brackets 2
Terminal block plug, 3–pole, 5.08 mm spacing, 12A, to 2

connect the router alarms
Label, accessories contents, MX480 1
USB flash drive with Junos OS 1
Read me first document 1
Affidavit for T1 connection 1
Juniper Networks Product Warranty 1
End User License Agreement 1
Document sleeve 1
3 in. x 5 in. pink bag 2
9 in. x 12 in. pink bag, ESD 2
Accessory Box, 19 in. x 12 in. x 3 in. 1
Ethernet cable, RJ-45/RJ-45, 4-pair stranded UTP, 1

Category 5E, 15'
ESD wrist strap with cable 1

Chapter 14: Unpacking the MX480 Router
Related • Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router on page 177
Documentation


CHAPTER 15
Installing the Mounting Hardware
• Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet on page 183
• Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router on page 185
Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet
The router can be installed in a four-post rack or cabinet or an open-frame rack. Install
the mounting hardware on the rack before installing the router.
Install the mounting shelf, which is included in the shipping container, before installing
the router. We recommend that you install the mounting shelf because the weight of a
fully loaded chassis can be up to 128 lb (58.1 kg).
Table 100 on page 183 specifies the holes in which you insert cage nuts and screws to
install the mounting hardware required (an X indicates a mounting hole location). The
hole distances are relative to one of the standard U divisions on the rack. The bottom of
all mounting shelves is at 0.04 in. (0.02 U) above a “U” division.
Table 100: Four-Post Rack or Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations

Hole Distance Above U Division Mounting Shelf
4 2.00 in. (5.1 cm) 1.14 U X
3 1.51 in. (3.8 cm) 0.86 U X
2 0.88 in. (2.2 cm) 0.50 U X
1 0.25 in. (0.6 cm) 0.14 U X
To install the mounting shelf on the front rails of a four-post rack or cabinet, or the rails
of an open-frame rack:
1. If needed, install cage nuts in the holes specified in Table 100 on page 183.
2. On the back of each rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the lowest hole
specified in Table 100 on page 183.

3. Install the small shelf on the back of the rack rails. Rest the bottom slot of each flange
on a mounting screw.
4. Partially insert the remaining screws into the open holes in each flange of the small
shelf (see Figure 50 on page 184 or Figure 51 on page 185).
5. Tighten all the screws completely.
Figure 50: Installing the Front-Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack

or Cabinet

Chapter 15: Installing the Mounting Hardware
Figure 51: Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack
Related • Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 194
Documentation
Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting the MX480 Router
Two removable mounting brackets are attached to the mounting holes closest to the
front of the chassis. You can move the pair of brackets to another position on the side of
the chassis for center-mounting the router.
To move the mounting brackets from the front of the chassis toward the center of the
chassis:
1. Remove the three screws at the top and center of the bracket.
2. Pull the top of the bracket slightly away from the chassis. The bottom of the bracket
contains a tab that inserts into a slot in the chassis.
3. Pull the bracket away from the chassis so that the tab is removed from the chassis
slot.
4. Insert the bracket tab into the slot in the bottom center of the chassis.

5. Align the bracket with the two mounting holes located toward the top center of the
chassis.
There is no mounting hole in the center of the chassis that corresponds to the hole in
the center of the bracket.
6. Insert the two screws at the top of the bracket and tighten each partially.
Two screws are needed for mounting the bracket on the center of the chassis. You
do not need the third screw.
7. Tighten the two screws completely.
8. Repeat the procedure for the other bracket.
Documentation

CHAPTER 16
Installing the MX480 Router
• Installing an MX480 Router Overview on page 187

• Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift on page 188
• Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift on page 189
• Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift on page 196
• Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a
Lift on page 202
• Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually on page 208
• Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a
Lift on page 210
• Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket on page 215
Installing an MX480 Router Overview
To install the router:
1. Prepare the installation site.
See “MX480 Site Preparation Checklist” on page 121.
2. Review the safety guidelines and warnings.
• General Safety Guidelines for Juniper Networks Devices
• General Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
3. Unpack the router and verify that all parts have been received.
a. See “Unpacking the MX480 Router” on page 177.
b. See “Verifying the MX480 Router Parts Received” on page 179.
4. Install the mounting hardware.

See “Installing the MX480 Router Mounting Hardware for a Rack or Cabinet” on
page 183.
5. Install the router.
See “Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift” on page 194.
6. Connect cables to external devices.
See “Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices” on page 231.
7. Connect the grounding cable.
See “Grounding the MX480 Router” on page 218.
8. Connect the power cables.


9. Power on the router.
• Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router on page 220
• Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies

on page 224
10. Perform the initial system configuration.
See “Initially Configuring the MX480 Router” on page 241.
Related • Tools and Parts Required to Unpack the MX480 Router on page 177
Documentation
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router with a Mechanical Lift
To install the router, you need the following tools:
• Mechanical lift
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
• 7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver
• ESD grounding wrist strap
Documentation
• Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift on
page 189

Chapter 16: Installing the MX480 Router
Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It with a Lift
To make the router light enough to install with a lift, you must first remove most
components from the chassis. The procedures for removing components from the chassis
are for initial installation only, and assume that you have not connected power cables
to the router. The following procedures describe how to remove components from the
chassis, first from the rear and then from the front:
1. Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a
Lift on page 189
2. Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 190
3. Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 191
4. Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 192
5. Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 193
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
Remove the leftmost power supply first and then work your way to the right. To remove
the AC or DC power supplies for each power supply (see Figure 52 on page 190):
1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect
the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. See the instructions for your site.
2. On an AC-powered router, switch the AC input switch on each power supply to the
off (O) position. On a DC-powered router, Move the DC circuit breaker on each DC
power supply to the off (O) position.
We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power
sources.
3. Loosen the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply faceplate.
4. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis.

Figure 52: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 53 on page 191 ):
2. Loosen the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate.
3. Grasp the fan tray handle, and pull it out approximately 1 to 3 inches.
4. Press the latch located on the inside of the fan tray to release it from the chassis.
5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it, and pull the fan tray completely out
of the chassis.

Figure 53: Removing the Fan Tray
Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove the SCBs (see Figure 54 on page 192):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
3. Rotate the ejector handles simultaneously counterclockwise to unseat the SCB.
4. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the SCB about halfway out of the chassis.
5. Place one hand underneath the SCB to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you

remove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a
stable, flat surface.
6. Repeat the procedure for each SCB.

Figure 54: Removing an SCB
Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove a DPC (see Figure 55 on page 193):
1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the DPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each
DPC using an optical interface on the DPC that you are removing.
3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC.
4. Grasp the handles, and slide the DPC straight out of the card cage halfway.
5. Place one hand around the front of the DPC and the other hand under it to support it.
Slide the DPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in
the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the DPC is concentrated in the back end. Be

prepared to accept the full weight—up to 13.1 lb (5.9 kg)—as you slide the
DPC out of the chassis.
When the DPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles,
bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.
Do not stack DPC on top of one another after removal. Place each one
individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat,
stable surface.

Figure 55: Removing a DPC
Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To remove an FPC (see Figure 56 on page 194):
1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the FPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each
PIC using an optical interface on the PIC that you are removing.
3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the FPC.
4. Grasp the handles, and slide the FPC straight out of the card cage halfway.
5. Place one hand around the front of the FPC and the other hand under it to support it.
Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in
CAUTION: The weight of the FPC is concentrated in the back end. Be

prepared to accept the full weight—up to 18 lb (8.2 kg)—as you slide the
FPC out of the chassis.
When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles,

Figure 56: Removing an FPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
FAIL OK 2 3 YELLOWALAR
M
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
REDALAR
M
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004408
Related • Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router on page 484
Documentation
Installing the MX480 Router Using a Mechanical Lift
Because of the router's size and weight—up to 163.5 lb (74.2 kg) depending on the
configuration—we strongly recommend that you install the router using a mechanical
lift. To make the router light enough to install with a lift, you must first remove most
components from the chassis.
CAUTION: Before front mounting the router in a rack, have a qualified

technician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the router's weight
and is adequately supported at the installation site.
To install the router using a lift (see Figure 57 on page 195):
1. Ensure that the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure
that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
2. Load the router onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform.
3. Using the lift, position the router in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of
the mounting shelf.

4. Lift the chassis approximately 0.75 in. above the surface of the mounting shelf and
position it as close as possible to the shelf.
5. Carefully slide the router onto the mounting shelf so that the bottom of the chassis
and the mounting shelf overlap by approximately two inches.
6. Slide the router onto the mounting shelf until the mounting brackets contact the rack
rails. The shelf ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align
with the holes in the rack rails.
7. Move the lift away from the rack.
8. Install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes aligned with the rack,
starting from the bottom.
9. Visually inspect the alignment of the router. If the router is installed properly in the
rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack should be aligned with the
mounting screws on the opposite side and the router should be level.
Figure 57: Installing the Router in the Rack

NOTE: This illustration depicts the router being installed in an open-frame

rack. For an illustration of the mounting hardware required for a four-post
rack or cabinet.

Documentation
page 189
Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It with a Lift
After the router is installed in the rack, you reinstall the removed components before
booting and configuring the router. The following procedures describe how to reinstall
components in the chassis, first in the rear and then in the front:
1. Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a
Lift on page 196
2. Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 197
3. Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 198
4. Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 199
5. Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift on page 200
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
Reinstall the rightmost power supply first and then work your way to the left. To reinstall
the AC or DC power supplies, follow this procedure for each power supply (see
Figure 58 on page 197, which shows the installation of the DC power supplies):
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
sources.

3. Using both hands, slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power
supply is fully seated in the chassis slot. The power supply faceplate should be flush
with any adjacent power supply faceplate or blank installed in the power supply slot.
4. Tighten the captive screws.
Figure 58: Reinstalling a Power Supply
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall the fan tray (see Figure 59 on page 198):
2. Grasp the fan tray on each side, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct
orientation by the "this side up" label on the top surface of the fan tray.
3. Tighten the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate to secure it in the chassis.

Figure 59: Reinstalling a Fan Tray
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall an SCB (see Figure 60 on page 199):
CAUTION: Before removing or replacing an SCB, ensure that the ejector

handles are stored vertically and pressed toward the center of the SCB.
2. Carefully align the sides of the SCB with the guides inside the chassis.
3. Slide the SCB into the chassis until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is
correctly aligned.
4. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them simultaneously clockwise until the SCB
is fully seated.
5. Place the ejector handles in their proper position, horizontally and toward the center
of the board. To avoid blocking the visibility of the LEDs position the ejectors over the
PARK icon.

Figure 60: Reinstalling an SCB
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall a DPC (see Figure 61 on page 200):
2. Place the DPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag.
3. Identify the slot on the router where it will be installed.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not,
cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you.
6. Lift the DPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the DPC with the guides inside
the card cage.
7. Slide the DPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the DPC
is fully seated.

Figure 61: Reinstalling a DPC
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router with a Lift
To reinstall an FPC (see Figure 62 on page 201):
2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag.
3. Identify the two DPC slots on the router where the FPC will be installed.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver on the PIC is covered by a rubber safety cap.
If it does not, cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Orient the FPC so that the faceplate faces you.
6. Lift the FPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the FPC with the guides inside
the card cage.
7. Slide the FPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
8. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the FPC
is fully seated.

Figure 62: Reinstalling an FPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004405
Documentation
page 189
Tools Required to Install the MX480 Router Without a Mechanical Lift
To install the router, you need the following tools and parts:
• 7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver
Related • Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift on
• Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a Lift on

page 210

Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift
If you cannot use a mechanical lift to install the router (the preferred method), you can
install it manually. To make the router light enough to install manually, you first remove
most components from the chassis. The procedures for removing components from the
chassis are for initial installation only, and assume that you have not connected power
cables to the router. The following procedures describe how to remove components from
the chassis, first from the rear and then from the front:
1. Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a
Lift on page 202
2. Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 203
3. Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 204
4. Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 205
5. Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 206
Removing the Power Supplies Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
Remove the leftmost power supply first and then work your way to the right. To remove
the AC or DC power supplies for each power supply (see Figure 63 on page 203):
sources.

Figure 63: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the Router
Removing the Fan Tray Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 64 on page 204 ):
of the chassis.

Removing the SCBs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To remove the SCBs (see Figure 65 on page 205):
chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you

remove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a
stable, flat surface.
6. Repeat the procedure for each SCB.

Removing the DPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the DPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each
DPC using an optical interface on the DPC that you are removing.
3. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC.

Do not stack DPC on top of one another after removal. Place each one
stable surface.

Removing the FPCs Before Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
1. Have ready an antistatic mat for the FPC. Also have ready rubber safety caps for each
PIC using an optical interface on the PIC that you are removing.
5. Place one hand around the front of the FPC and the other hand under it to support it.
Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in


ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
M
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
REDALAR
M
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004408
Documentation

page 210

Installing the MX480 Chassis in the Rack Manually
To install the router in the rack (see Figure 68 on page 209):
CAUTION: If you are installing more than one router in a rack, install the
lowest one first. Installing a router in an upper position in a rack or cabinet
requires a lift.
CAUTION: Before front mounting the router in a rack, have a qualified

technician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the router's weight
and is adequately supported at the installation site.
CAUTION: Lifting the chassis and mounting it in a rack requires two people.
The empty chassis weighs approximately 65.5 lb (29.7 kg).
1. Ensure that the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure
that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
2. Position the router in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of the mounting
shelf. Use a pallet jack if one is available.
3. With one person on each side, hold onto the bottom of the chassis and carefully lift
it onto the mounting shelf.
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your
legs, not your back. Avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load
evenly, and be sure that your footing is solid.
4. Slide the router onto the mounting shelf until the mounting brackets contact the rack
rails. The shelf ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align
with the holes in the rack rails.
5. Install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes aligned with the rack,
starting from the bottom.
6. Visually inspect the alignment of the router. If the router is installed properly in the
rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack should be aligned with the
mounting screws on the opposite side and the router should be level.

Figure 68: Installing the Router in the Rack
NOTE: This illustration depicts the router being installed in an open-frame

rack.

Documentation
• Removing Components from the MX480 Router Before Installing It Without a Lift on
page 202

page 210

Reinstalling Components in the MX480 Router After Installing It Without a Lift
After the router is installed in the rack, you reinstall the removed components before
booting and configuring the router. The following procedures describe how to reinstall
components in the chassis, first in the rear and then in the front:
1. Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without a
Lift on page 210
2. Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 211
3. Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 212
4. Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 213
5. Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift on page 214
Reinstalling the Power Supplies After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
Reinstall the rightmost power supply first, and then work your way to the left. To reinstall
the AC or DC power supplies, follow this procedure for each power supply (see
Figure 69 on page 211, which shows the installation of the DC power supplies):
sources.
4. Tighten the captive screws.

Figure 69: Reinstalling a Power Supply
Reinstalling the Fan Tray After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall the fan tray (see Figure 70 on page 212):
2. Grasp the fan tray on each side, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct
orientation by the "this side up" label on the top surface of the fan tray.

Figure 70: Reinstalling a Fan Tray
Reinstalling the SCBs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
To reinstall an SCB (see Figure 71 on page 213):
CAUTION: Before removing or replacing an SCB, ensure that the ejector

handles are stored vertically and pressed toward the center of the SCB.
correctly aligned.
is fully seated.
5. Place the ejector handles in their proper position, horizontally and toward the center
of the board. To avoid blocking the visibility of the LEDs position the ejectors over the
PARK icon.

Figure 71: Reinstalling an SCB
Reinstalling the DPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it does not,
cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
the card cage.
is fully seated.

Figure 72: Reinstalling a DPC
Reinstalling the FPCs After Installing the MX480 Router Without a Lift
2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat, or remove it from its electrostatic bag.
3. Identify the two DPC slots on the router where the FPC will be installed.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver on the PIC is covered by a rubber safety cap.
the card cage.
is fully seated.

Figure 73: Reinstalling an FPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004405
Documentation
page 202
Installing the MX480 Router Cable Management Bracket
The cable management brackets attach to both sides of the router. To install the cable
management brackets (see Figure 74 on page 216):
2. Position the cable management brackets on the front sides of the chassis.
3. Insert the tabs into the slots.
4. Tighten the captive screws completely.

Figure 74: Installing the Cable Management Brackets
Slot
Tab
Screws
g004260
Documentation
• Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections on page 231

CHAPTER 17
Connecting the MX480 Router to Power
• Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power
Connections on page 217
• Grounding the MX480 Router on page 218
• Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router on page 220
• Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power
• Powering Off the MX480 Router on page 226
• Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 226
• Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 227
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Grounding and Power Connections
To ground and provide power to the router, you need the following tools and parts:
• 2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver
• 7/16-in. (11 mm) hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with a
torque range between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm), for tightening nuts to
terminal studs on each power supply on a DC-powered router.
• Wire cutters
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC power
supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged if excessive
torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket wrench to
tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs. Use an
appropriately-sized driver or socket wrench, with a maximum torque capacity

of 50 lb-in. or less. Ensure that the driver is undamaged and properly

calibrated and that you have been trained in its use. You may wish to use a
driver that is designed to prevent overtorque when the preset torque level is
achieved.
Related • Grounding the MX480 Router on page 218

Documentation


Grounding the MX480 Router
You ground the router by connecting a grounding cable to earth ground and then attaching
it to the chassis grounding points using UNC 1/4-20 two screws. You must provide the
grounding cable (cable lugs are supplied with the router). To ground the router:
1. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with the router
to the grounding cable.
3. Ensure that all grounding surfaces are clean and brought to a bright finish before
grounding connections are made.
4. Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground.
5. Detach the ESD grounding strap from the site ESD grounding point.
7. Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the upper rear of the
chassis. The bolts are sized for UNC 1/4-20 bolts.
8. Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points, first with the washers, then
with the screws.
9. Dress the grounding cable and verify that it does not touch or block access to router
components, and that it does not drape where people could trip on it.

Chapter 17: Connecting the MX480 Router to Power
Related • MX480 Chassis Grounding Specifications on page 127

Documentation
Connecting Power to an AC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal-Capacity Power

Supplies
CAUTION: Do not mix AC and DC power supplies within the same router.
Damage to the router might occur.
You connect AC power to the router by attaching power cords from the AC power sources
to the AC appliance inlets located on the power supplies. For power cord and AC power
specifications, see “AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router” on page 153.
To connect the AC power cords to the router (see Figure 75 on page 220):
2. Locate the power cords shipped with the router, which should have a plug appropriate
for your geographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480
3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off
(O) position.
4. Connect the power cord to the power supply.
5. Insert the power cord plug into an external AC power source receptacle.
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power

feed and a dedicated external circuit breaker.
6. Route the power cord along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the
chassis. If needed to hold the power cord in place, thread plastic cable ties, which you
must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint.
7. Verify that the power cord does not block the air exhaust and access to router
components, or drape where people could trip on it.
8. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the remaining power supplies.

Figure 75: Connecting AC Power to the Router (110V)

Documentation
Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router
To power on an AC-powered router:
2. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis.
3. Verify that each AC power cord is securely inserted into its appliance inlet.
4. Verify that an external management device is connected to one of the Routing Engine
ports (AUX, CONSOLE, or ETHERNET).
5. Turn on the power to the external management device.
6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers for the power supplies. Follow
the ESD and safety instructions for your site.
7. Move the AC input switch on each power supply to the on (|) position and observe
the status LEDs on each power supply faceplate. If an AC power supply is correctly
installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the
PS FAIL LED is not lit.

If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally,
repeat the installation and cabling procedures.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before
turning it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60
seconds before turning it off.
If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power
supply, the Routing Engine (or RCB) boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need
to power off the system again, first issue the CLI request system halt
command.
After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
indicators—such as the status LEDs on the power supply and the
show chassis command display—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first
60 seconds.
8. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor the
startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.

Documentation
• Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 231
Connecting Power to a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power

Supplies
CAUTION: Do not mix AC and DC power supplies within the same router.
Damage to the router might occur.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power is

removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit
breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit
breaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker
in the off position.
You connect DC power to the router by attaching power cables from the external DC
power sources to the terminal studs on the power supply faceplates. You must provide
the power cables (the cable lugs are supplied with the router).

To connect the DC source power cables to the router:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Ensure that the voltage across
the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable
leads might become active during installation.
3. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.
4. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.
5. Verify that the DC power cables are correctly labeled before making connections to
the power supply. In a typical power distribution scheme where the return is connected
to chassis ground at the battery plant, you can use a multimeter to verify the resistance
of the –48V and RTN DC cables to chassis ground:
• The cable with very large resistance (indicating an open circuit) to chassis ground
is –48V.
• The cable with very low resistance (indicating a closed circuit) to chassis ground is
RTN.
the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the
terminal studs on each power supply.
6. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm]
nut driver or socket wrench.)
7. Secure each power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then
with the nut (see Figure 76 on page 224). Apply between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in.
(2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm]
torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)
a. Secure each positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure each negative (–) DC source power cable lug to the –48V (input) terminal.
CAUTION: Ensure that each power cable lug seats flush against the surface
of the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut
is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. The nut should be able to spin

freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud.
Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threaded may
result in damage to the terminal stud.
CAUTION: The maximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DC

power supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studs may be damaged
if excessive torque is applied. Use only a torque-controlled driver or socket
wrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs.
The DC power supplies in slots PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by dedicated power
feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies in slots PEM2 and PEM3 must
be powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed B. This configuration provides
the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.
8. Route the power cables along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the
chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which you must provide, through the
openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cables in place.
9. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate.
10. Verify that the power cables are connected correctly, that they are not touching or
blocking access to router components, and that they do not drape where people could
trip on them.
11. Repeat Steps 3 through 10 for the remaining power supplies.

Related • DC Power Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router on page 173
Documentation
Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies
To power on a DC-powered router:
ports (CONSOLE, AUX, or ETHERNET).
5. Verify that the source power cables are connected to the appropriate terminal: the
positive (+) source cable to the return terminal (labeled RETURN) and the negative
(–) source cable to the input terminal (labeled -48V).
6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers to provide power to the DC
power cables.

7. Check the INPUT OK LED is lit steadily green to verify that power is present.
8. If power is not present:
• Verify that the fuse is installed correctly and turn on the breaker at the battery
distribution fuse board or fuse bay.
• Check the voltage with a meter at the terminals of the power supply for correct
voltage level and polarity.
9. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position
before moving it to the on (—) position.
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you
move the breaker too quickly.
repeat the installation and cabling procedures described in “Replacing an MX480 DC
Power Supply” on page 370.
10. Verify that the BREAKER ON LED is lit green steadily.
11. Verify that the PWR OK LED is lit green steadily, indicating the power supply is correctly
installed and functioning normally.
If the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling
procedures described in “Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply” on page 370.
turning it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60
seconds before turning it off.
If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power
supply, the Routing Engine (or RCB) boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need
to power off the system again, first issue the CLI request system halt
command.
After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
indicators—such as the status LEDs on the power supply and the
show chassis command display—to indicate that the power supply is
60 seconds.

Related • Installing an MX480 DC High-Capacity Power Supply

Documentation
Powering Off the MX480 Router
turning it back on.
To power off the router:
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the
request system halt both-routing-engines operational mode command. The command
shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so their state information is preserved. (If
the router contains only one Routing Engine, issue the request system halt command.)
user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines
2. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted. For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
4. Move the AC input switch on the chassis above the AC power supply or the DC circuit
breaker on each DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.

Documentation
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
To connect the AC power cord:
1. Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your
geographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router” on
page 153).

5. Attach the power cord to the AC power source, and switch on the dedicated customer
site circuit breaker for the power supply. Follow the ESD and connection instructions
for your site.
6. Switch the AC input switch on the each power supply to the on (—) position and
observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly

Documentation
• Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable

To connect a power cable for a DC power supply:
1. Locate a replacement power cable that meets the specifications defined in “DC Power
Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router” on page 173.
2. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached a cable lug to the replacement power
cable.
3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED is off.
4. Secure the power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with
the nut. Apply between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each
nut (see Figure 77 on page 228). Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm]


Figure 77: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply
5. Route the power cable along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the
openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cable in place.
6. Verify that the DC power cable is connected correctly, that it does not touch or block
access to router components, and that it does not drape where people could trip on
it.
8. Attach the power cable to the DC power source.

9. Turn on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker to the power supply.
Observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly
installed and functioning normally, the PWR OK, BRKR ON, and INPUT OK LEDs light
green steadily.

Documentation
• Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 370
• Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 377


CHAPTER 18
Connecting the MX480 Router to the

Network
• Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 234
• Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 235
• Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 236
• Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router on page 237
• Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface on page 239
Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections
To connect the router to management devices and line cards, you need the following
tools and parts:
• 2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver
• 2.5-mm Phillips (+) screwdriver
• Wire cutters
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap
Related • Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 231
Documentation
Connecting the MX480 Router to Management and Alarm Devices
• Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 232
• Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 232
• Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 233

Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management

To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect an
Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. One
Ethernet cable is provided with the router. To connect to the ETHERNET port on the
Routing Engine:
1. Turn off the power to the management device.
2. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (Figure 79 on page 232 shows the connector) into
the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. Figure 78 on page 232 shows the port.
3. Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
Figure 78: Ethernet Port
Figure 79: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector
See Also • Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections on page 231
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device

To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect it to the
appropriate CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other
auxiliary device, connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a
cable with an RJ-45 connector. One serial cable with an RJ-45 connector and a DB-9
connector is provided with the router. To connect a device to the CONSOLE port and
another device to the AUX port, you must supply an additional cable.
To connect a management console or auxiliary device:
1. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
2. Plug the RJ-45 end of the serial cable (Figure 81 on page 233 shows the connector)
into the AUX port or CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. Figure 80 on page 233 shows
the ports.

Chapter 18: Connecting the MX480 Router to the Network
3. Plug the female DB-9 end into the device's serial port.
NOTE:
For console devices, configure the serial port to the following values:
• Baud rate—9600
• Parity—N
• Data bits—8
• Stop bits—1
• Flow control—none
Figure 80: Auxiliary and Console Ports
Figure 81: Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Cable Connector
See Also • Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers on
page 134
Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device

To connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires to the RED and
YELLOW relay contacts on the craft interface. (See Figure 82 on page 234.) A system
condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates
the corresponding alarm relay contact.
The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the router.
2
They accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm ),
which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are
connecting.

To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact (see Figure 82 on page 234):
1. Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08
2
and 2.08 mm ).
2. While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5-mm flat-blade
screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side. With the small screws on its side
facing left, insert wires into the slots in the front of the block based on the wiring for
the external device. Tighten the screws to secure the wire.
3. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, and use a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver
to tighten the screws on the face of the block.
4. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.
To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.
See Also • Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections on page 231
Related • Tools and Parts Required for MX480 Router Connections on page 231
Documentation
• Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers on
page 134
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect an

Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. One
Ethernet cable is provided with the router. To connect to the ETHERNET port on the
Routing Engine:
1. Turn off the power to the management device.
2. Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (Figure 79 on page 232 shows the connector) into
the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine. Figure 78 on page 232 shows the port.

Figure 84: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector
Documentation
Connecting the MX480 Router to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device
appropriate CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other
auxiliary device, connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a
cable with an RJ-45 connector. One serial cable with an RJ-45 connector and a DB-9
connector is provided with the router. To connect a device to the CONSOLE port and
another device to the AUX port, you must supply an additional cable.
To connect a management console or auxiliary device:
1. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
2. Plug the RJ-45 end of the serial cable (Figure 81 on page 233 shows the connector)
into the AUX port or CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. Figure 80 on page 233 shows
the ports.
3. Plug the female DB-9 end into the device's serial port.
NOTE:
For console devices, configure the serial port to the following values:
• Baud rate—9600
• Parity—N
• Data bits—8
• Stop bits—1
• Flow control—none

Figure 86: Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Cable Connector
Related • Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers on
Connecting the MX480 Router to an External Alarm-Reporting Device
To connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires to the RED and
YELLOW relay contacts on the craft interface. (See Figure 82 on page 234.) A system
condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates
the corresponding alarm relay contact.
The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the router.
2
They accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm ),
which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are
connecting.
To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact (see Figure 82 on page 234):
1. Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.08
2
and 2.08 mm ).
2. While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5-mm flat-blade
screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side. With the small screws on its side
facing left, insert wires into the slots in the front of the block based on the wiring for
the external device. Tighten the screws to secure the wire.
To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.

Documentation
Connecting DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC Cables to the MX480 Router
To connect the DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs to the network (see Figure 88 on page 238 and
Figure 89 on page 238):
1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the component. For cable
specifications, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
2. Remove the rubber safety plug from the cable connector port.
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the

ends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cable
connected to a transceiver emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
CAUTION: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered except when

inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and
prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the faceplate.
NOTE: The XFP cages and optics on the components are industry standard
parts that have limited tactile feedback for insertion of optics and fiber.
You need to insert the optics and fiber firmly until the latch is securely in
place.
4. Arrange the cable to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure
the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place
excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend

radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable
and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
CAUTION: Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector. Do
not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle, which stresses the cable at
the fastening point.
Figure 88: Attaching a Cable to a DPC
Fiber-optic cable
connector
Figure 89: Attaching a Cable to a MIC

g004928
Fiber-optic cable
Documentation

Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface
To connect the alarm relay wires between a router and an alarm-reporting device (see
1. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 28-AWG and
2
14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm ).
2. Insert the replacement wires into the slots in the front of the block. Use a 2.5-mm
flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws and secure the wire.

Documentation
• Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface on page 287
• Removing the MX480 Craft Interface on page 288
• Installing the MX480 Craft Interface on page 251


CHAPTER 19
Initially Configuring the MX480 Router
• Initially Configuring the MX480 Router on page 241
Initially Configuring the MX480 Router
The MX240 router is shipped with Junos OS preinstalled and ready to be configured when
the MX240 router is powered on. There are three copies of the software: one on a
CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine, one on a rotating hard disk in the Routing
Engine, and one on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot in the Routing
Engine faceplate.
When the router boots, it first attempts to start the image on the USB flash drive. If a
USB flash drive is not inserted into the Routing Engine or the attempt otherwise fails, the
router next tries the CompactFlash card (if installed), and finally the hard disk.
You configure the router by issuing Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) commands,
either on a console device attached to the CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine, or over
a telnet connection to a network connected to the ETHERNET port on the Routing Engine.
Gather the following information before configuring the router:
• Name the router will use on the network
• Domain name the router will use
• IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface
• IP address of a default router
• IP address of a DNS server
• Password for the root user
This procedure connects the router to the network but does not enable it to forward
traffic. For complete information about enabling the router to forward traffic, including
examples, see the Junos OS configuration guides.
To configure the software:
1. Verify that the router is powered on.
2. Log in as the “root” user. There is no password.

3. Start the CLI.
root# cli
root@>
4. Enter configuration mode.
cli> configure
[edit]
root@#
5. Configure the name of the router. If the name includes spaces, enclose the name in
quotation marks (“ ”).
[edit]
root@# set system host-name host-name
6. Create a management console user account.
[edit]
root@# set system login user user-name authentication plain-text-password
New password: password
Retype new password: password
7. Set the user account class to super-user.
[edit]
root@# set system login user user-name class super-user
8. Configure the router’s domain name.
[edit]
root@# set system domain-name domain-name
9. Configure the IP address and prefix length for the router’s Ethernet interface.
[edit]
root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length
10. Configure the IP address of a backup router, which is used only while the routing
protocol is not running.
[edit]
root@# set system backup-router address
11. Configure the IP address of a DNS server.
[edit]
root@# set system name-server address
12. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password, an
encrypted password, or an SSH public key string (DSA or RSA).

Chapter 19: Initially Configuring the MX480 Router
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-password
New password: password
Retype new password: password
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key
13. (Optional) Configure the static routes to remote subnets with access to the
management port. Access to the management port is limited to the local subnet. To
access the management port from a remote subnet, you need to add a static route
to that subnet within the routing table. For more information about static routes, see
the Junos OS Administration Library.
[edit]
root@# set routing-options static route remote-subnet next-hop destination-IP retain
no-readvertise
14. Configure the telnet service at the [edit system services] hierarchy level.
[edit]
root@# set system services telnet
15. (Optional) Display the configuration to verify that it is correct.
[edit]
root@# show
system {
host-name host-name;
domain-name domain-name;
backup-router address;
root-authentication {
authentication-method (password | public-key);
}
name-server {
address;
}
}
interfaces {
fxp0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address address/prefix-length;
}
}

}
}
16. Commit the configuration to activate it on the router.
[edit]
root@# commit
17. (Optional) Configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration

statements. Then commit the changes to activate them on the router.
[edit]
root@host# commit
18. When you have finished configuring the router, exit configuration mode.
[edit]
root@host# exit
root@host>
NOTE: To reinstall Junos OS, you boot the router from the removable media.
Do not insert the removable media during normal operations. The router does
not operate normally when it is booted from the removable media.
When the router boots from the storage media (removable media, CompactFlash card,
or hard disk) it expands its search in the /config directory of the routing platform for the
following files in the following order: juniper.conf (the main configuration file), rescue.conf
(the rescue configuration file), and juniper.conf.1 (the first rollback configuration file).
When the search finds the first configuration file that can be loaded properly, the file
loads and the search ends. If none of the file can be loaded properly, the routing platform
does not function properly. If the router boots from an alternate boot device, Junos OS
displays a message indication this when you log in to the router.
Related • Powering On an AC-Powered MX480 Router on page 220

Documentation
• Powering On a DC-Powered MX480 Router with Normal Capacity Power Supplies on
page 224

PART 4
Installing and Replacing Components

• Overview of Installing and Replacing Components on page 247
• Installing Components on page 251
• Replacing Chassis Components on page 287
• Replacing Cooling System Components on page 295
• Replacing Host Subsystem Components on page 301
• Replacing Line Card Components on page 323
• Replacing Power System Components on page 367
• Replacing Switch Fabric Components on page 381


CHAPTER 20
Overview of Installing and Replacing

Components

• Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components on page 248
MX480 Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are router components that can be replaced at the
customer site. Replacing most FRUs requires minimal router downtime. The router uses
the following types of FRUs:
• Hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs—You can remove and replace these

components without powering off the router or disrupting the routing functions.
• Hot-pluggable FRUs—You can remove and replace these components without powering
off the router, but the routing functions of the system are interrupted when the
component is removed.
Table 101 on page 248 lists the FRUs for the MX960 router. Before you replace an SCB or
a Routing Engine, you must take the host subsystem offline.

Table 101: Field-Replaceable Units

Hot-Removable and Hot-Insertable FRUs Hot-Pluggable FRUs
• Air filter • Master Switch Control Board (SCB) (if

• Craft interface nonstop active routing is not configured)
• Master Routing Engine (if nonstop active
• Backup Switch Control Board (SCB) (if
redundant) routing is not configured)
• Switch Control Board (SCB) (nonredundant)
• Master Switch Control Board (SCB) (if
nonstop active routing is configured) • Routing Engine (nonredundant)
• Backup Routing Engine (if redundant) • Solid-state drives (SSDs) of Routing Engines
• Master Routing Engine (if nonstop active
routing is configured)
• Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs)
• Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)
• Modular Port Concentrators (MPCs)
• Modular Interface Cards (MICs)
• PICs
• AC and DC power supplies (if redundant)
• Fan tray

Documentation
Tools and Parts Required to Replace MX480 Hardware Components
To replace hardware components, you need the tools and parts listed in
Table 102 on page 248.
Table 102: Tools and Parts Required

Tool or Part Components
2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver • Alarm relay terminal block
7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver or socket • DC power supply

wrench • Cables and connectors
Blank panels (if component is not • DPC

reinstalled) • FPC
• PIC
• MPC
• MIC
• Power supply
• Routing Engine
• SCB

Chapter 20: Overview of Installing and Replacing Components
Table 102: Tools and Parts Required (continued)

Tool or Part Components
Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat • Craft Interface

• DPC
• FPC
• PIC
• MPC
• MIC
• Routing Engine
• SCB
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) • All

grounding wrist strap
Flat-blade (–) screwdriver • DPC

• Cables and connectors
Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 • Air filter

and 2 • Craft interface
• Fan tray
• SCB
• Routing Engine
• Cables and connectors
Rubber safety cap • DPC

• MPC
• MIC
• PIC
Wire cutters • Cables and connectors

• DC power supply

Documentation


CHAPTER 21
Installing Components

• Installing the MX480 Air Filter on page 252
• Installing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 253
• Installing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 254
• Installing an MX480 DPC on page 256
• Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 259
• Installing an MX480 FPC on page 261
• Installing an MX480 MIC on page 264
• Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC on page 266
• Installing an MX480 MPC on page 269
• Installing an MX480 PIC on page 271
• Installing an MX480 AS MLC on page 274
• Installing an MX480 AS MSC on page 275
• Installing an MX480 AS MXC on page 277
• Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 278
• Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 280
• Installing an MX480 SCB on page 283
• Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 285
Installing the MX480 Craft Interface
To install the craft interface (see Figure 91 on page 252):
2. Grasp the craft interface with one hand, and hold the bottom edge of the craft interface
with the other hand to support its weight.
3. Orient the ribbon cable so that it plugs into the connector socket. The connector is
keyed and can be inserted only one way.

4. Align the bottom of the craft interface with the sheet metal above the card cage and
press it into place.
5. Tighten the screws on the left and right corners of the craft interface faceplate.
6. Reattach any external devices connected to the craft interface.
Figure 91: Installing the Craft Interface

Documentation
Installing the MX480 Air Filter
To install the air filter (see Figure 92 on page 253):
2. Locate the up arrow and ensure that the air filter is right side up.
3. Slide the air filter straight into the chassis until it stops.
4. Align the captive screws of the air filter cover with the mounting holes on the chassis.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the air filter cover.

Chapter 21: Installing Components
Figure 92: Installing the Air Filter

Documentation
• Removing the MX480 Air Filter on page 295
Installing the MX480 Fan Tray
To install the fan tray (see Figure 93 on page 254):
2. Grasp the fan tray handle, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct
orientation by the this side up label on the top surface of the fan tray.

Figure 93: Installing the Fan Tray

Documentation
• Removing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 298
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine
To install a Routing Engine into an SCB (see Figure 94 on page 255):
2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the
ejector handles outward.
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it.
4. Carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on
the SCB.

5. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCB until you feel resistance, and then press the
Routing Engine's faceplate until it engages the connectors.
6. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine.
7. Tighten the captive screws on the left and right of the Routing Engine.
8. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot.
After the Routing Engine boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL,
RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the router is operational and the Routing
Engine is functioning properly, the green ONLINE LED lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED
lights steadily instead, remove and install the Routing Engine again. If the red FAIL LED
still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your customer
support representative.
To check the status of the Routing Engine, use the CLI command:
user@host> show chassis routing-engine

Routing Engine status: Slot 0: Current state Master ...
For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS documentation.
Figure 94: Installing a Routing Engine

Documentation
• Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 311
• Removing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 301

Installing an MX480 DPC
A DPC weighs up to 14.5 lb (6.6 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight.
To install a DPC (see Figure 95 on page 258):
4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it does
not, cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces youvertically.
the card cage.
is fully seated.
9. Remove the rubber safety cap from each fiber-optic transceiver and cable.

10. Insert the cables into the cable connector ports on each DPC (see
11. Arrange the cable in the standard or extended cable manager to prevent it from
dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its
own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled
loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.


12. Use one of the following methods to bring the DPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding DPC online button on the craft interface until the
green OK LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.
• Issue the following CLI command:
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number online
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
CAUTION: After the OK LED turns green, wait at least 30 seconds before
removing the DPC again, removing a DPC from a different slot, or inserting
a DPC in a different slot.
You can also verify that the DPC is functioning correctly by issuing the show chassis fpc
and show chassis fpc pic-status commands.

Figure 95: Installing a DPC
0
MASTER
1 YELL
OW ALAR
PEM 0 1 2 3 ONLINE M RED ALAR
M
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
OK/FAIL 1 0
1 0
0/0 0/5 2/0 2/5
1 0 1 0 0
1
1/0 1/5
3/0 3/5
g004053

Related • Removing an MX480 DPC on page 323

Documentation
Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
To install a cable:
1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC. For cable
2. If the cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove the plug.



you are inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean
and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the component faceplate.
4. Arrange the cable in the cable management brackets to prevent it from dislodging or
developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight
as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.
Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

5. Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port.
6. Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables.
7. If the component is offline (its failure indicator LED is lit), use one of the following
methods to bring the it online:
• To bring a DPC or an MPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface until the
• To bring a PIC online:
• Press the PIC offline/online button until the PIC LED lights green. For a PIC installed
in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that
leads to the button.

user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online
• To bring a MIC online:
• Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC LED lights green.
user@host>request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot pic-slot mic-slot online
The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the component is online. You can
also verify correct DPC or MPC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc command
or correct MIC or the PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status
command.

Documentation
• Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 329
• Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs on page 434
Installing an MX480 FPC
An FPC takes up two DPC slots on the MX480 router. Up to three FPCs can be installed
horizontally in the front of the router. The FPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable.
An empty FPC3 weighs 14 lb (6.5 kg). A fully configured FPC can weigh up to 18 lb (8.2 kg).
Be prepared to accept its full weight.
To install an FPC (see Figure 97 on page 263):
2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take each PIC to be installed in the replacement FPC out of its electrostatic bag, and
identify the slot on the FPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic PIC has a rubber safety cap covering the PIC transceiver.
5. Install each PIC into the appropriate slot on the FPC.
6. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the FPC.

the card cage.
CAUTION: When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector
handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.
is fully seated.
11. If any of the PICs on the FPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety
cap from each transceiver and cable.

12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each PIC on the FPC.

14. Use one of the following methods to bring the FPC online:
• Press and hold the FPC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the
button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds. The LEDs and online/offline button for
each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.

CAUTION: After the OK LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds before
removing the FPC again, removing an FPC from a different slot, or inserting
an FPC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct FPC and PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and
show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in “Maintaining MX480 FPCs” on page 425
and “Maintaining MX480 PICs” on page 433.
Figure 97: Installing an FPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004405

Documentation
• Removing an MX480 FPC on page 332
• Holding an MX480 FPC on page 427
• Storing an MX480 FPC on page 429

Installing an MX480 MIC
To install a MIC (see Figure 99 on page 266):
2. If you have used a dual-wide MIC and are now replacing it with two “single” MICs,
install the septum (see Figure 98 on page 264):
a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (If necessary, remove the MPC from the router as
described in “Removing an MX480 MPC” on page 345).
b. Position the septum in the center of the MPC so that it lines up with holes labeled
S on the top of the MPC.
c. Insert a screw into each of the two holes labeled S, and then tighten completely.
d. On the bottom of the MPC, insert a screw into each of the four holes labeled S, and
then tighten completely.
e. Install the MPC as described in “Installing an MX480 MPC” on page 269.
Figure 98: Installing the Septum
Slide septum Install four screws

into MPC. on bottom.
Install two
screws.
g005041
3. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver
on the faceplate. Install a cap if necessary.
4. On the MPC, pull the ejector lever that is adjacent to the MIC you are installing away
from the MPC faceplate.
5. Align the rear of the MIC with the guides located at the corners of the MIC slot.
6. Slide the MIC into the MPC until it is firmly seated in the MPC.

CAUTION: Slide the MIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the MIC.
7. Verify that the ejector lever is engaged by pushing it toward the MPC faceplate.
8. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver
and the end of each cable.


9. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the MIC.
10. Arrange each cable to prevent the cable from dislodging or developing stress points.
Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor.
Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.

11. Use one of the following methods to bring the MIC online:
• Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC OK/FAIL LED lights green.
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot mic-slot mic-slot online

The normal functioning status LED confirms that the MIC is online. You can also verify
correct MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described
in “Maintaining MX480 MICs” on page 430.
Figure 99: Installing a MIC
g004923
Related • MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description on page 76
Documentation
• Removing an MX480 MIC on page 338
• MX480 MIC Serial Number Label on page 465
Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC
To install a dual-wide MIC (see Figure 101 on page 268):
2. Remove the septum, if necessary (see Figure 100 on page 267):
a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (if necessary, remove the MPC from the router as
b. Remove the four screws labeled S on the bottom of the MPC.
c. Remove the two screws labeled S on the top of the MPC.
d. Slide the septum towards you and out of the MPC.
e. Store the septum and screws for later use.
f. Install the MPC as described in “Installing an MX480 MPC” on page 269.

Figure 100: Removing the Septum
Remove four screws Remove two

on bottom. screws on top.
Slide septum
forward.
g005040
MPC
4. Pull the ejector lever above both MIC slots away from the router.
6. Slide the MIC into the MIC slot until it is firmly seated in the chassis.
7. Verify that the ejector levers are engaged by pushing them toward the router.




Figure 101: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC

MPC
Dual-wide MIC
g005050

Documentation

Installing an MX480 MPC
An MPC installs horizontally in the front of the router. The MPCs are hot-insertable and
hot-removable. A fully configured MPC can weigh up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg). Be prepared to
accept its full weight.
To install an MPC (see Figure 102 on page 271):
2. Place the MPC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take each MIC to be installed in the replacement MPC out of its electrostatic bag,
and identify the slot on the MPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic MIC has a rubber safety cap covering the MIC transceiver.
5. Install each MIC into the appropriate slot on the MPC.
6. Locate the slot in the card cage in which you plan to install the MPC.
7. Orient the MPC so that the faceplate faces you.
8. Lift the MPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the MPC with the guides inside
the card cage.
CAUTION: When the MPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector
9. Slide the MPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
10. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the MPC
is fully seated.
11. If any of the MICs on the MPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety


12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each MIC on the MPC.
Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess cable
out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable management system. Placing
fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.

13. Use one of the following methods to bring the MPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding MPC online button on the craft interface until the
green OK/FAIL LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.
CAUTION: After the OK/FAIL LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds
before removing the MPC again, removing an MPC from a different slot,
or inserting an MPC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct MPC and MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and
show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in“Maintaining MX480 MPCs” on
page 431 and “Maintaining MX480 MICs” on page 430.

Figure 102: Installing an MPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g004912
Related • MX480 Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) Description on page 87
Documentation
• Removing an MX480 MPC on page 345
• MX480 MPC Serial Number Label on page 467
Installing an MX480 PIC
To install a PIC (see Figure 103 on page 273):
2. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver
3. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the PIC
slot in the FPC and then slide the PIC in until it lodges firmly in the FPC.
CAUTION: Slide the PIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the PIC.

4. For an FPC3 PIC, turn the ejector handle at the top of the PIC faceplate clockwise,
then tighten the captive screw at the bottom of the faceplate to secure the PIC in the
FPC.
5. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver


6. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIC.

8. Use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online:
in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads
to the button.
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online

The normal functioning status LED confirms that the PIC is online. You can also verify
correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described
in “Maintaining MX480 PICs” on page 433.
Figure 103: Installing a PIC
g004411
Documentation
• Removing an MX480 PIC on page 351
• Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs on page 449
• MX480 PIC Serial Number Label on page 468

Installing an MX480 AS MLC
You can install up to five Application Services Modular Line Cards (AS MLCs) horizontally
in the front of the MX480 router. The AS MLCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable.
An empty AS MLC weighs 10.5 lb (4.76 kg). A fully configured AS MLC can weigh up to
15.27 lb (6.93 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight.
To install an AS MLC (see Figure 104 on page 275):
2. Place the AS MLC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take the AS MSC and AS MXC (the modular cards) to be installed in the AS MLC out
of its electrostatic bag. The AS MSC must be inserted in the left slot and the AS MXC
in the right slot.
4. Install the AS MSC and AS MXC into the appropriate slot on the AS MLC.
5. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the AS MLC.
6. Orient the AS MLC so that the faceplate faces you.
7. Lift the AS MLC into place, and carefully align the sides of the AS MLC with the guides
inside the card cage.
CAUTION: When the AS MLC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the
ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its
weight.
8. Slide the AS MLC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
9. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the AS
MLC is fully seated.
10. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MLC online:
• Press and hold the AS MLC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the
each AS MLC are located above it on the craft interface.

removing the AS MLC again, removing an AS MLC from a different slot, or
inserting an AS MLC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct AS MLC and AS MSC or AS MXC functioning by issuing the
show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status.
Figure 104: Installing an AS MLC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g007336
Documentation
• Removing an MX480 AS MLC on page 356
Installing an MX480 AS MSC
To install an AS MSC (see Figure 105 on page 276):
2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MSC with the notches in the
AS MSC slot (slot 0—the top slot in the AS MLC ), and then slide the AS MSC in until
it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.

CAUTION: Slide the AS MSC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the AS MSC.
3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MSC online:
• Press the AS MSC offline/online button until the LED light turns green.
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MSC is online. You can also
verify correct AS MSC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status.
Figure 105: Installing an AS MSC
g006674
Related • MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description on page 96

Documentation
• Removing an MX480 AS MSC on page 360

Installing an MX480 AS MXC
To install an AS MXC (see Figure 106 on page 278):
2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MXC with the notches in the
AS MXC slot (slot 1—the bottom slot in the AS MLC), and then slide the AS MXC in
until it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.
CAUTION: Slide the AS MXC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the AS MXC.
3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MXC online:
• Press the AS MXC offline/online button until the LED light turns green.
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MXC is online. You can also
verify correct AS MXC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command.

Figure 106: Installing an AS MXC
g006676

Documentation
• Removing an MX480 AS MXC on page 363
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply
To install an AC power supply (see Figure 107 on page 279):
(O) position.
4. Tighten both captive screws at the bottom of the power supply.

5. Attach the power cord to the power supply.
for your site.
8. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the on (
| ) position and observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power
supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light
steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
Figure 107: Installing an AC Power Supply in an MX480 Router

Documentation
• Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 367

Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply

To install a DC power supply (see Figure 108 on page 282):
1. Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there
is no chance that the cable leads might become active during installation.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the lower edge of the power supply faceplate.
7. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs.
with the split washer, and then with the nut (see Figure 109 on page 283). Apply between
23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the
nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)
a. Secure the positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure the negative (–) DC source power cable lug to the –48V (input) terminal.


NOTE: The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by

dedicated power feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies
in PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived
from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed
redundancy for the system.
NOTE: For information about connecting to DC power sources, see “DC

Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router” on page 157.
chassis. If needed to hold the power cables in place, thread plastic cable ties, which
you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint.
11. Verify that the power cabling is correct, that the cables are not touching or blocking
access to router components, and that they do not drape where people could trip on
them.
12. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Follow your site's procedures
for safety and ESD.
Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply is lit green.

green steadily.
NOTE: If more than one power supply is being installed, turn on all power
supplies at the same time.
Figure 108: Installing a DC Power Supply in the Router


Documentation
• Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 370
Installing an MX480 SCB
To install an SCB (see Figure 110 on page 285):
correctly aligned.
is fully seated.
5. Place the ejector handles in the proper position, vertically and toward the center of
the board.
6. Check the LEDs on the SCB faceplate to verify that it is functioning normally.

• The green OK/FAIL LED should light steadily a few minutes after the SCB is installed.
• If the OK/FAIL LED is red, remove and install the SCB again. If the OK/FAIL LED still
lights steadily, the SCB is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support
representative.
7. Check the status of the SCB using the show chassis environment cb command:
user@host> show chassis environment cb

CB 0 status:
State Online Master
Temperature 25 degrees C / 77 degrees F
Power 1
1.2 V 1198 mV
1.5 V 1508 mV
1.8 V 1830 mV
2.5 V 5059 mV
3.3 V 6593 mV
5.0 V 5111 mV
12.0 V 12181 mV
1.25 V 1250 mV
3.3 V SM3 6587 mV
5 V RE 5078 mV
12 V RE 12026 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias PEM 11253 mV
4.6 V bias MidPlane 4827 mV
11.3 V bias FPD 11408 mV
11.3 V bias POE 0 11446 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11408 mV
Bus Revision 6
FPGA Revision 0
CB 1 status:
State Online Standby
Power 1
1.2 V 1211 mV
1.5 V 1517 mV
1.8 V 1817 mV
2.5 V 2507 mV
3.3 V 3312 mV
5.0 V 5136 mV
12.0 V 12142 mV
1.25 V 1260 mV
3.3 V SM3 3306 mV
5 V RE 5085 mV
12 V RE 11968 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias POE 0 11350 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11330 mV
Bus Revision 39
FPGA Revision 1

Figure 110: Installing an SCB
0
MASTER
1 YELLOW ALARM
PEM 0 1 2 3 ONLINE RED ALARM
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0
g004049

Documentation
• Removing an MX480 SCB on page 381
• Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors
• Effect of Taking the MX480 Host Subsystem Offline
Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
To install an SFP or XFP:
2. Take each transceiver to be installed out of its electrostatic bag, and identify the slot
on the component where it will be installed.
3. Verify that each transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap.

4. Carefully align the transceiver with the slots in the component. The connectors should
face the component.
5. Slide the transceiver until the connector is seated in the component slot. If you are
unable to fully insert the transceiver, make sure the connector is facing the right way.
6. Close the ejector handle of the transceiver.
7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable. Insert
the cable into the transceiver.

8. Verify that the status LEDs on the component faceplate indicate that the SFP or XFP
is functioning correctly. For more information about the component LEDs, see the MX
Series Interface Module Reference.

Documentation
• Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 399
• Replacing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 328

CHAPTER 22
Replacing Chassis Components
• Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface on page 287

• Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets on page 291
• Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router on page 292
• Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router on page 292
Replacing the MX480 Craft Interface
1. Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface on page 287
2. Removing the MX480 Craft Interface on page 288
3. Installing the MX480 Craft Interface on page 289
4. Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface on page 290
Disconnecting the Alarm Relay Wires from the MX480 Craft Interface
To disconnect the alarm relay wires from the router and an alarm-reporting device (see
1. Disconnect the existing wire at the external device.
3. Using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the small screws on the face of the
terminal block and remove the block from the relay contact.
4. Using the 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the small screws on the side of the
terminal block. Remove existing wires from the slots in the front of the block.

See Also • Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router on page 484
Removing the MX480 Craft Interface

To remove the craft interface (see Figure 112 on page 288):
2. Detach any external devices connected to the craft interface.
3. Loosen the captive screws at the left and right corners of the craft interface faceplate.
4. Grasp the craft interface faceplate and carefully tilt it toward you until it is horizontal.
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the back of the faceplate by gently pressing on both
sides of the latch with your thumb and forefinger. Remove the craft interface from
the chassis.
Figure 112: Removing the Craft Interface

Chapter 22: Replacing Chassis Components
Installing the MX480 Craft Interface

To install the craft interface (see Figure 91 on page 252):
2. Grasp the craft interface with one hand, and hold the bottom edge of the craft interface
with the other hand to support its weight.
3. Orient the ribbon cable so that it plugs into the connector socket. The connector is
keyed and can be inserted only one way.
4. Align the bottom of the craft interface with the sheet metal above the card cage and
press it into place.
5. Tighten the screws on the left and right corners of the craft interface faceplate.
6. Reattach any external devices connected to the craft interface.
Figure 113: Installing the Craft Interface

Connecting the Alarm Relay Wires to the MX480 Craft Interface

To connect the alarm relay wires between a router and an alarm-reporting device (see
1. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 28-AWG and
2
14-AWG (0.08 and 2.08 mm ).
2. Insert the replacement wires into the slots in the front of the block. Use a 2.5-mm
flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the screws and secure the wire.

Documentation
page 15

Replacing the MX480 Cable Management Brackets
To remove the cable management brackets (see Figure 115 on page 291):
2. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the chassis.
3. Remove the cable management brackets.
To install the cable management brackets (see Figure 115 on page 291):
2. Position the on the front sides of the chassis.
3. Insert the tabs into the slots.
4. Tighten the screws completely.
Figure 115: Removing the Cable Management Brackets
Slot
Tab
Screws
g004260

Documentation
• MX480 Cable Management Brackets on page 19

Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router
One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors is provided with the router. To replace the
cable connected to the ETHERNET port:
2. Press the tab on the connector, and pull the connector straight out of the port.
Figure 116 on page 292 shows the connector.
3. Disconnect the cable from the network device.
4. Plug one end of the replacement cable into the ETHERNET port. Figure 117 on page 292
shows the port.
Figure 116: Cable Connector

Documentation
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router
CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device,

connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a cable with an RJ-45
connector. One RJ-45/DB-9 cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a
device to both ports, you must supply another cable.
To replace a cable connected to a management console or auxiliary device:
3. Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.
4. Plug the RJ-45 end of the replacement serial cable into the CONSOLE or AUX port.
Figure 118 on page 293 shows the external device ports on the Routing Engine.
5. Plug the female DB-9 end into the console or auxiliary device's serial port.


CHAPTER 23
Replacing Cooling System Components
• Replacing the MX480 Air Filter on page 295

• Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 297
Replacing the MX480 Air Filter
1. Removing the MX480 Air Filter on page 295

2. Installing the MX480 Air Filter on page 296
Removing the MX480 Air Filter
CAUTION: Do not run the router for more than a few minutes without the air
filter in place.
CAUTION: Always keep the air filter in place while the router is operating,
except during replacement. Because the fans are very powerful, they could
pull small bits of wire or other materials into the router through the unfiltered
air intake. This could damage the router components.
To remove the air filter (see Figure 119 on page 296):
2. Loosen the captive screws on the air filter cover.
3. Remove the air filter cover.
4. Slide the air filter out of the chassis.

Figure 119: Removing the Air Filter
• Installing the MX480 Air Filter on page 252
Installing the MX480 Air Filter

To install the air filter (see Figure 92 on page 253):
2. Locate the up arrow and ensure that the air filter is right side up.
3. Slide the air filter straight into the chassis until it stops.
4. Align the captive screws of the air filter cover with the mounting holes on the chassis.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the air filter cover.

Chapter 23: Replacing Cooling System Components
Figure 120: Installing the Air Filter
• Removing the MX480 Air Filter on page 295

Documentation
Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray
1. Removing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 298

2. Installing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 299

Removing the MX480 Fan Tray
NOTE: To prevent overheating, install the replacement fan tray immediately

after removing the existing fan tray.
To remove the fan tray (see Figure 121 on page 299):
WARNING: To avoid injury, keep tools and your fingers away from the fans
as you slide the fan module out of the chassis. The fans might still be
spinning.
of the chassis.

Chapter 23: Replacing Cooling System Components
Installing the MX480 Fan Tray

To install the fan tray (see Figure 93 on page 254):
2. Grasp the fan tray handle, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct
orientation by the this side up label on the top surface of the fan tray.

Figure 122: Installing the Fan Tray
• Removing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 298

Documentation

CHAPTER 24
Replacing Host Subsystem Components

• Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800 on page 305
• Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G on page 306
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host
Subsystem on page 313
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host
Subsystem on page 319
Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine
1. Removing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 301

2. Installing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 303
Removing an MX480 Routing Engine

Before you remove a Routing Engine, remove the cables that connect to it.
CAUTION: Before you replace a Routing Engine, you must take the host
subsystem offline. If there is only one host subsystem, taking the host
subsystem offline shuts down the router.
CAUTION: If the Routing Engine to be replaced is currently functioning as

the master Routing engine, switch it to be the backup before removing it.
To remove a Routing Engine from an SCB (see Figure 123 on page 303):
1. Take the Routing Engine offline gracefully.

4. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off.
5. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
6. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine.
7. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the
chassis.
8. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
9. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an

SCB installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods
of time. If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine
should be installed as soon as possible.

Chapter 24: Replacing Host Subsystem Components
Figure 123: Removing a Routing Engine
0
MASTER
1 YELL
OW ALAR
M
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
OK/FAIL 1 0 1
0
HDD
ONLIN E
MASTE R
OFFLIN E
ONLINE /
RESET
USB
AUX
CONSOL E
ETHERNE T
g004050
See Also • Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 311
• Installing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 254
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine

To install a Routing Engine into an SCB (see Figure 94 on page 255):

the SCB.
5. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCB until you feel resistance, and then press the
7. Tighten the captive screws on the left and right of the Routing Engine.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot.
After the Routing Engine boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL,
RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the router is operational and the Routing
Engine is functioning properly, the green ONLINE LED lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED
lights steadily instead, remove and install the Routing Engine again. If the red FAIL LED
still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your customer
support representative.
To check the status of the Routing Engine, use the CLI command:

Routing Engine status: Slot 0: Current state Master ...
For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS documentation.
Figure 124: Installing a Routing Engine

Related • Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 311
Documentation
• Synchronizing Routing Engines
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-1800
Each RE-S-1800 Routing Engine supports two solid-state drives (SSD) specified by
Juniper Networks. The RE-S-1800 ships with one SSD installed in the slot labeled SATA
SSD 1. The spare SSD is Juniper part number SSD-32G-RE-S. Figure 125 on page 305 shows
the arrangement of storage drive slots on a RE-S-1800 Routing Engine.
Figure 125: RE-S-1800 Storage Drive Slots

Auxiliary Ethernet Online/Offline SSD SSD
port port button slot 1 slot 2
g006039
Extractor Console USB Status LEDs Extractor
clip port port clip
The following drive has been verified to work in the RE-S-1800 Routing Engine:
• SSD-32G-RE-S
To replace a storage drive:
1. Disable and deactivate the storage drive.

2. Remove the storage drive.
a. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist, and
connect the strap to an ESD point on the appliance.
For more information about ESD, see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage
in the hardware guide for your router.
b. Unfasten the thumbscrew that secures the access door in front of the storage drive
slots, and open the door.
c. Slide the lock on the ejector to the unlocked position.
d. Carefully slide the drive out of the slot.
3. Reinstall a storage drive.
a. Carefully align the sides of the drive with the guides in the slot.
b. Slide the drive into the slot until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is
correctly aligned.
c. Close the access door and tighten the thumbscrew to secure the door.
Related • Returning a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc. on page 474

Documentation
Replacing an SSD Drive on an RE-S-X6-64G
Each RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine supports two solid-state drives (SSD) specified by
Juniper Networks. The RE-S-X6-64G ships with two SSDs installed in the slot labeled
DISK1 and DISK2. Figure 126 on page 307 shows the arrangement of storage drive slots on
a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine.
Replacing an SSD drive in a RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine consists of the following two
stages:
1. Replacing the SSD Drive in the Routing Engine.
2. Copying vmhost and Junos OS to the replaced SSD.

Figure 126: RE-S-X6-64G Storage Drive Slots
The following drive has been verified to work in the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine:
• 64GB slim SATA SSD
Replacing the SSDs:
1. To replace an SSD in the slot labeled Disk2:
a. Make sure that there is no VMHost %d Boot from alternate disk alarm in the output:
user@host>show chassis alarm
To replace an SSD in the slot labeled Disk1:
a. Make sure that the router is booted up and running from an image from disk1.
Back up the currently running vmhost and Junos OS on disk1 to ensure that both
disk1 and disk2 have the same version of vmhost and Junos OS:
user@host> request vmhost snapshot [partition]
NOTE: Partitioning the target media is optional.
b. Reboot the router from disk2:
user@host> request vmhost reboot disk2
c. Check for the presence of the VMHost %d Boot from alternate disk alarm in the
output:
user@host>show chassis alarm
2. Offline the Routing Engine by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.

3. Remove the SSD.
a. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to an ESD
point on the appliance.
For more information about ESD, see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage
in the hardware guide for your router.
b. Unfasten the thumbscrew that secures the access door in front of the storage drive
slots, and open the door.
c. Slide the lock on the ejector to the unlocked position.
d. Carefully slide the drive out of the slot.
Figure 127: Removing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G
4. Reinstall an SSD:
a. Carefully align the sides of the drive with the guides in the slot.
b. Slide the drive into the slot until you feel resistance, carefully ensuring that it is
correctly aligned.
c. Close the access door and tighten the thumbscrew to secure the door.

1. Copy Junos OS to the newly replaced SSD:
If both the SSDs are replaced together:
a. Install using an USB disk:
1. Insert the USB disk in the USB slot on the Routing Engine.
2. After the Routing Engine boots from the USB, press y when you are prompted
to confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk
[y/N? on the console.
3. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot

now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
NOTE: To prepare a bootable USB disk, see
b. Install vmhost using the PXEBoot method:
1. Set up the PXEBoot server. See Copying VM Host Installation Package to the
PXE Boot Server.
2. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button
3. During the boot, when you see the message Press Esc for boot options press Esc
key to enter into the BIOS menu boot options.
After the Esc key is pressed, Esc is pressed. Go to boot options. is displayed on
the screen.
4. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate to Boot Manager and press the Enter
key.
5. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate through the EFI boot devices listed and
select EFI Network 0 for IPv4 to boot from the PXEboot server and press the
Enter key.
6. Booting `net boot console is displayed and PXEBoot continues.
NOTE: The booting process may take several minutes.
7. After the Routing Engine boots, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install
vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N? on the console.
8. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot

now? [y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
If only disk2 is replaced:
a. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.
b. The router boots from disk1. To be able to boot from disk2:
user@host> request vmhost snapshot partition

If only disk1 is replaced:
b. The router boots from disk2 . To be able to boot from disk1:
Figure 128: Installing an SSD in the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G
1— Carrier 2— SSD card
Copying vmhost and Junos OS from an USB disk when both the SSDs are replaced
together:
NOTE: To prepare a bootable USB disk, see Creating an Emergency Boot Device
for RE-MX-X6, RE-MX-X8 and RE-PTX-X8 Routing Engines.
1. Insert the USB disk in the USB slot on the Routing Engine.
2. After the Routing Engine boots from the USB, press y when you are prompted to
confirm Install vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N]? on
the console.
3. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now?
[y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
Copying vmhost and Junos OS to the SSDs from the PXEBoot server:
1. Set up the PXEBoot server. See Copying VM Host Installation Package to the PXE Boot
Server.
2. Bring the Routing Engine online by pressing the ONLINE/OFFLINE button.
3. During the boot, when you see the message Press Esc for boot options press Esc key
to enter into the BIOS menu boot options.

After the Esc key is pressed, Esc is pressed. Go to boot options. is displayed on the
screen.
4. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate to Boot Manager and press the Enter key.
5. Using Up or Down arrow keys, navigate through the EFI boot devices listed and select
EFI Network 0 for IPv4 to boot from the PXEboot server and press the Enter key.
6. Booting `net boot console is displayed and PXEBoot continues.
NOTE: The booting process may take several minutes.
7. After the Routing Engine boots, press y when you are prompted to confirm Install
vmhost and Junos software on Primary and Secondary disk [y/N]? on the console.
8. After the installation is completed, press y when prompted to confirm Reboot now?
[y/N]? to reboot from the SSD disk.
Copying vmhost and Junos OS when only one disk is replaced:
b. The router boots from disk1 if disk2 is replaced. To be able to boot from disk2:
The router boots from disk2 if disk1 is replaced. To be able to boot from disk1:
user@host> request vmhost snapshot recovery partition

Documentation
• Upgrading the SSD Firmware on RE-S-X6-64G and RE-MX2K-X8-64G Routing Engines
Replacing Connections to MX480 Routing Engine Interface Ports


Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on an MX Series Router

One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors is provided with the router. To replace the
cable connected to the ETHERNET port:
Figure 116 on page 292 shows the connector.
3. Disconnect the cable from the network device.
4. Plug one end of the replacement cable into the ETHERNET port. Figure 117 on page 292
shows the port.
Figure 129: Cable Connector
Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on an MX480 Router

CONSOLE port on the Routing Engine. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device,
connect it to the AUX port on the Routing Engine. Both ports accept a cable with an RJ-45
connector. One RJ-45/DB-9 cable is provided with the router. If you want to connect a
device to both ports, you must supply another cable.

To replace a cable connected to a management console or auxiliary device:
3. Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.
4. Plug the RJ-45 end of the replacement serial cable into the CONSOLE or AUX port.
Figure 118 on page 293 shows the external device ports on the Routing Engine.
5. Plug the female DB-9 end into the console or auxiliary device's serial port.
See Also • Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications for MX Series Routers on
page 134
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem
A redundant host subsystem consists of a master Routing Engine (RE0) and a backup
Routing Engine (RE1). To upgrade the host subsystem to use the RE-S-X6-64G Routing
Engine, you must first uninstall the backup Routing Engine and install the RE-S-X6-64G
Routing Engine, which then becomes the backup Routing Engine. You then switch over
this backup Routing Engine to make it the master Routing Engine. Replace the other
Routing Engine and configure it as the backup Routing Engine.

Ensure that the Switch Control Board in the chassis is SCBE2 because the RE-S-X6-64G
Routing Engine is not compatible with the Switch Control Boards SCB or SCBE. To upgrade
the Switch Control Board to SCBE2, see Replacing an MX240 SCB or “Replacing an MX480
SCB” on page 381 or Replacing an MX960 SCB, depending on the chassis on which the
Routing Engine is being upgraded.
NOTE: Save the router configuration before proceeding with the Routing
Engine upgrade.
NOTE: Nonstop active routing (NSR) and graceful Routing Engine switchover
(GRES) are not supported during the upgrade and they must be temporarily
disabled. Disable NSR by removing the nonstop-routing statement from the
[edit routing-options] hierarchy level and by removing the graceful-switchover
statement from the [edit chassis redundancy] hierarchy level .
1. Removing the Routing Engine on page 314

2. Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G on page 316
3. Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Master on page 319
4. Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Backup on page 319
Removing the Routing Engine

To remove the backup Routing Engine from the chassis (see Figure 132 on page 315,
Figure 133 on page 315, and Figure 134 on page 316):
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, shut down the
host subsystem by using the request system power-off command.
has halted.
3. Remove the cables connected to the Routing Engine.
4. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. Attach an

electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap
to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
5. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off. Loosen the captive screws on the top and
bottom of the Routing Engine.

chassis.
out of the chassis. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an SCB
installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods of time.
If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine should be
installed as soon as possible.
Figure 132: Removing a Routing Engine from an MX240 Router

g004231

0
MASTER
1 YELL
OW ALAR
M
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
OK/FAIL 1 0 1
0
HDD
ONLIN E
MASTE R
OFFLIN E
ONLINE /
RESET
USB
AUX
CONSOL E
ETHERNE T
g004050
Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G

To install the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G:
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it and carefully align the
sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the Switch Control
Board SCBE2.
NOTE: The Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G is supported only on the SCBE2.

RE-S-X6-64G is not compatible with the SCB or the SCBE.
4. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2 until you feel resistance, and then press the

5. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. Tighten the
captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
6. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine. After the Routing
Engine is installed, the ONLINE LED starts blinking green slowly.
7. Replace the former master Routing Engine, RE0, with the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G.

The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot. After the Routing Engine boots,
verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL, RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft
interface. If the router is operational and the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the
green ONLINE LED on the Routing Engine lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED on the Routing
Engine lights steadily instead, remove and install the Routing Engine again. If the red FAIL
LED still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your
customer support representative.
Figure 135: Installing a Routing Engine in an MX240 Router

0
MASTER
1 YELL
OW ALAR
M
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0
OK/FAIL
HDD
ONLIN E
MASTE R
OFFLIN E
ONLINE /
RESET
USB
AUX
CONSOL E
ETHERNE T
g004051

Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Master

After replacing the backup Routing Engine with the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, perform
the following steps:
1. Verify that the SCBE2 and RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine are online by issuing the
show chassis hardware command.
2. After you install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine into the SCBE2, the Routing Engine
gets automatically powered on and comes up in amnesiac mode as it is loaded with
factory defaults. After the Routing Engine comes up in amnesiac mode, load the base
configuration and commit.
3. Configure the backup Routing Engine by using the commit synchronize command to
copy the configuration to the backup Routing Engine.
4. Use the request chassis routing-engine master switch command to make the Routing
Engine RE-S-X6-64G (RE1) the master Routing Engine. All FPCs reboot after this step.
Verifying and Configuring the Upgraded Routing Engine as the Backup

1. Use the request chassis routing-engine master switch command to make newly installed
RE-S-X6-64G (RE0) the backup Routing Engine.
2. Use the commit synchronize command to copy the active configuration from the
master Routing Engine to the backup Routing Engine.
Related • RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description on page 32

Documentation
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem
on page 319
Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Nonredundant Host Subsystem
In a nonredundant host subsystem, only one Routing Engine and one Switch Control
Board are present in the chassis. When you are upgrading the Routing Engine, taking the
host subsystem offline shuts down the router. To upgrade the host subsystem with the
RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine, you must uninstall the existing Routing Engine and install
the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine. Ensure that the Switch Control Board in the chassis
is SCBE2 because the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine is not compatible with the Switch
Control Boards SCB or SCBE. To upgrade the Switch Control Board to SCBE2, see
Replacing an MX240 SCB or “Replacing an MX480 SCB” on page 381 or Replacing an
MX960 SCB, depending on the chassis on which the Routing Engine is being upgraded.

NOTE: Save the router configuration before proceeding with the Routing
Engine upgrade.
1. Removing the Routing Engine on page 320

2. Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G on page 321
Removing the Routing Engine

To remove the Routing Engine from the chassis:
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, shut down the
host subsystem by using the request system power-off command.
has halted.
4. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface. Attach an ESD
grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
5. Verify that the Routing Engine LEDs are off. Loosen the captive screws on the top and
bottom of the Routing Engine.
chassis.
out of the chassis. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
NOTE: To maintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave an SCB
installed in the chassis without a Routing Engine for extended periods of time.
If a Routing Engine is removed, a replacement Routing Engine should be
installed as soon as possible.

Installing the Routing Engine RE-S-X6-64G

To install the new Routing Engine (RE-S-X6-64G):
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it and carefully align the
sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on the SCBE2.

4. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2 until you feel resistance, and then press the
5. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine. Tighten the
captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
6. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine. After the Routing
Engine is installed, the ONLINE LED starts blinking green slowly.
7. Verify that the SCBE2 and RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine are online by issuing the
show chassis hardware command.
8. After you install the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine into the SCBE2, the Routing Engine
gets automatically powered on and comes up in amnesiac mode as it is loaded with
factory defaults. After the Routing Engine comes up in amnesiac mode, load the base
configuration and commit.
The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot. After the Routing Engine boots,
verify that it is installed correctly by checking the FAIL, RE0, and RE1 LEDs on the craft
interface. If the router is operational and the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the
green ONLINE LED on the Routing Engine lights steadily. If the red FAIL LED lights steadily
instead, remove the Routing Engine and reinstall it. If the red FAIL LED on the Routing
Engine still lights steadily, the Routing Engine is not functioning properly. Contact your
customer support representative.
Related • RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Description on page 32

Documentation
• Upgrading to the RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine in a Redundant Host Subsystem on
page 313


CHAPTER 25
Replacing Line Card Components

• Replacing an MX480 AS MLC on page 355
Replacing an MX480 DPC
1. Removing an MX480 DPC on page 323

2. Installing an MX480 DPC on page 325
Removing an MX480 DPC

1. Have ready a replacement DPC or DPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the DPC.
Also have ready rubber safety caps for each DPC you are removing that uses an optical
interface.
3. Label the cables connected to each port on the DPC so that you can later reconnect
the cables to the correct ports.
4. Use one of the following methods to take the DPC offline:

• Press and hold the corresponding DPC online button on the craft interface. The
green OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED
goes off.
user@host>request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline
5. Disconnect the cables from the DPC.



6. Immediately cover each optical transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable with
a rubber safety cap.
7. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable management brackets to prevent the
cables from developing stress points.
8. Simultaneously turn both of the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the DPC.


Chapter 25: Replacing Line Card Components
Do not stack DPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one
stable surface.
11. If you are not reinstalling a DPC into the emptied DPC slot within a short time, install
a blank DPC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the DPC card cage.
CAUTION: After removing a DPC from the chassis, wait at least 30 seconds
before reinserting it, removing a DPC from a different slot, or inserting a
DPC into a different slot.
See Also • Installing an MX480 DPC on page 256
Installing an MX480 DPC

To install a DPC (see Figure 95 on page 258):

4. Verify that each fiber-optic transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it does
not, cover the transceiver with a safety cap.
5. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces youvertically.
the card cage.
is fully seated.
9. Remove the rubber safety cap from each fiber-optic transceiver and cable.

10. Insert the cables into the cable connector ports on each DPC (see
11. Arrange the cable in the standard or extended cable manager to prevent it from
dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its
own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled
loop. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.

12. Use one of the following methods to bring the DPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding DPC online button on the craft interface until the

CAUTION: After the OK LED turns green, wait at least 30 seconds before
removing the DPC again, removing a DPC from a different slot, or inserting
a DPC in a different slot.
You can also verify that the DPC is functioning correctly by issuing the show chassis fpc
and show chassis fpc pic-status commands.
Figure 139: Installing a DPC
0
MASTER
1 YELL
OW ALAR
M
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
OK/FAIL 1 0
1 0
0/0 0/5 2/0 2/5
1 0 1 0 0
1
1/0 1/5
3/0 3/5
g004053

See Also • Removing an MX480 DPC on page 323

Documentation
• MX480 Dense Port Concentrator (DPC) LEDs on page 60
• Troubleshooting the MX480 DPCs on page 442
Replacing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
1. Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 329

2. Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 330

Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC

Removing and installing cables on a DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC does not affect router function.
To remove a cable:
1. Have ready a rubber safety cap for each fiber-optic cable and transceiver.
2. If removing all cables connected to the component, use one of the following methods
to take the component offline:
• To take a DPC or an MPC offline:
• Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface. The green
OK LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED
goes off.
• To take a PIC offline:
• Press the online/offline button on the PIC. For a PIC installed in an FPC3, use a
narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and
hold the button until the PIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds).
user@host> request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot offline
• To take a MIC offline:
• Press the online/offline button on the MIC. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits
inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the
MIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds).
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot pic-slot mic-slot offline
3. Disconnect the cable from the cable connector port. If the component uses fiber-optic
cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber
safety cap.



4. Remove the cable from the cable management brackets.
5. Disconnect the cable from the destination port.
• Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 259
Installing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC

To install a cable:
1. Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC. For cable
2. If the cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove the plug.


3. Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the component faceplate.


5. Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port.
6. Repeat the previous steps for any additional cables.
7. If the component is offline (its failure indicator LED is lit), use one of the following
methods to bring the it online:
• To bring a DPC or an MPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface until the
• To bring a PIC online:
in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that
leads to the button.
user@host>request chassis pic fpc-slot fpc-slot pic-slot pic-slot online
• To bring a MIC online:
• Press the MIC offline/online button until the MIC LED lights green.
user@host>request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot pic-slot mic-slot online
The normal functioning indicator LED confirms that the component is online. You can
also verify correct DPC or MPC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc command
or correct MIC or the PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status
command.

• Removing a Cable on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 329

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 FPC
1. Removing an MX480 FPC on page 332

2. Installing an MX480 FPC on page 335
Removing an MX480 FPC

When you remove an FPC, the router continues to function, although the PIC interfaces
installed on the FPC being removed no longer function.
horizontally in the front of the MX480 router. The FPCs are hot-insertable and
hot-removable. An empty FPC3 weighs 14 lb (6.5 kg). A fully configured FPC can weigh
up to 18 lb (8.2 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight.
1. Have ready a replacement FPC or FPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the FPC.
Also have ready rubber safety caps for each PIC using an optical interface on the FPC
that you are removing.
3. Label the cables connected to each PIC on the FPC so that you can later reconnect
the cables to the correct PICs.
4. Use one of the following methods to take the FPC offline:
• Press and hold the FPC online/offline button. The green OK LED next to the button
begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes off. The LEDs and
online/offline button for each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.

NOTE: The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered slot for
which the FPC is installed.
5. Disconnect the cables from the PICs installed in the FPC.
6. Immediately cover each fiber-optic transceiver and the end of each fiber-optic cable
with a rubber safety cap.


10. Place one hand around the front of the FPC (the PIC housing) and the other hand
under it to support it. Slide the FPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the
antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.


Do not stack FPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one
stable surface.
11. If necessary, remove each installed PIC from the FPC.
12. After you remove each PIC, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an
electrostatic bag.
13. If you are not reinstalling an FPC into the emptied DPC slots within a short time, install
a blank DPC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.
CAUTION: After removing an FPC from the chassis, wait at least 30

seconds before reinserting it or inserting an FPC into a different slot.
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
M
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
REDALAR
M
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004408
• Removing an MX480 PIC on page 351.
• Installing an MX480 FPC on page 261

Installing an MX480 FPC

horizontally in the front of the router. The FPCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable.
An empty FPC3 weighs 14 lb (6.5 kg). A fully configured FPC can weigh up to 18 lb (8.2 kg).
Be prepared to accept its full weight.
To install an FPC (see Figure 97 on page 263):
2. Place the FPC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take each PIC to be installed in the replacement FPC out of its electrostatic bag, and
identify the slot on the FPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic PIC has a rubber safety cap covering the PIC transceiver.
5. Install each PIC into the appropriate slot on the FPC.
6. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the FPC.
the card cage.
CAUTION: When the FPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector
is fully seated.
11. If any of the PICs on the FPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety


12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each PIC on the FPC.

14. Use one of the following methods to bring the FPC online:
• Press and hold the FPC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the
each FPC are located directly above it on the craft interface.
removing the FPC again, removing an FPC from a different slot, or inserting
an FPC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct FPC and PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and
show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in “Maintaining MX480 FPCs” on page 425
and “Maintaining MX480 PICs” on page 433.

Figure 142: Installing an FPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
g004405
• Removing an MX480 FPC on page 332

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 MIC
1. Removing an MX480 MIC on page 338

2. Installing an MX480 MIC on page 340
3. Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC on page 342

Removing an MX480 MIC

MICs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove a MIC, the router continues
to function, although the MIC interfaces being removed no longer function.
The MICs are located in the MPCs installed in the front of the router. A MIC weighs less
than 2 lb (0.9 kg).
To remove a MIC (see Figure 143 on page 339 and Figure 144 on page 339):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the
MIC. If the MIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for each
transceiver and cable.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the MIC offline:
• Press its online/offline button. Use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening
that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the MIC OK/FAIL LED goes
off (about 5 seconds).
user@host> request chassis mic fpc-slot mpc-slot mic-slot mic-slot offline
4. Label the cables connected to the MIC so that you can later reconnect each cable to
the correct MIC.
5. Disconnect the cables from the MIC. If the MIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately
cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.


6. Arrange the cable to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure
the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor. Place
excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop.


7. On the MPC, pull the ejector lever that is adjacent to the MIC you are removing away
from the MPC faceplate. Pulling the ejector lever disconnects the MIC from the MPC.
NOTE: To remove a dual-wide MIC that takes up both MIC slots, you must
pull both ejector levers away from the MPC faceplate.
8. Grasp the handles on the MIC faceplate, and slide the MIC out of the MPC card carrier.
Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
9. If you are not reinstalling a MIC into the emptied MIC slot within a short time, install
a blank MIC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the MPC card cage.
Figure 143: Removing a MIC
g004925
Figure 144: Removing a Dual-Wide MIC
Ejectors
g005051
MIC handles
See Also • MX480 Modular Interface Card (MIC) Description on page 76
• Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC on page 266

Installing an MX480 MIC

To install a MIC (see Figure 99 on page 266):
2. If you have used a dual-wide MIC and are now replacing it with two “single” MICs,
install the septum (see Figure 98 on page 264):
a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (If necessary, remove the MPC from the router as
b. Position the septum in the center of the MPC so that it lines up with holes labeled
S on the top of the MPC.
c. Insert a screw into each of the two holes labeled S, and then tighten completely.
d. On the bottom of the MPC, insert a screw into each of the four holes labeled S, and
then tighten completely.
e. Install the MPC as described in “Installing an MX480 MPC” on page 269.
Figure 145: Installing the Septum
Slide septum Install four screws

into MPC. on bottom.
Install two
screws.
g005041
4. On the MPC, pull the ejector lever that is adjacent to the MIC you are installing away
from the MPC faceplate.

6. Slide the MIC into the MPC until it is firmly seated in the MPC.
7. Verify that the ejector lever is engaged by pushing it toward the MPC faceplate.




Figure 146: Installing a MIC
g004923
Installing an MX480 Dual-Wide MIC

To install a dual-wide MIC (see Figure 101 on page 268):
2. Remove the septum, if necessary (see Figure 100 on page 267):
a. Place the MPC on a flat surface (if necessary, remove the MPC from the router as
b. Remove the four screws labeled S on the bottom of the MPC.
c. Remove the two screws labeled S on the top of the MPC.
d. Slide the septum towards you and out of the MPC.
e. Store the septum and screws for later use.
f. Install the MPC as described in “Installing an MX480 MPC” on page 269.

Figure 147: Removing the Septum
Remove four screws Remove two

on bottom. screws on top.
Slide septum
forward.
g005040
MPC
4. Pull the ejector lever above both MIC slots away from the router.
6. Slide the MIC into the MIC slot until it is firmly seated in the chassis.
7. Verify that the ejector levers are engaged by pushing them toward the router.




Figure 148: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC

MPC
Dual-wide MIC
g005050


Documentation
Replacing an MX480 MPC
1. Removing an MX480 MPC on page 345

2. Installing an MX480 MPC on page 348
Removing an MX480 MPC

When you remove an MPC, the router continues to function, although the MIC interfaces
installed on the MPC being removed no longer function.
To remove an MPC (see Figure 149 on page 347):
1. Have ready a replacement MPC or DPC blank panel and an antistatic mat for the MPC.
Also have ready rubber safety caps for each MIC using an optical interface on the MPC
that you are removing.
3. Label the cables connected to each MIC on the MPC so that you can later reconnect
the cables to the correct MICs.
4. Use one of the following methods to take the MPC offline:
• Press and hold the corresponding online button on the craft interface. The green
OK/FAIL LED next to the button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED
goes off.
5. Disconnect the cables from the MICs installed in the MPC.



inserting or removing cable. The safety cap keeps the port clean and
prevents accidental exposure to laser light.

6. If a MIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately cover each transceiver and the end of
each cable with a rubber safety cap.
7. Arrange the disconnected cables in the cable management brackets to prevent the
cables from developing stress points.
8. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the MPC.
9. Grasp the handles, and slide the MPC straight out of the card cage halfway.
10. Place one hand around the front of the MPC (the MIC housing) and the other hand
under it to support it. Slide the MPC completely out of the chassis, and place it on the
antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the MPC is concentrated in the back end. Be

prepared to accept the full weight—up to 18.35 lb (8.3 kg)—as you slide
the MPC out of the chassis.
When the MPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles,
Do not stack MPCs on top of one another after removal. Place each one
stable surface.
11. If necessary, remove each installed MIC from the MPC.

12. After you remove each MIC, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in an
electrostatic bag.
13. If you are not reinstalling an MPC into the emptied line card slots within a short time,
install a blank DPC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.
CAUTION: After removing an MPC from the chassis, wait at least 30

seconds before reinserting it or inserting an MPC into a different slot.
Figure 149: Removing an MPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g004916
• Installing an MX480 MPC on page 269

Installing an MX480 MPC

To install an MPC (see Figure 102 on page 271):
2. Place the MPC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take each MIC to be installed in the replacement MPC out of its electrostatic bag,
and identify the slot on the MPC where it will be connected.
4. Verify that each fiber-optic MIC has a rubber safety cap covering the MIC transceiver.
5. Install each MIC into the appropriate slot on the MPC.
6. Locate the slot in the card cage in which you plan to install the MPC.
7. Orient the MPC so that the faceplate faces you.
8. Lift the MPC into place, and carefully align the sides of the MPC with the guides inside
the card cage.
CAUTION: When the MPC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector
9. Slide the MPC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
10. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the MPC
is fully seated.
11. If any of the MICs on the MPC connect to fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety


12. Insert the appropriate cable into the cable connector ports on each MIC on the MPC.
Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess cable
out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable management system. Placing
fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.

13. Use one of the following methods to bring the MPC online:
• Press and hold the corresponding MPC online button on the craft interface until the
green OK/FAIL LED next to the button lights steadily, in about 5 seconds.
CAUTION: After the OK/FAIL LED lights steadily, wait at least 30 seconds
before removing the MPC again, removing an MPC from a different slot,
or inserting an MPC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct MPC and MIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc and
show chassis fpc pic-status commands described in“Maintaining MX480 MPCs” on
page 431 and “Maintaining MX480 MICs” on page 430.

Figure 150: Installing an MPC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g004912
• Removing an MX480 MPC on page 345

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 PIC
1. Removing an MX480 PIC on page 351

2. Installing an MX480 PIC on page 353

Removing an MX480 PIC

PICs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove a PIC, the router continues
to function, although the PIC interfaces being removed no longer function.
The PICs are located in the FPCs installed in the front of the router. A PIC weighs less
than 2 lb (0.9 kg).
To remove a PIC (see Figure 151 on page 352):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the
PIC. If the PIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for each
transceiver and cable.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the PIC offline:
• Press its online/offline button. For a PIC installed in FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool
that fits inside the opening that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until
the PIC LED goes off (about 5 seconds).
4. Label the cables connected to the PIC so that you can later reconnect each cable to
the correct PIC.
5. Disconnect the cables from the PIC. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, immediately
cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.




7. For an FPC3 PIC, loosen the captive screw at the bottom of the PIC faceplate, then
twist the ejector handle at the top of the faceplate counterclockwise to unseat the
PIC.
8. Slide the PIC out of the FPC card carrier and place it in the electrostatic bag or on the
antistatic mat.
9. If you are not reinstalling a PIC into the emptied PIC slot within a short time, install a
blank PIC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the FPC card cage.
Figure 151: Removing a PIC
g004412

Installing an MX480 PIC

To install a PIC (see Figure 103 on page 273):
2. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, verify that a rubber safety cap is over each transceiver
3. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIC with the notches in the PIC
slot in the FPC and then slide the PIC in until it lodges firmly in the FPC.
CAUTION: Slide the PIC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the PIC.
4. For an FPC3 PIC, turn the ejector handle at the top of the PIC faceplate clockwise,
then tighten the captive screw at the bottom of the faceplate to secure the PIC in the
FPC.
5. If the PIC uses fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from each transceiver


6. Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIC.


8. Use one of the following methods to bring the PIC online:
in an FPC2 or FPC3, use a narrow-ended tool that fits inside the opening that leads
to the button.
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the PIC is online. You can also verify
correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command described
in “Maintaining MX480 PICs” on page 433.

Figure 152: Installing a PIC
g004411
• Removing an MX480 PIC on page 351

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 AS MLC
1. Removing an MX480 AS MLC on page 356

2. Installing an MX480 AS MLC on page 358

Removing an MX480 AS MLC

When you remove an Application Services Modular Line Card (AS MLC), the router
continues to function, although the modular cards (AS MXC and AS MSC) installed on
the AS MLC being removed no longer function.
Up to five AS MLCs can be installed horizontally in the front of the MX480 router. The
AS MLCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. An empty AS MLC weighs 10.5 lb
(4.76 kg). A fully configured AS MLC can weigh up to 15.27 lb (6.93 kg). Be prepared to
To remove an AS MLC (see Figure 153 on page 357):
1. Have ready a replacement AS MLC or an AS MLC blank panel and an antistatic mat
for the AS MLC.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MLC offline:
• Press and hold the AS MLC online/offline button. The green OK LED next to the
button begins to blink. Hold the button down until the LED goes out. The
online/offline button for each AS MLC is located directly above it on the craft
interface.
NOTE: The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered slot for
which the AS MLC is installed.
4. Simultaneously turn both the ejector handles counterclockwise to unseat the AS MLC.
5. Grasp the handles, and slide the AS MLC straight out of the card cage halfway.
6. Place one hand around the front of the AS MLC (the modular card housing) and the
other hand under it to support it. Slide the AS MLC completely out of the chassis, and
place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: The weight of the AS MLC is concentrated in the back end. Be

prepared to accept the full weight—up to 15.27 lb (6.93 kg)—as you slide
the AS MLC out of the chassis.

When the AS MLC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the ejector handles,
Do not stack AS MLCs on top of one another after removal. Place each
one individually in an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a
flat, stable surface.
7. If necessary, remove each installed AS MSC and AS MXC from the AS MLC.
8. After you remove each modular card, immediately place it on an antistatic mat or in
an electrostatic bag.
9. If you are not reinstalling an AS MLC into the emptied slots within a short time, install
a blank AS MLC panel over each slot to maintain proper airflow in the card cage.
CAUTION: After removing an AS MLC from the chassis, wait at least 30

seconds before reinserting it or inserting an AS MLC into a different slot.
Figure 153: Removing an AS MLC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g007335
• Installing an MX480 AS MLC on page 274

Installing an MX480 AS MLC

You can install up to five Application Services Modular Line Cards (AS MLCs) horizontally
in the front of the MX480 router. The AS MLCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable.
An empty AS MLC weighs 10.5 lb (4.76 kg). A fully configured AS MLC can weigh up to
15.27 lb (6.93 kg). Be prepared to accept its full weight.
To install an AS MLC (see Figure 104 on page 275):
2. Place the AS MLC on an antistatic mat.
3. Take the AS MSC and AS MXC (the modular cards) to be installed in the AS MLC out
of its electrostatic bag. The AS MSC must be inserted in the left slot and the AS MXC
in the right slot.
4. Install the AS MSC and AS MXC into the appropriate slot on the AS MLC.
5. Locate the slots in the card cage in which you plan to install the AS MLC.
6. Orient the AS MLC so that the faceplate faces you.
7. Lift the AS MLC into place, and carefully align the sides of the AS MLC with the guides
inside the card cage.
CAUTION: When the AS MLC is out of the chassis, do not hold it by the
ejector handles, bus bars, or edge connectors. They cannot support its
weight.
8. Slide the AS MLC all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
9. Grasp both ejector handles, and rotate them clockwise simultaneously until the AS
MLC is fully seated.
10. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MLC online:
• Press and hold the AS MLC online/offline button until the green OK LED next to the
each AS MLC are located above it on the craft interface.

removing the AS MLC again, removing an AS MLC from a different slot, or
inserting an AS MLC in a different slot.
You can also verify correct AS MLC and AS MSC or AS MXC functioning by issuing the
show chassis fpc and show chassis fpc pic-status.
Figure 154: Installing an AS MLC
ESD
MASTER
ONLINE
OFFLINE
REO
RE1
OK FAN
FAIL OK PEM 0 1
0 FAIL OK ACO/LT
RED ALARM
1 FAIL OK
0 FAIL OK
1 FAIL OK NC C NO
2 FAIL OK NC C NO
3 FAIL
4
5
MX480
SCB
SCB
g007336
• Removing an MX480 AS MLC on page 356

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 AS MSC
1. Removing an MX480 AS MSC on page 360

2. Installing an MX480 AS MSC on page 361

Removing an MX480 AS MSC

AS MSCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove an AS MSC, the router
continues to function.
The AS MSCs are located in the AS MLCs installed in the front of the router. An AS MSC
weighs 1.4 lb (0.6 kg).
To remove an AS MSC (see Figure 155 on page 361):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the AS
MSC.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MSC offline:
that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the AS MSC LED goes out
(about 5 seconds).
4. Slide the AS MSC out of the AS MLC card carrier by pulling the handles, and place it
in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
5. If you are not reinstalling an AS MSC into the emptied AS MSC slot within a short time,
install a blank AS MSC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the AS MLC
card cage.

Figure 155: Removing an AS MSC
g006675
Installing an MX480 AS MSC

To install an AS MSC (see Figure 105 on page 276):
2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MSC with the notches in the
AS MSC slot (slot 0—the top slot in the AS MLC ), and then slide the AS MSC in until
it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.
CAUTION: Slide the AS MSC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the AS MSC.
3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MSC online:

• Press the AS MSC offline/online button until the LED light turns green.
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MSC is online. You can also
verify correct AS MSC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status.
Figure 156: Installing an AS MSC
g006674

Documentation
• MX480 Application Services Modular Storage Card Description on page 96

Replacing an MX480 AS MXC
1. Removing an MX480 AS MXC on page 363

2. Installing an MX480 AS MXC on page 364
Removing an MX480 AS MXC

AS MXCs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you remove an AS MXC, the router
continues to function.
The AS MXCs are located in the AS MLCs installed in the front of the router. An AS MXC
weighs 1.4 lb (0.6 kg).
To remove an AS MXC (see Figure 157 on page 364):
1. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the AS
MXC.
3. Use one of the following methods to take the AS MXC offline:
that leads to the button. Press and hold the button until the AS MXC LED goes out
(about 5 seconds).
5. Slide the AS MXC out of the AS MLC card carrier by pulling the handles, and place it
in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
6. If you are not reinstalling an AS MXC into the emptied AS MXC slot within a short time,
install a blank AS MXC panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the AS MLC
card cage.

Figure 157: Removing an AS MXC
g006677
See Also • MX480 Application Services Modular Processing Card Description on page 97
Installing an MX480 AS MXC

To install an AS MXC (see Figure 106 on page 278):
2. Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the AS MXC with the notches in the
AS MXC slot (slot 1—the bottom slot in the AS MLC), and then slide the AS MXC in
until it lodges firmly in the AS MLC.
CAUTION: Slide the AS MXC straight into the slot to avoid damaging the
components on the bottom of the AS MXC.

3. Use one of the following methods to bring the AS MXC online:
• Press the AS MXC offline/online button until the LED light turns green.
The normal functioning status LED confirms that the AS MXC is online. You can also
verify correct AS MXC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status command.
Figure 158: Installing an AS MXC
g006676

Documentation


CHAPTER 26
Replacing Power System Components

• Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376
• Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 377
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply
1. Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 367

2. Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 369
Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply

Before you remove a power supply, be aware of the following:
NOTE: The minimum number of power supplies must be present in the router
at all times.
CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling and prevent thermal shutdown of the

operating power supply unit, each power supply slot must contain either a
power supply or a blank panel. If you remove a power supply, you must install
a replacement power supply or a blank panel shortly after the removal.
turning it back on.

To remove an AC power supply (see Figure 159 on page 368):
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply, and
remove the power cord from the AC power source. Follow the instructions for your
site.
(O) position.
4. Remove the power cord from the power supply.
5. Unscrew the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply.
Figure 159: Removing an AC Power Supply
• Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 278

Chapter 26: Replacing Power System Components
Installing an MX480 AC Power Supply

To install an AC power supply (see Figure 107 on page 279):
(O) position.
4. Tighten both captive screws at the bottom of the power supply.
5. Attach the power cord to the power supply.
for your site.
8. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the on (
| ) position and observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power
supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light
steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.

Figure 160: Installing an AC Power Supply in an MX480 Router
• Removing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 367

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply
1. Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 370

2. Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 372
Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply

Before you remove a power supply, be aware of the following:
NOTE: The minimum number of power supplies must be present in the router
at all times.


CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling and prevent thermal shutdown of the

operating power supply unit, each power supply slot must contain either a
power supply or a blank panel. If you remove a power supply, you must install
a replacement power supply or a blank panel shortly after the removal.
turning it back on.
To remove a DC power supply (see Figure 161 on page 372):
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply being
removed. Follow your site's procedures for ESD.
2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.
4. Move the DC circuit breaker on the DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.
6. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm]
nut driver or socket wrench.)
7. Remove the cable lugs from the terminal studs.
9. Carefully move the power cables out of the way.

Figure 161: Removing a DC Power Supply from the Router
• Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 280
Installing an MX480 DC Power Supply

To install a DC power supply (see Figure 108 on page 282):
1. Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there
is no chance that the cable leads might become active during installation.
5. Tighten the captive screws on the lower edge of the power supply faceplate.

7. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs.
with the split washer, and then with the nut (see Figure 109 on page 283). Apply between
23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the
nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)
a. Secure the positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure the negative (–) DC source power cable lug to the –48V (input) terminal.

NOTE: The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1 must be powered by

dedicated power feeds derived from feed A, and the DC power supplies
in PEM2 and PEM3 must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived
from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed
redundancy for the system.
NOTE: For information about connecting to DC power sources, see “DC

Power Supply Electrical Specifications for the MX480 Router” on page 157.

chassis. If needed to hold the power cables in place, thread plastic cable ties, which
you must provide, through the openings on the cable restraint.
11. Verify that the power cabling is correct, that the cables are not touching or blocking
access to router components, and that they do not drape where people could trip on
them.
12. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Follow your site's procedures
for safety and ESD.
Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply is lit green.
green steadily.
NOTE: If more than one power supply is being installed, turn on all power
supplies at the same time.

Figure 162: Installing a DC Power Supply in the Router
• Removing an MX480 DC Power Supply on page 370


Documentation
Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord
1. Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376

2. Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376
Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord

To disconnect the AC power cord:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply, and
remove the power cord from the AC power source. Follow the instructions for your
site.
3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O)
position.
4. Remove the power cord from the power supply.
• Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 226
Connecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord

To connect the AC power cord:
1. Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your
geographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications for the MX480 Router” on
page 153).

for your site.
6. Switch the AC input switch on the each power supply to the on (—) position and
observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly
• Disconnecting an MX480 AC Power Supply Cord on page 376

Documentation
Replacing an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable
1. Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 377

2. Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 378
Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable

To disconnect a power cable for a DC power supply:
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply being
removed. Follow your site's procedures for ESD.
2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.

3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED on the power supply is not lit.
4. Remove the power cable from the external DC power source.
6. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O)position.
8. Remove the nut and washer from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in.
[11 mm] nut driver or socket wrench.)
9. Remove the cable lug from the terminal studs.
10. Remove the power cable from the cable restraint, and then carefully move the cable
out of the way.
• Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 227
Connecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable

To connect a power cable for a DC power supply:
1. Locate a replacement power cable that meets the specifications defined in “DC Power
Cable Specifications for the MX480 Router” on page 173.
2. Verify that a licensed electrician has attached a cable lug to the replacement power
cable.
3. Verify that the INPUT OK LED is off.

4. Secure the power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then with
the nut. Apply between 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each
nut (see Figure 77 on page 228). Do not overtighten the nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11 mm]

Figure 164: Connecting Power Cables to the DC Power Supply
5. Route the power cable along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the
openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cable in place.
6. Verify that the DC power cable is connected correctly, that it does not touch or block
access to router components, and that it does not drape where people could trip on
it.

8. Attach the power cable to the DC power source.
9. Turn on the dedicated customer site circuit breaker to the power supply.
green steadily.
• Disconnecting an MX480 DC Power Supply Cable on page 377

Documentation

CHAPTER 27
Replacing Switch Fabric Components
• Replacing an MX480 SCB on page 381

• Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 399
Replacing an MX480 SCB
Before replacing an SCB, read the guidelines in Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB
Ejectors.
1. Removing an MX480 SCB on page 381

2. Installing an MX480 SCB on page 383
3. Upgrading an MX480 SCB on page 385
4. Upgrading an MX480 SCB or SCBE to SCBE2 on page 393
Removing an MX480 SCB

To remove an SCB (see Figure 165 on page 382):
NOTE: You can remove the SCB and Routing Engine as a unit, or remove the
Routing Engine separately.
CAUTION: Before removing an SCB, ensure that you know how to operate
the ejector handles properly to avoid damage to the equipment.
CAUTION: Before you replace an SCB, you must take the host subsystem
offline. If there is only one host subsystem, taking the host subsystem offline
shuts down the router.
1. Take the host subsystem offline.

chassis.
7. Place the SCB on the antistatic mat.
8. If you are not replacing the SCB now, install a blank panel over the empty slot.
See Also • Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors

Chapter 27: Replacing Switch Fabric Components
Installing an MX480 SCB

To install an SCB (see Figure 110 on page 285):
correctly aligned.
is fully seated.
5. Place the ejector handles in the proper position, vertically and toward the center of
the board.
6. Check the LEDs on the SCB faceplate to verify that it is functioning normally.
• The green OK/FAIL LED should light steadily a few minutes after the SCB is installed.
• If the OK/FAIL LED is red, remove and install the SCB again. If the OK/FAIL LED still
lights steadily, the SCB is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support
representative.
7. Check the status of the SCB using the show chassis environment cb command:

CB 0 status:
State Online Master
Power 1
1.2 V 1198 mV
1.5 V 1508 mV
1.8 V 1830 mV
2.5 V 5059 mV
3.3 V 6593 mV
5.0 V 5111 mV
12.0 V 12181 mV
1.25 V 1250 mV
3.3 V SM3 6587 mV
5 V RE 5078 mV
12 V RE 12026 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias POE 0 11446 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11408 mV
Bus Revision 6
FPGA Revision 0
CB 1 status:


Power 1
1.2 V 1211 mV
1.5 V 1517 mV
1.8 V 1817 mV
2.5 V 2507 mV
3.3 V 3312 mV
5.0 V 5136 mV
12.0 V 12142 mV
1.25 V 1260 mV
3.3 V SM3 3306 mV
5 V RE 5085 mV
12 V RE 11968 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias POE 0 11350 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11330 mV
Bus Revision 39
FPGA Revision 1
Figure 166: Installing an SCB
0
MASTER
1 YELLOW ALARM
PEM 0 1 2 3 ONLINE RED ALARM
OK FAIL FAN ACO/LT
OK FAIL OFFLINE
OK FAIL OK FAIL
OK FAIL RE0
OK FAIL RE1 NC C NO
OK FAIL NC C NO
0 1 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
2 3 OK FAIL
OK FAIL
ONLINE 4 OK FAIL
ONLINE 5
ONLINE 0 OK FAIL
ONLINE 1 OK FAIL
ONLINE
ONLINE 2 6 7
ONLINE 8
ONLINE
ONLINE 9 10
ONLINE
ONLINE 11
ONLINE
ONLINE
ONLINE
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0
g004049

• Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors
Upgrading an MX480 SCB

1. Preparing for the Upgrade on page 385
2. Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine on page 387
3. Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine on page 389
4. Completing the SCB Upgrade on page 391
Preparing for the Upgrade
NOTE: Do not make other changes to the CLI during the entire upgrade
process. You can ensure that you will not make such changes by opening a
telnet session to the master RE CLI operational mode and issuing the configure
exclusive command. This command locks the configuration procedure.
TIP: To prevent traffic loss during the upgrade process, we recommend that
you operate the line cards at 50% line rate. This 50% limit must be
maintained per PFE on each line card.
To prepare the MX480 router for the Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (MX SCBE)
upgrade:
1. Verify that the system runs Junos OS Release 11.4 or later by issuing the show version
command on the master router.
user@host> show version

Model: mx480
Junos Base OS Software Suite [11.4-20110530];
NOTE: The MX SCBE is supported only in Junos OS Release 11.4 or later.
The latest software ensures a healthy system—that is, Routing Engines, control boards,
and FPCs—before the upgrade.
2. Verify that MX SCB boards are installed by issuing the show chassis hardware
command.

Item Version Part Number Serial Number Description

CB0 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8281 MX SCB

CB1 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8323 MX SCB
SCB details are displayed as above, along with other hardware components. The
MX480 router has only two SCBs and each SCB has four fabric planes.
3. Establish console connections to both Routing Engines. You can use a telnet session
to connect to the router console by issuing the <router name>-con command. For
example, if the router name is juniper, you can connect to RE0 and RE1 consoles by
issuing the telnet juniper-con and telnet juniper1-con commands.
4. Ensure that graceful switchover (GRES), commit synchronize (required for nonstop
routing), and nonstop routing (NSR) are enabled or configured by running the set
chassis redundancy graceful-switchover, set system commit synchronize, set
routing-options nonstop-routing commands.
NOTE: These commands are mandatory for this upgrade and may be
removed, if desired, after the upgrade.
5. Set the upgrade flag on, and start the SCB upgrade by issuing the set chassis state
cb-upgrade on command.
user@host# configure
user@host# set chassis state cb-upgrade on
user@host# commit
6. Determine the order to replace the existing SCBs with upgraded ones. SCB0 is
associated with RE0 and SCB1 is associated with RE1.
NOTE: Do not add or remove any router hardware during the upgrade
procedure.

Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine
TIP: MX480 has two slots for SCB—that is, SCB0 and SCB1—and these
correspond to RE0 and RE1 respectively, where SCB1 is the first SCB.
To upgrade the SCB in the backup Routing Engine:
1. Power down the backup Routing Engine from the master Routing Engine by issuing
the request system power-off other-routing-engine command.
2. Verify that the Routing Engine is powered down by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 1 command. The slot of the Routing Engine may be 0 or 1, and is shown
as 1 in this example:
user@host> show chassis routing-engine 1

Routing Engine Status:
Slot 1:
Current State Present
Ensure that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is
offline.
3. Take the fabric plane offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane 4 offline
command. SCB1 has four fabric planes numbered, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
4. Verify that the fabric plane is offline by issuing the show chassis fabric summary
command.
user@host> show chassis fabric summary
Plane State Uptime

4 Offline
5 Online 1 hour, 15 minutes, 35 seconds
Verify that the State of Plane 4 is Offline.
5. Take the remaining fabric planes offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane
5/6/7 offline command—that is, by changing the fabric plane number each time. Verify
that the fabric planes are offline by issuing the command given in Step 2.
6. Take the SCB in slot 1 offline by issuing the request chassis cb offline slot 1 command.
7. Verify that the control board is offline by issuing the show chassis environment cb 1
command:
user@host> show chassis environment cb 1

CB 1 status:
State Offline

Power 1 Disabled
Power 2 Disabled
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
9. Remove and replace SCB1 on the router with the SCBE. Use the replacement procedure
described in “Removing an MX480 SCB” on page 381
10. Verify that the installation is successful and the SCB is online by issuing the show
chassis environment cb 1 command:

CB 1 status
State Online
Other details, such as power, are also displayed along with the state.
11. Verify that the fabric planes come online correctly by issuing the show chassis fabric
summary command:

Plane State Uptime
4 Online 2 minutes, 25 seconds
7 Online 1 minute, 49 seconds
12. Verify that the backup Routing Engine is back online by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 1 command:

Slot 1:
Current State Backup
13. Verify the alarms by issuing the show chassis alarms command:
user@host> show chassis alarms

Alarm Time Class Description
2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabrics are of mixed types
As only one SCB has been upgraded, the alarm indicates that the SCBs are of mixed
type. This alarm is cleared after all the control boards are upgraded.

Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine
To upgrade the SCB in the master Routing Engine:
1. Ensure a Graceful RE Switchover (GRES) to gracefully switch between the master

and backup Routing Engines, so that the backup RE becomes the master RE, by issuing
the request chassis routing-engine master switch command.
2. Log in to the new master Routing Engine after the switchover.
3. Switch the configuration mode to ensure that you are still in configure exclusive mode
by issuing the exit command and then the configure exclusive command, from the old
master Routing Engine.
4. Log in to the current master Routing Engine again and issue the configure exclusive
command.
6. Ensure that the Routing Engine is powered down by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 0 command.

Slot 0:
Verify that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is
offline.
7. Take the first fabric plane of the backup Routing Engine offline by issuing the request
chassis fabric plane 0 offline command. SCB0 has four fabric planes numbered, 0, 1,
2, and 3.
command.

Plane State Uptime
0 Offline

command:

CB 0 status:
State Offline
Power 1 Disabled
Power 2 Disabled
13. Remove and replace the offline SCB on the router with the SCBE. Use the replacement
procedure described in “Removing an MX480 SCB” on page 381.
14. Verify that the installation is successful and SCB0 is online by issuing the show chassis
environment cb 0 command:

CB 0 status
State Online
summary command:

Plane State Uptime

Slot 0:

2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabric links require upgrade/training
2011-06-01 12:10:41 EDT Major Require a fan tray upgrade
The major alarm has changed from CB fabrics are of mixed types to CB fabric links
require upgrade/training, as a switch control board requires training to change links

from 3G speed to 6G speed of the SCBE. This alarm is displayed until the 3G to 6G
link transition is completed.
Completing the SCB Upgrade
To complete the procedure after upgrading the SCBs:
1. Verify that any Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) is running at 3G instead of 6G by

issuing the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth info command:
user@host> request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth info

Slot State
0 Upgrade not supported
1 Needs upgrade
2 Empty
3 Empty
4 Empty
5 Empty
The results indicate that slot 0 does not support the upgrade and slot 1 needs to be
upgraded.
2. Upgrade the bandwidth of all MPCs by issuing the request chassis fabric
upgrade-bandwidth fpc all command. If you want to control the MPC line card upgrade,
go to Step 3.
CAUTION: Use this command only if you are not concerned with the slot
upgrade order or if only one old MPC is present in the chassis. Running this
command may result in a loss of traffic across that MPC. Using this method
may increase that loss, because it does not consider any redundancy or
graceful switchover strategies that you may have configured on the system.
3. Upgrade the MPC in slot 1 by running the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth
fpc slot 1 command.
4. Verify that the MPC is upgraded by issuing the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth
info command:

Slot State
1 Upgraded
2 Empty
5. Verify the state of the fabric planes for all MPCs by issuing the show chassis fabric
summary command.

Plane State Uptime
0 Spare 21 seconds

1 Spare 12 seconds
2 Online 12 minutes
3 Online 12 minutes
4 Online 30 minutes
5 Online 30 minutes
6. Verify the state of the MPCs by issuing the show chassis fabric fpcs command.
user@host> show chassis fabric fpcs

FPC 1
PFE #0
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
Plane 2: Plane enabled
PFE #1
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
PFE #2
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
PFE #3
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
Fabric plane details of all MPCs are similarly displayed.
7. Verify if any output of the show chassis fabric summary command shows fabric
planes in 'check' state, as it indicates that the fabric plane has an error. You can try
to recover the fabric plane to normal operation by issuing the request chassis fabric
plane <#> offline command, followed by the request chassis fabric plane <#> online
command, where <#> equals the fabric plane in error.
NOTE: After you issue the request chassis fabric plane <#> offline and
request chassis fabric plane <#> online commands, issue the show
chassis fabric summary command to verify that the fabric plane errors
are rectified and to verify the current state of the fabric planes.
8. Verify that the major alarms are displayed by issuing the show chassis alarms
command:


2011-06-01 13:37:43 EDT Minor Require a fan tray upgrade
2011-06-01 13:37:26 EDT Minor Backup RE Active
The major alarms are not displayed anymore, and the upgrade is successfully
completed.
9. Disable the upgrade configuration by issuing the set chassis state cb-upgrade off
command and then the commit command.
10. You can delete that command by issuing the delete chassis state cb-upgrade command
and then the commit command.
11. Verify the SCBs before you finish by issuing the show chassis hardware command:

CB0 REV 02 750-031391 YE8505 Enhanced MX SCB
CB1 REV 07 710-031391 YL6769 Enhanced MX SCB
You can see that the MX480 now has the MX SCBEs.
See Also • MX480 SCBE Description on page 110
Related • Removing an MX480 SCB on page 381

Documentation
Upgrading an MX480 SCB or SCBE to SCBE2

Consider the following scenarios when upgrading an MX480 SCB or SCBE to SCBE2:
• SCBE2; Routing Engine with Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or later installed.
• Replace the SCBs. Ensure that you replace the SCBs at the same time.
• Ensure that Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode is configured

before you power on the router.
• SCB or SCBE; existing Routing Engine with a Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or earlier installed.
• Upgrade the Routing Engine (RE0 and RE1) software to Junos OS Release 13.3 or
later.
• Configure Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode.
• Failed SCB or SCBE; Routing Engine with a Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or earlier installed.

• Upgrade the software on the Routing Engine hosting the failed SCB or SCBE with
Junos OS Release 13.3R1 or later.
• Upgrade the software on the Routing Engine hosting the SCBE2 with Junos OS
Release 13.3R1 or later.
• Configure Enhanced IP or Enhanced Ethernet Network Services mode.
To upgrade the SCB or SCBE to SCBE2, perform the following steps:
NOTE: SCBE2 does not support smooth upgrade.
1. Preparing the MX480 Router for the SCBE2 Upgrade on page 394
2. Powering Off the MX480 Router on page 395
3. Removing an MX480 Routing Engine from an SCB or SCBE on page 396
4. Replacing the SCB or SCBE with SCBE2 on page 396
5. Installing an MX480 Routing Engine into an SCBE2 on page 396
6. Powering On the MX480 Router on page 397
7. Completing the SCBE2 Upgrade on page 398
Preparing the MX480 Router for the SCBE2 Upgrade
To prepare the MX480 router for the SCBE2 upgrade:


Model: mx480
Junos Base OS Software Suite [13.3-yyyymmdd];
...
NOTE: The SCBE2 is supported only on:
• Junos OS Release 13.3 or later
• Network Services Mode: Enhanced-IP
The latest software ensures a healthy system—that is, a system that comprises Routing
Engines, control boards, and FPCs—before the upgrade.
For information about how to verify and upgrade the Junos OS, see the Junos OS
Installation and Upgrade Guide.
Powering Off the MX480 Router
NOTE: After turning off the power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before
turning it back on.
To power off the MX480 router:
1. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the
request system halt both-routing-engines operational mode command. The command
shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so that their state information is preserved.
(If the router contains only one Routing Engine, issue the request system halt
command.)
user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines
has halted.
3. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect
breaker on each DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.

Removing an MX480 Routing Engine from an SCB or SCBE
To remove an MX480 Routing Engine from an SCB or SCBE:
4. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
5. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine.
chassis.
out of the chassis.
8. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
Replacing the SCB or SCBE with SCBE2
To replace the existing SCB or SCBE with SCBE2:
1. Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect
2. Remove and replace the offline SCB or SCBE on the router with SCBE2.
Installing an MX480 Routing Engine into an SCBE2
To install an MX480 Routing Engine into an SCBE2:
the SCBE2.

5. Slide the Routing Engine into the SCBE2 until you feel resistance and then press the
faceplate of the Routing Engine until it engages the connectors.
7. Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
Powering On the MX480 Router
To power on the MX480 router:
2. Verify that each AC power cord is securely inserted into its appliance inlet.
ports (AUX, CONSOLE, or ETHERNET).
5. Switch on the dedicated customer-site circuit breakers. Follow the ESD and safety
instructions for your site.
breaker on each DC power-supply faceplate to the off (—) position.
8. Check that the AC or the DC power supply is correctly installed and functioning
normally. Verify that the AC OK and DC OK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is
not lit.
NOTE: After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds

for status indicators—such as the status LEDs on the power supply and
the show chassis command display—to indicate that the power supply is
60 seconds.

repeat the installation and cabling procedures.
NOTE: If the system is completely powered off when you power on the
power supply, the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. Normally, the router boots from the Junos OS on the
CompactFlash card.
After turning on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning

it off.
Completing the SCBE2 Upgrade
To complete the SCBE2 upgrade procedure:
1. Verify that the installation is successful and the SCBE2 is online by issuing the show
chassis environment cb command:

CB 0 status
State Online
...

CB 1 status
State Online
...
Other details, such as, temperature, power, etc are also displayed along with the state.
summary command:

Plane State Uptime
0 Online 2 days, 19 hours, 10 minutes, 9 seconds
1 Online 2 days, 19 hours, 10 minutes, 9 seconds
...

Slot 1:


...
4. Verify the SCBE2s before you finish by issuing the show chassis hardware command:

Hardware inventory:
Item Version Part number Serial number Description
CB 0 REV 08 750-048307 CABC9829 Enhanced MX SCB 2
CB 1 REV 08 750-048307 CABC9828 Enhanced MX SCB 2
...
You see that the MX480 now has SCBE2s.
Related • MX480 SCBE2 Description on page 113

Documentation
Related • Operating and Positioning the MX480 SCB Ejectors

Documentation
Replacing an SFP or XFP Transceiver on an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
1. Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 399
2. Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 401
Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
Removing an SFP or XFP does not interrupt DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC functioning, but the
removed SFP or XFP no longer receives or transmits data.
To remove an SFP or XFP transceiver (see Figure 167 on page 400):
1. Have ready a replacement transceiver or a transceiver slot plug, an antistatic mat,

and a rubber safety cap for the transceiver.
3. Label the cables connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect them correctly
later.


4. Remove the cable connector from the transceiver.
5. Pull the ejector handle out from the transceiver to unlock the transceiver.
CAUTION: Make sure that you open the ejector handle completely until
you hear it click. This prevents damage to the transceiver.
Use needlenose pliers to pull the ejector handle out from the transceiver.
6. Grasp the transceiver ejector handle, and pull the transceiver approximately 0.5 in. (1.3
cm) out of the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC.
7. Using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver, and pull it the rest of the way
out of the DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC.
Figure 167: Removing SFPs or XFPs
8. Place a rubber safety cap over the transceiver.
9. Place the removed transceiver on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag.
CAUTION: After removing a transceiver from the chassis, wait at least 30

seconds before reinserting it or inserting a transceiver into a different slot.

• Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 285
Installing an SFP or XFP Transceiver into an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC
To install an SFP or XFP:
2. Take each transceiver to be installed out of its electrostatic bag, and identify the slot
on the component where it will be installed.
3. Verify that each transceiver is covered by a rubber safety cap. If it is not, cover the
transceiver with a safety cap.
4. Carefully align the transceiver with the slots in the component. The connectors should
face the component.
5. Slide the transceiver until the connector is seated in the component slot. If you are
unable to fully insert the transceiver, make sure the connector is facing the right way.
6. Close the ejector handle of the transceiver.
7. Remove the rubber safety cap from the transceiver and the end of the cable. Insert
the cable into the transceiver.

8. Verify that the status LEDs on the component faceplate indicate that the SFP or XFP
is functioning correctly. For more information about the component LEDs, see the MX
Series Interface Module Reference.
• Removing an SFP or XFP Transceiver from an MX480 DPC, MPC, MIC, or PIC on page 399


Documentation
Upgrading an MX480 SCB
1. Preparing for the Upgrade on page 402

2. Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine on page 403
3. Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine on page 405
4. Completing the SCB Upgrade on page 407
Preparing for the Upgrade
NOTE: Do not make other changes to the CLI during the entire upgrade
process. You can ensure that you will not make such changes by opening a
telnet session to the master RE CLI operational mode and issuing the configure
exclusive command. This command locks the configuration procedure.
TIP: To prevent traffic loss during the upgrade process, we recommend that
you operate the line cards at 50% line rate. This 50% limit must be
maintained per PFE on each line card.
To prepare the MX480 router for the Enhanced MX Switch Control Board (MX SCBE)
upgrade:

Model: mx480
Junos Base OS Software Suite [11.4-20110530];
NOTE: The MX SCBE is supported only in Junos OS Release 11.4 or later.
The latest software ensures a healthy system—that is, Routing Engines, control boards,
and FPCs—before the upgrade.
2. Verify that MX SCB boards are installed by issuing the show chassis hardware
command.

CB0 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8281 MX SCB
CB1 REV 07 710-021523 ABBC8323 MX SCB

SCB details are displayed as above, along with other hardware components. The
MX480 router has only two SCBs and each SCB has four fabric planes.
3. Establish console connections to both Routing Engines. You can use a telnet session
to connect to the router console by issuing the <router name>-con command. For
example, if the router name is juniper, you can connect to RE0 and RE1 consoles by
issuing the telnet juniper-con and telnet juniper1-con commands.
4. Ensure that graceful switchover (GRES), commit synchronize (required for nonstop
routing), and nonstop routing (NSR) are enabled or configured by running the set
chassis redundancy graceful-switchover, set system commit synchronize, set
routing-options nonstop-routing commands.
NOTE: These commands are mandatory for this upgrade and may be
removed, if desired, after the upgrade.
5. Set the upgrade flag on, and start the SCB upgrade by issuing the set chassis state
cb-upgrade on command.
user@host# configure
user@host# set chassis state cb-upgrade on
user@host# commit
6. Determine the order to replace the existing SCBs with upgraded ones. SCB0 is
associated with RE0 and SCB1 is associated with RE1.
NOTE: Do not add or remove any router hardware during the upgrade
procedure.
Upgrading the SCB in the Backup Routing Engine
TIP: MX480 has two slots for SCB—that is, SCB0 and SCB1—and these
correspond to RE0 and RE1 respectively, where SCB1 is the first SCB.
To upgrade the SCB in the backup Routing Engine:
2. Verify that the Routing Engine is powered down by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 1 command. The slot of the Routing Engine may be 0 or 1, and is shown
as 1 in this example:


Slot 1:
Ensure that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is
offline.
3. Take the fabric plane offline by issuing the request chassis fabric plane 4 offline
command. SCB1 has four fabric planes numbered, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
command.
Plane State Uptime

4 Offline
5 Online 1 hour, 15 minutes, 35 seconds
command:

CB 1 status:
State Offline
Power 1 Disabled
Power 2 Disabled
9. Remove and replace SCB1 on the router with the SCBE. Use the replacement procedure
described in “Removing an MX480 SCB” on page 381
10. Verify that the installation is successful and the SCB is online by issuing the show
chassis environment cb 1 command:

CB 1 status
State Online

summary command:

Plane State Uptime

Slot 1:

2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabrics are of mixed types
As only one SCB has been upgraded, the alarm indicates that the SCBs are of mixed
type. This alarm is cleared after all the control boards are upgraded.
Upgrading the SCB in the Master Routing Engine

To upgrade the SCB in the master Routing Engine:
1. Ensure a Graceful RE Switchover (GRES) to gracefully switch between the master

and backup Routing Engines, so that the backup RE becomes the master RE, by issuing
the request chassis routing-engine master switch command.
2. Log in to the new master Routing Engine after the switchover.
3. Switch the configuration mode to ensure that you are still in configure exclusive mode
by issuing the exit command and then the configure exclusive command, from the old
master Routing Engine.
4. Log in to the current master Routing Engine again and issue the configure exclusive
command.
6. Ensure that the Routing Engine is powered down by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 0 command.


Slot 0:
Verify that the Current State is Present, which indicates that the Routing Engine is
offline.
7. Take the first fabric plane of the backup Routing Engine offline by issuing the request
chassis fabric plane 0 offline command. SCB0 has four fabric planes numbered, 0, 1,
2, and 3.
command.

Plane State Uptime
0 Offline
command:

CB 0 status:
State Offline
Power 1 Disabled
Power 2 Disabled
13. Remove and replace the offline SCB on the router with the SCBE. Use the replacement
procedure described in “Removing an MX480 SCB” on page 381.
14. Verify that the installation is successful and SCB0 is online by issuing the show chassis
environment cb 0 command:

CB 0 status
State Online

summary command:

Plane State Uptime

Slot 0:

2011-06-01 13:26:56 EDT Major CB fabric links require upgrade/training
2011-06-01 12:10:41 EDT Major Require a fan tray upgrade
The major alarm has changed from CB fabrics are of mixed types to CB fabric links
require upgrade/training, as a switch control board requires training to change links
from 3G speed to 6G speed of the SCBE. This alarm is displayed until the 3G to 6G
link transition is completed.
Completing the SCB Upgrade

To complete the procedure after upgrading the SCBs:
1. Verify that any Modular Port Concentrator (MPC) is running at 3G instead of 6G by

issuing the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth info command:

Slot State
1 Needs upgrade
2 Empty
3 Empty
4 Empty
5 Empty
The results indicate that slot 0 does not support the upgrade and slot 1 needs to be
upgraded.
2. Upgrade the bandwidth of all MPCs by issuing the request chassis fabric
upgrade-bandwidth fpc all command. If you want to control the MPC line card upgrade,
go to Step 3.

CAUTION: Use this command only if you are not concerned with the slot
upgrade order or if only one old MPC is present in the chassis. Running this
command may result in a loss of traffic across that MPC. Using this method
may increase that loss, because it does not consider any redundancy or
graceful switchover strategies that you may have configured on the system.
3. Upgrade the MPC in slot 1 by running the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth
fpc slot 1 command.
4. Verify that the MPC is upgraded by issuing the request chassis fabric upgrade-bandwidth
info command:

Slot State
1 Upgraded
2 Empty
5. Verify the state of the fabric planes for all MPCs by issuing the show chassis fabric
summary command.

Plane State Uptime
0 Spare 21 seconds
1 Spare 12 seconds
2 Online 12 minutes
3 Online 12 minutes
4 Online 30 minutes
5 Online 30 minutes
6. Verify the state of the MPCs by issuing the show chassis fabric fpcs command.
user@host> show chassis fabric fpcs

FPC 1
PFE #0
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
PFE #1
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
PFE #2
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok


PFE #3
Plane 0: Links ok
Plane 1: Links ok
Fabric plane details of all MPCs are similarly displayed.
7. Verify if any output of the show chassis fabric summary command shows fabric
planes in 'check' state, as it indicates that the fabric plane has an error. You can try
to recover the fabric plane to normal operation by issuing the request chassis fabric
plane <#> offline command, followed by the request chassis fabric plane <#> online
command, where <#> equals the fabric plane in error.
NOTE: After you issue the request chassis fabric plane <#> offline and
request chassis fabric plane <#> online commands, issue the show
chassis fabric summary command to verify that the fabric plane errors
are rectified and to verify the current state of the fabric planes.
8. Verify that the major alarms are displayed by issuing the show chassis alarms
command:

2011-06-01 13:37:43 EDT Minor Require a fan tray upgrade
2011-06-01 13:37:26 EDT Minor Backup RE Active
The major alarms are not displayed anymore, and the upgrade is successfully
completed.
9. Disable the upgrade configuration by issuing the set chassis state cb-upgrade off
command and then the commit command.
10. You can delete that command by issuing the delete chassis state cb-upgrade command
and then the commit command.
11. Verify the SCBs before you finish by issuing the show chassis hardware command:

CB0 REV 02 750-031391 YE8505 Enhanced MX SCB
CB1 REV 07 710-031391 YL6769 Enhanced MX SCB
You can see that the MX480 now has the MX SCBEs.

See Also • MX480 SCBE Description on page 110
Related • Removing an MX480 SCB on page 381

Documentation

PART 5
Maintaining the Chassis and Components

• Routine Maintenance Procedures on page 413
• Maintaining Components on page 415


CHAPTER 28
Routine Maintenance Procedures
• Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router on page 413
Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router
Purpose For optimum router performance, perform preventive maintenance procedures.
Action • Inspect the installation site for moisture, loose wires or cables, and excessive dust.
Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the router and into the air intake vents.
• Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface—System alarms and LEDs.
• Inspect the air filter at the left rear of the router, replacing it every 6 months for optimum
cooling system performance. Do not run the router for more than a few minutes without
the air filter in place.
Related • Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter on page 415

Documentation


CHAPTER 29
Maintaining Components
• Tools and Parts Required to Maintain the MX480 Router on page 415
• Holding an MX480 DPC on page 422
• Storing an MX480 DPC on page 424
• Maintaining the MX480 Power Supplies on page 435
Tools and Parts Required to Maintain the MX480 Router
To maintain hardware components, you need the following tools and parts:
• Flat-blade (–) screwdriver
Related • Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router on page 413
Documentation
Maintaining the MX480 Air Filter
Purpose For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the air filters.

Action • Regularly inspect the air filter. A dirty air filter restricts airflow in the unit, producing a
negative effect on the ventilation of the chassis. The filter degrades over time. You
must replace the filter every 6 months.
CAUTION: Always keep the air filter in place while the device is operating.
Because the fans are very powerful, they could pull small bits of wire or
other materials into the through the unfiltered air intake. This could damage
the components.
• The shelf life of polyurethane filter varies from two years to five years depending on
the storage conditions. Store in a cool, dry, and dark environment. Wrap the media in
plastic and store in an environment with relative humidity between 40%- 80% and
temperature between 40° F (4° C) to 90° F (32° C). Note that if the material flakes,
or becomes brittle when rubbed or deformed, it is no longer usable.
Related • Replacing the MX480 Air Filter on page 295

Documentation
• Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router on page 413
Maintaining the MX480 Fan Tray
Purpose For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the fans.
Action • Monitor the status of the fans. A fan tray contains multiple fans that work in unison to
cool the router components. If one fan fails, the host subsystem adjusts the speed of
the remaining fans to maintain proper cooling. A red alarm is triggered when a fan fails,
and a yellow alarm and red alarm is triggered when a fan tray is removed.
• To display the status of the cooling system, issue the show chassis environment
command. The output is similar to the following:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item Status Measurement

Temp PEM 0 OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
PEM 1 Absent
PEM 2 Absent
PEM 3 OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F
Routing Engine 0 OK 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F
Routing Engine 1 OK 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
CB 0 Intake OK 26 degrees C / 78 degrees F
CB 0 Exhaust A OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
CB 0 Exhaust B OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
CB 0 ACBC OK 26 degrees C / 78 degrees F
CB 0 SF A OK 37 degrees C / 98 degrees F
CB 0 SF B OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F
CB 1 Intake OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
CB 1 Exhaust A OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F
CB 1 Exhaust B OK 28 degrees C / 82 degrees F
CB 1 ACBC OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F

Chapter 29: Maintaining Components
CB 1 SF A OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
CB 1 SF B OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
CB 2 Intake Absent
CB 2 Exhaust A Absent
CB 2 Exhaust B Absent
CB 2 ACBC Absent
CB 2 SF A Absent
CB 2 SF B Absent
FPC 2 Intake OK 22 degrees C / 71 degrees F
FPC 2 Exhaust A OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
FPC 2 Exhaust B OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F
FPC 2 I3 0 TSensor OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F
FPC 2 I3 0 Chip OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F
FPC 2 IA 0 TSensor OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F
FPC 2 IA 0 Chip OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
Fans Top Fan Tray Temp OK 27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
Top Tray Fan 1 OK Spinning at high speed
Bottom Fan Tray Temp OK 28 degrees C / 82 degrees F

Bottom Tray Fan 1 OK Spinning at high speed

Related • Routine Maintenance Procedures for the MX480 Router on page 413
Documentation
Maintaining the MX480 Host Subsystem
Purpose For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the host subsystem. The host
subsystem comprises an SCB and a Routing Engine installed directly into an SCB.
Action On a regular basis:
• Check the LEDs on the craft interface to view information about the status of the
Routing Engines.
• Check the LEDs on the SCB faceplate.
• Check the LEDs on the Routing Engine faceplate.
• To check the status of the Routing Engines, issue the show chassis routing-engine
command. The output is similar to the following:

Routing Engine status:
Slot 0:
Current state Master
Election priority Master (default)
CPU temperature 43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
DRAM 2048 MB
Memory utilization 15 percent
CPU utilization:
User 0 percent
Background 0 percent
Kernel 8 percent
Interrupt 0 percent
Idle 92 percent
Model RE-S-1300
Serial ID 1000694968
Start time 2007-07-10 12:27:39 PDT
Uptime 1 hour, 40 minutes, 37 seconds
Load averages: 1 minute 5 minute 15 minute
0.11 0.06 0.01
Routing Engine status:
Slot 1:
Current state Backup
Election priority Backup (default)
CPU temperature 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
DRAM 2048 MB

Memory utilization 13 percent

CPU utilization:
User 0 percent
Background 0 percent
Kernel 0 percent
Interrupt 0 percent
Idle 100 percent
Model RE-S-1300
Serial ID 1000694976
Start time 2007-06-19 14:17:00 PDT
Uptime 20 days, 23 hours, 51 minutes, 4 seconds
• To check the status of the SCBs, issue the show chassis environment cb command.
The output is similar to the following:

CB 0 status:
State Online Master
Power 1
1.2 V 1208 mV
1.5 V 1521 mV
1.8 V 1807 mV
2.5 V 2507 mV
3.3 V 3319 mV
5.0 V 5033 mV
12.0 V 12142 mV
1.25 V 1243 mV
3.3 V SM3 3312 mV
5 V RE 5059 mV
12 V RE 11968 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias POE 0 11176 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11292 mV
Bus Revision 42
FPGA Revision 1
CB 1 status:
Power 1
1.2 V 1202 mV
1.5 V 1514 mV
1.8 V 1807 mV
2.5 V 2500 mV
3.3 V 3293 mV
5.0 V 5053 mV
12.0 V 12200 mV
1.25 V 1260 mV
3.3 V SM3 3319 mV
5 V RE 5059 mV
12 V RE 12007 mV
Power 2
11.3 V bias POE 0 11292 mV
11.3 V bias POE 1 11311 mV

Bus Revision 42
FPGA Revision 1
To check the status of a specific SCB, issue the show chassis environment cb command
and include the slot number of the SCB. The output is similar to the following:

CB 0 status:
State Online
Temperature Intake 66 degrees C / 150 degrees F
Temperature Exhaust A 67 degrees C / 152 degrees F
Temperature Exhaust B 73 degrees C / 163 degrees F
Power
1.2 V 1153 mV
1.5 V 1417 mV
1.8 V 1704 mV
2.5 V 2375 mV
3.3 V 3138 mV
5.0 V 4763 mV
1.2 V Rocket IO 1160 mV
1.5 V Rocket IO 1408 mV
1.8 V RLDRAM 1717 mV
I2C Slave Revision 15
For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS manuals.

Documentation
Maintaining MX480 DPCs
Purpose The router can have up to six Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) mounted horizontally in
the DPC card cage at the front of the chassis. For optimum router performance, verify
the condition of the DPCs.
• Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above each DPC slot. The green LED
labeled OK lights steadily when a DPC is functioning normally.
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the DPC. For more information, seeMX Series Interface Module
Reference . If the DPC detects a failure, the DPC sends an alarm message to the Routing
Engine.
• Check the status of installed DPCs by issuing the CLI show chassis fpc command to
check the status of installed DPCs. As shown in the sample output, the value Online
in the column labeled State indicates that the DPC is functioning normally:
user@host> show chassis fpc

Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)
Slot State (C) Total Interrupt DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer
0 Online 41 9 0 1024 15 57

1 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
2 Online 43 11 0 1024 16 57
3 Empty
4 Empty
5 Online 42 6 0 1024 16 57
For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example does not specify
a slot number, which is optional:
user@host> show chassis fpc detail

Slot 0 information:
State Online
Total CPU DRAM 1024 MB
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Total DDR DRAM 4096 MB
Start time: 2007-07-10 12:28:33 PDT
Uptime: 1 hour, 33 minutes, 52 seconds
Max Power Consumption 368 Watts
Slot 1 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2007-07-10 12:28:38 PDT
Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2007-07-10 12:28:40 PDT
Slot 5 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2007-07-10 12:28:42 PDT
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The DPC slots are numbered 0
through 5, bottom to top:
user@host> show chassis fpc pic-status

Slot 0 Online DPCE 4x 10GE R
PIC 0 Online 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)
PIC 0 Online 10x 1GE(LAN)


Slot 5 Online DPC 4x 10GE R
For further description of the output from the command, see the CLI Explorer.

Documentation
Holding an MX480 DPC
When carrying a DPC, you can hold it either vertically or horizontally.
NOTE: A DPC weighs 14.5 lb (6.6 kg). Be prepared to accept the full weight
of the DPC as you lift it.
To hold a DPC vertically:
1. Orient the DPC so that the faceplate faces you. To verify orientation, confirm that the
text on the DPC is right-side up and the electromagnetic interference (EMI) strip is on
the right-hand side.
2. Place one hand around the DPC faceplate about a quarter of the way down from the
top edge. To avoid deforming the EMI shielding strip, do not press hard on it.
3. Place your other hand at the bottom edge of the DPC.
If the DPC is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate and
your right hand along the bottom edge.
To hold a DPC horizontally:
2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand.
You can rest the faceplate of the DPC against your body as you carry it.

As you carry the DPC, do not bump it against anything. DPC components are fragile.
Never hold or grasp the DPC anywhere except places that this document indicates. In
particular, never grasp the connector edge, especially at the power connector in the
corner where the connector and bottom edges meet. See Figure 168 on page 423.
Figure 168: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge
Never carry the DPC by the faceplate with only one hand.
Do not rest any edge of a DPC directly against a hard surface (see Figure 169 on page 424).
Do not stack DPCs.

Figure 169: Do Not Rest the DPC on an Edge
If you must rest the DPC temporarily on an edge while changing its orientation between
vertical and horizontal, use your hand as a cushion between the edge and the surface.
Related • MX480 DPC Terminology

Documentation
• Storing an MX480 DPC on page 424
Storing an MX480 DPC
You must store a DPC as follows:
• In the router
• In the container in which a spare DPC is shipped
• Horizontally and sheet metal side down
When you store a DPC on a horizontal surface or in the shipping container, always place
it inside an antistatic bag. Because the DPC is heavy, and because antistatic bags are
fragile, inserting the DPC into the bag is easier with two people. To do this, one person
holds the DPC in the horizontal position with the faceplate facing the body, and the other
person slides the opening of the bag over the DPC connector edge.
If you must insert the DPC into a bag by yourself, first lay the DPC horizontally on a flat,
stable surface, sheet metal side down. Orient the DPC with the faceplate facing you.
Carefully insert the DPC connector edge into the opening of the bag, and pull the bag
toward you to cover the DPC.

Never stack a DPC under or on top of any other component.
Related • MX480 DPC Terminology

Documentation
• Holding an MX480 DPC on page 422
Maintaining MX480 FPCs
Purpose The MX480 router can have up to three Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) installed
horizontally in the front of the chassis. For optimum router performance, verify the
condition of the FPC.
• Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above the FPC. The green LED labeled
OK lights steadily when an FPC is functioning normally.
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the FPC. If the FPC detects a failure, the FPC sends an alarm
message to the Routing Engine.
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of the installed FPC. As
shown in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates
that the FPC is functioning normally:

0 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
1 Empty
2 Online 41 9 0 1024 15 57
3 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
4 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
5 Empty

Slot 0 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 128 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:24 PST
Uptime: 15 hours, 2 minutes, 47 seconds
Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST


Slot 3 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
Slot 4 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The following example shows an
FPC installed in DPC slots 0, and 1:

Slot 0 Online MX FPC Type 3
PIC 0 Online 1x OC-192 SONET
Slot 3 Online MPC Type 2 3D EQ
PIC 0 Online 1x 10GE XFP
Slot 4 Online MPC 3D 16x 10GE
PIC 0 Online 4x 10GE(LAN) SFP+
NOTE: An FPC takes up two DPC slots when installed on an MX Series

router. The slot number corresponds to the lowest numbered DPC slot.
Related • MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs on page 65

Documentation

Holding an MX480 FPC
CAUTION: Many components on the FPC are fragile. Failure to handle FPCs
as specified in this document can cause irreparable damage.
NOTE: An FPC configured with PICs installed can weigh as much as

18 lb (8.2 kg). Be prepared to accept the full weight of the FPC as you lift it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage when handling or carrying FPCs:
• As you carry the FPC, do not bump it against anything. FPC components
are fragile.
• Do not grasp the FPC anywhere except places that this document indicates.
In particular, never grasp the connector edge, especially at the power
connector in the corner where the connector and bottom edges meet (see
Figure 170: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge
• Do not carry the FPC by the faceplate with only one hand (see

Figure 171: Do Not Carry an FPC with Only One Hand
• Do not rest any edge of an FPC directly against a hard surface (see
Figure 172 on page 429). If you must rest the FPC temporarily on an edge
while changing its orientation between vertical and horizontal, use your
hand as a cushion between the edge and the surface.

Figure 172: Do Not Rest the FPC on an Edge
You hold an FPC horizontally when installing it into the chassis or an equipment rack.
If the FPC is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate and
your right hand along the bottom edge.
To hold an FPC horizontally:
2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand.
Related • MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) Description on page 63

Documentation
Storing an MX480 FPC
When not installed in the routing platforms, FPCs must be either stored in the container
in which a spare FPC is shipped or stored horizontally with the component-side up on a
flat, stable surface. When you store an FPC on a horizontal surface or in the shipping
container, always place it inside an antistatic bag. Because the FPC is heavy and because
antistatic bags are fragile, inserting the FPC into the bag is easier with two people. The
storage guidelines are as follows:
• When storing an FPC with two people, one person holds the FPC in the horizontal
position with the faceplate facing their body, the other person slides the opening of
the bag over the FPC connector edge.
• When storing an FPC with one person, you must insert the FPC into a bag by yourself.
First lay the FPC horizontally on a flat, stable surface, component-side up. Orient the

FPC with the faceplate facing you. Carefully insert the FPC connector edge into the
opening of the bag, and pull the bag toward you to cover the FPC.
CAUTION: To prevent damage when storing FPCs:
• Never lay an FPC component-side down.
Figure 173: Do Not Stack FPCs
• Never stack an FPC under or on top of any other component (see


Documentation
Maintaining MX480 MICs
Purpose For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the MICs.
• Check the LEDs on MIC faceplates. The meaning of the LED states differs for various
MICs. For more information, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference. If the MPC
that houses the MIC detects a MIC failure, the MPC generates an alarm message to be
sent to the Routing Engine.
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The MIC slots in an MPC are
numbered PIC 0/1 and PIC 2/3, left to right:

Slot 0 Online DPCE 4x 10GE R EQ
PIC 0 Online 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN) EQ

PIC 0 Online 10x 1GE(LAN) EQ

Slot 2 Online MS-DPC
PIC 0 Online MS-DPC PIC

Documentation
Maintaining MX480 MPCs
Purpose The router can have up to six MPCs mounted horizontally in the card cage at the front of
the chassis. For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the MPCs.
• Check the LEDs on the craft interface directly above each MPC slot. The green LED
labeled OK lights steadily when an MPC is functioning normally.
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the MPC. If the MPC detects a failure, the MPC sends an
alarm message to the Routing Engine.
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed MPCs. As
shown in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates
that the MPC is functioning normally:

0 Online 36 3 0 2048 14 13
1 Online 40 5 0 2048 26 13
2 Online 41 6 0 1024 7 43
3 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
4 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
5 Empty


Slot 0 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST
Uptime: 6 days, 3 hours, 8 minutes, 51 seconds

Slot 1 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST

Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 128 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:46 PST

Slot 3 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 806 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:27:04 PST

Slot 4 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 1324 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:27:02 PST
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The MPC slots are numbered 0
through 5, bottom to top:




Documentation
Maintaining MX480 PICs
Purpose For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the PICs.
• Check the LEDs on PIC faceplates. The meaning of the LED states differs for various
PICs. For more information, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference. If the FPC that
houses the PIC detects a PIC failure, the FPC generates an alarm message to be sent
to the Routing Engine.
• Issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The PIC slots in an FPC are
numbered from 0 through 1, left to right:




Documentation
Maintaining Cables That Connect to MX480 DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs
Purpose For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the cables that connect to the
DPCs, MPCs, MICs, or PICs.
• Use the cable management brackets to support cables and prevent cables from
dislodging or developing stress points.
• Place excess cable out of the way in the cable management brackets. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle from the connector or cable management brackets,
because this stresses the cable at the fastening point. Putting fasteners on the loops
helps to maintain their shape.
• Keep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles, which can cause
drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary
before connecting an interface.
• Label both ends of the cables to identify them.
The following guidelines apply specifically to fiber-optic cables:
• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable, always place a rubber safety plug over the
transceiver on the faceplate and on the end of the cable.
• Anchor fiber-optic cables to avoid stress on the connectors. Be sure to secure fiber-optic
cables so that they do not support their own weight as they hang to the floor. Never
let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.
• Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its bend radius. An arc smaller than a few
inches can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
• Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cable into and out of optical
instruments can cause damage to the instruments that is expensive to repair. Instead,
attach a short fiber extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to

frequent plugging and unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which
is easy and inexpensive to replace.
• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Small microdeposits of oil and dust in the
canal of the transceiver or cable connector could cause loss of light, reducing signal
power and possibly causing intermittent problems with the optical connection.
To clean the transceivers, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device, such as RIFOCS

Fiber Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the directions for the
cleaning kit you use.
After you clean an optical transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic
cable is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit, such
as the Opptex Cletop-S Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions for the cleaning kit you
use.
Related • Maintaining MX480 DPCs on page 420

Documentation
Maintaining the MX480 Power Supplies
Purpose For optimum router performance, verify the condition of the power supplies.
• PEM 0 status:
State Online
Temperature OK
AC Input: OK
DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%)
59 0 0 0
PEM 1 status:
State Online
Temperature OK
AC Input: OK
DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%)
59 18 1062 42
• Make sure that the power and grounding cables are arranged so that they do not
obstruct access to other router components.
• Routinely check the status LEDs on the power supply faceplates and the craft interface
to determine if the power supplies are functioning normally.
• Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs on the craft interface. Power supply failure or
removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the LEDs to light. You can display
the associated error messages by issuing the following command:

• Periodically inspect the site to ensure that the grounding and power cables connected
to the router are securely in place and that there is no moisture accumulating near the
router.

Documentation
• Troubleshooting Resources for MX480 Routers on page 439
• MX480 Site Preparation Checklist on page 121

PART 6
Troubleshooting Hardware
• Troubleshooting Components on page 439


CHAPTER 30
Troubleshooting Components

• Troubleshooting the MX480 Power System on page 449
Troubleshooting Resources for MX480 Routers
• Command-Line Interface on page 439

• Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 440
• Alarm Relay Contacts on page 440
• Craft Interface LEDs on page 440
• Component LEDs on page 441
• Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 441
Command-Line Interface
The Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) is the primary tool for controlling and
troubleshooting router hardware, the Junos OS, routing protocols, and network
connectivity. CLI commands display information from routing tables, information specific
to routing protocols, and information about network connectivity derived from the ping
and traceroute utilities.
You enter CLI commands on one or more external management devices connected to
ports on the Routing Engine.
For information about using the CLI to troubleshoot the Junos OS, see the appropriate
Junos OS configuration guide.

Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages

When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition, it lights the red or yellow alarm
LED on the craft interface as appropriate. To view a more detailed description of the
alarm cause, issue the show chassis alarms command:
There are two classes of alarm messages:
• Chassis alarms—Indicate a problem with a chassis component such as the cooling

system or power supplies.
• Interface alarms—Indicate a problem with a specific network interface.
Alarm Relay Contacts

The craft interface has two alarm relay contacts for connecting the router to external
alarm devices. Whenever a system condition triggers either the red or yellow alarm on
the craft interface, the alarm relay contacts are also activated. The alarm relay contacts
are located on the upper right of the craft interface.
Craft Interface LEDs

The craft interface is the panel on the front of the router located above the DPC cards
that contains LEDs and buttons that allow you to troubleshoot the router.
LEDs on the craft interface include the following:
• Alarm LEDs—One large red circular LED and one large yellow triangular LED, located
on the upper right of the craft interface, indicate two levels of alarm conditions. The
circular red LED lights to indicate a critical condition that can result in a system
shutdown. The triangular yellow LED lights to indicate a less severe condition that
requires monitoring or maintenance. Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously. A condition
that causes an alarm LED to light also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact
on the craft interface.
• Host subsystem LEDs—Three LEDs, MASTER, ONLINE, and OFFLINE, indicate the status
of the host subsystem. A green MASTER LED indicates that the host is functioning as
the master. The ONLINE LED indicates that the host is online. The OFFLINE LED indicates
that the host is installed but the routing engine is offline. The host subsystem LEDs are
located on the left of the craft interface and are labeled RE0 and RE1.
• Power supply LEDs—Two LEDs (PEM) indicate the status of each power supply. Green
indicates that the power supply is functioning normally. Red indicates that the power
supply is not functioning normally. The power supply LEDs are located in the center
craft interface, and are labeled 0 through 3.
• Line card LEDs—Two LEDs, OK and FAIL, indicate the status of each DPC, FPC, or MPC.
Green indicates OK and red indicates a failure. The LEDs are located along the bottom
of the craft interface.

Chapter 30: Troubleshooting Components
• SCB LEDs—Two LEDs, OK and FAIL, indicate the status of each SCB. Green indicates
OK and red indicates a failure. The SCB LEDs are located on the left of the craft interface
along the bottom.
• Fan LEDs—Two LEDs indicate the status of the fans. Green indicates the fans are
functioning normally and red indicates a fan has failed. The fan LEDs are located on
the upper left of the craft interface.
Component LEDs
The following LEDs are located on various router components and display the status of
those components:
• DPC LED—One LED labeled OK/FAIL on each DPC faceplate indicates the DPC's status.
For more information, see the MX Series Interface Module Reference.
• FPC LED—One LED labeled OK/FAIL on each FPC faceplate indicates the FPC's status.
• MPC LED—One LED labeled OK/FAIL on each FPC faceplate indicates the FPC's status.
• MIC LED—One LED labeled OK/FAIL on each MIC faceplate indicates the MIC's status.
• PIC LED—One LED labeled OK/FAIL on each PIC faceplate indicates the PIC's status.
• SCB LEDs—Three LEDs, labeled FABRIC ACTIVE, FABRIC ONLY, and OK/FAIL, on each
SCB faceplate indicate the status of the SCB. If no LEDs are lit, the master RE might
still be booting or the SCB is not receiving power.
• Routing Engine LEDs—Four LEDs, labeled MASTER, HDD, ONLINE, and FAIL on each
Routing Engine faceplate indicate the status of the Routing Engine and hard disk drive.
• Power supply LEDs—Two LEDs on each power supply faceplate indicate the status of
that power supply.
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center

If you need assistance during troubleshooting, you can contact the Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) by using the Web or by telephone.
Related • Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System on page 442

Documentation
• Troubleshooting the MX480 Power System on page 449

Troubleshooting the MX480 Cooling System
Problem Description: The fans in the fan tray are not functioning normally.
Solution Follow these guidelines to troubleshoot the fans:
• Check the fan LEDs and alarm LEDs on the craft interface.
• If the red alarm LED on the craft interface lights, use the CLI to get information about
the source of an alarm condition: user@host> show chassis alarms.
If the CLI output lists only one fan failure, and the other fans are functioning normally,
the fan is most likely faulty and you must replace the fan tray.
• Place your hand near the exhaust vents at the side of the chassis to determine whether
the fans are pushing air out of the chassis.
• If a fan tray is removed, a yellow alarm and a red alarm occur.
• The following conditions automatically cause the fans to run at full speed and also
trigger the indicated alarm:
• A fan fails (red alarm).
• The router temperature exceeds the “temperature warm” threshold (yellow alarm).
• The temperature of the router exceeds the maximum (“temperature hot”) threshold
(red alarm and automatic shutdown of the power supplies).
Related • Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on the MX480 Craft Interface on
• Replacing the MX480 Fan Tray on page 297
Troubleshooting the MX480 DPCs
Problem Description: The DPCs are not functioning normally.

Solution • Monitor the green LED labeled OK above the DPC on the craft interface as soon as a
DPC is seated in an operating router.
The Routing Engine downloads the DPC software to it under two conditions: the DPC
is present when the Routing Engine boots Junos OS, and the DPC is installed and
requested online through the CLI or push button on the front panel. The DPC then runs
diagnostics, during which the OK LED blinks. When the DPC is online and functioning
normally, the OK LED lights green steadily.
• Make sure the DPC is properly seated in the midplane. Check that each ejector handle
has been turned clockwise and is tight.
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the DPC and OK and FAIL DPC LEDs on the craft interface.
When the DPC is online and functioning normally, the OK LED lights green steadily.
• Issue the show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed DPCs. As shown
in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the
DPC is functioning normally:

0 Online 41 9 0 1024 15 57
1 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
2 Online 43 11 0 1024 16 57
3 Empty
4 Empty
5 Online 42 6 0 1024 16 57
NOTE: The show chassis fpc command displays the status of the DPCs.

Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total SRAM 256 MB
Total SDRAM 0 MB
Start time 2006-11-03 07:35:40 PST
Uptime 2 hours, 27 minutes, 1 second
Slot 4 information:
State Online
Total SRAM 256 MB
Total SDRAM 0 MB
Start time 2006-11-03 07:35:48 PST
Uptime 2 hours, 26 minutes, 53 seconds
Slot 7 information:
State Online


Total SRAM 256 MB
Total SDRAM 0 MB
Start time 2006-11-03 07:35:53 PST
Uptime 2 hours, 26 minutes, 48 seconds
For further description of the output from the commands, see the Junos OS
Administration Library.
Related • Installing an MX480 DPC on page 256

Documentation
• MX480 DPC Terminology
Troubleshooting the MX480 FPCs
Problem Description: The FPCs are not functioning normally.
Solution • Monitor the green LED labeled OK above the FPC on the craft interface as soon as an
FPC is seated in an operating router.
The Routing Engine downloads the FPC software to it under two conditions: the FPC
is present when the Routing Engine boots Junos OS, and the FPC is installed and
requested online through the CLI or push button on the front panel. The FPC then runs
diagnostics, during which the OK LED blinks. When the FPC is online and functioning
• Make sure the FPC is properly seated in the midplane. Check that each ejector handle
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the FPC and OK and FAIL FPC LEDs on the craft interface.
When the FPC is online and functioning normally, the OK LED lights green steadily.
• Issue the show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed FPCs. As shown
FPC is functioning normally:

0 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
1 Empty
2 Online 41 9 0 1024 15 57
3 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
4 Online 43 11 0 1024 16 57
5 Online 41 9 0 1024 15 57
6 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
7 Empty
8 Empty
9 Empty
10 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
11 Empty

NOTE: The show chassis fpc command displays the status of the FPCs.

Slot 0 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 128 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:24 PST
Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
Slot 3 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
Slot 4 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
Slot 5 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:22 PST
Slot 6 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:18 PST
Slot 10 information:
State Online


Total RLDRAM 128 MB
Start time: 2008-12-11 16:53:24 PST
Related • MX480 Flexible PIC Concentrator (FPC) LEDs on page 65

Documentation
Troubleshooting the MX480 MICs
Problem Description: The MICs are not functioning normally.
Solution • Check the status of each port on a MIC by looking at the LED located on the MIC
faceplate. For information about the meaning of LED states on different MICs, see the
MX Series Interface Module Reference.
• Check the status of a MIC by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status CLI command. The
MIC slots in the MPC are labeled PIC 0/1 and PIC 2/3, left to right:



Documentation
Troubleshooting the MX480 MPCs
Problem Description: The MPCs are not functioning normally.
Solution • Monitor the green LED labeled OK above the MPC on the craft interface as soon as an
MPC is seated in an operating router.
The Routing Engine downloads the MPC software to it under two conditions: The MPC
is present when the Routing Engine boots Junos OS, and the MPC is installed and
requested online through the CLI or push button on the front panel. The MPC then runs
diagnostics, during which the OK LED blinks. When the MPC is online and functioning
• Make sure the MPC is properly seated in the midplane. Check that each ejector handle
• Check the OK/FAIL LED on the MPC and OK and FAIL line card LEDs on the craft
interface. When the MPC is online and functioning normally, the OK LED lights green
steadily.
• Issue the show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed MPCs. As shown
MPC is functioning normally:

0 Online 36 3 0 2048 14 13
1 Online 40 5 0 2048 26 13
2 Online 41 6 0 1024 7 43
3 Online 43 5 0 1024 16 57
4 Online 24 3 0 1024 13 21
5 Empty
NOTE: The show chassis fpc command displays the status of the MPCs.

Slot 0 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB


Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST

Slot 1 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 256 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:54 PST

Slot 2 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 128 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:26:46 PST

Slot 3 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 806 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:27:04 PST

Slot 4 information:
State Online
Total RLDRAM 1324 MB
Start time: 2009-12-22 12:27:02 PST

Documentation

Troubleshooting the MX480 PICs
Problem Description: The PICs are not functioning normally.
Solution • Check the status of each port on a PIC by looking at the LED located on the PIC
faceplate. For information about the meaning of LED states on different PICs, see the
MX Series Interface Module Reference.
• Check the status of a PIC by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status CLI command. The
PIC slots in the FPC are numbered from 0 through 1, left to right:


Documentation
Troubleshooting the MX480 Power System
Problem Description: The power system is not functioning normally.
Solution • Check the LEDs on each power supply faceplate.
• If an AC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the AC OK and

DC OK LED’s light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.

• If a DC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the PWR_OK,

INPUT OK, and BREAKER ON LED’s light steadily.
• Issue the CLI show chassis environment pem command to check the status of installed
power supply modules. As shown in the sample output, the value Online in the rows
labeled State indicates that each power supply is functioning normally:
user@host> show chassis environment pem

PEM 0 status:
State Online
Temperature OK
DC output OK
PEM 1 status:
State Online
Temperature OK
DC output OK
If a power supply is not functioning normally, perform the following steps to diagnose
and correct the problem:
• If a red alarm condition occurs, issue the show chassis alarms command to determine
the source of the problem.
• Check that the AC input switch (—) or DC circuit breaker (|) is in the on position and
that the power supply is receiving power.
• Verify that the source circuit breaker has the proper current rating. Each power supply
must be connected to a separate source circuit breaker.
• Verify that the AC power cord or DC power cables from the power source to the router
are not damaged. If the insulation is cracked or broken, immediately replace the cord
or cable.
• Connect the power supply to a different power source with a new power cord or power
cables. If the power supply status LEDs indicate that the power supply is not operating
normally, the power supply is the source of the problem. Replace the power supply
with a spare.
• If all power supplies have failed, the system temperature might have exceeded the
threshold, causing the system to shut down.
NOTE: If the system temperature exceeds the threshold, the Junos OS

shuts down all power supplies so that no status is displayed.
The Junos OS also can shut down one of the power supplies for other
reasons. In this case, the remaining power supplies provide power to the
router, and you can still view the system status through the CLI or display.

To restart a high-capacity AC power supply after a shut down due to an

over-temperature situation:
1. Move the power switch on the power supply to the off (o) position.
2. Turn off power to where the AC line goes into the power distribution module (PDM)
area.
3. Wait for the power supply LEDs to fade out and for the fans inside the power supply
to shutdown. This can take up to 10 seconds.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to power-on the power supply if the LED is

still lit and the fan is still running. If you do, the router will not reboot.
4. Turn on power to where the AC line goes into the power distribution module (PDM)
area.
5. Move the power switch on the power supply to the on (|) position.
6. Verify that the LEDs on the power supply faceplate are properly lit.
7. Issue the CLI show chassis environment pem command and verify the State is ONLINE
and the Temperature is OK.
To restart a high-capacity DC power supply after a shut down due to an

over-temperature situation:
1. Switch off the circuit breaker(s) on the DC distribution panel to remove power to
the chassis and power supplies.
2. Switch on the circuit breaker(s) on the distribution panel to power up the chassis
and power supplies.
NOTE: The power switch on the power supplies is not part of the outer
or inner DC circuits and therefore does not need to be switched off when
restarting the chassis.

NOTE: If output power is not load-balancing correctly in the same zone on

an MX-series router with a high-capacity AC or DC power supply module,
connect two feeds and change the DIP switch to 1 to boost the voltage on
the power supply module.
Each High Capacity AC or DC power supply accepts two AC or DC feeds in two unique
AC or DC receptacles. It is possible to operate with one feed, but there is a reduction in
the power supply output. The DIP switch must be set according to the number of AC or
DC feeds that are present for the power supply. Refer to Figure 174 on page 452.
Figure 174: MX480 High-Capacity DC Power Supply Input Mode Switch.
g004725
• Position – 0 indicates that only one AC or DC feed is provided.
• Position – 1 indicates that two AC or DC feeds are provided.
To check the DIP switch position:
1. Issue the show chassis power command and check to see how many feeds are
connected. The following example shows there are two AC input feeds connected
for PEM 0 and one AC input feed connected for PEM 1. This indicates that the DIP
switch for PEM 0 is in position 1 and the DIP switch for PEM 1 is in position 0. These
are the proper settings.
# run show chassis power

PEM 0:
State: Online
AC input: OK (2 feed expected, 2 feed connected)
Capacity: 4100 W (maximum 4100 W)
DC output: 855 W (zone 0, 15 A at 57 V, 20% of capacity)
PEM 1:
State: Online
2. Issue the show chassis alarms command to see if there are any active alarms on the
DIP switch:

> show chassis alarms

4 alarms currently active
Alarm time Class Description 2013-01-11 14:48:26 UTC Minor PEM 0 Dipswitch 0
Feed Connection 2
3. If the show chassis alarms output shows an alarm on Dipswitch, issue the show chassis
power command to check the DIP switch position.
# run show chassis power

PEM 0:
State: Online
In this example, the DIP switch is in the wrong position since there is one AC feed
expected but two AC feeds are connected. Change the DIP switch to position 1. This
should clear the alarm.
NOTE: Changing the DIP switch position does not impact traffic. However,
it is always recommended to do so in a maintenance window.
Related • MX480 AC Power Supply Description on page 100

Documentation


PART 7
Contacting Customer Support and

Returning the Chassis or Components
• Contacting Customer Support on page 457
• Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 459
• Packing and Returning Components on page 473


CHAPTER 31
Contacting Customer Support
Contacting Customer Support
You can contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) 24 hours a day,
7 days a week in one of the following ways:
• On the Web, using the Case Manager link at:
http://www.juniper.net/support/
• By telephone:
From the US and Canada: 1-888-314-JTAC
From all other locations: 1-408-745-9500
If contacting JTAC by phone, enter your 12-digit case number followed by the # key if
this is an existing case, or press the * key to be routed to the next available support
engineer.
When requesting support from JTAC by telephone, be prepared to provide the following
information:
• Your existing case number, if you have one
• Details of the failure or problem
• Type of activity being performed on the platform when the problem occurred
• Configuration data using one or more of the show commands

Documentation


CHAPTER 32
Locating Component Serial Numbers
• Displaying MX480 Router Components and Serial Numbers on page 459

• MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label on page 461
• MX480 SCB Serial Number Label on page 462
• MX480 DPC Serial Number Label on page 463
• MX480 FPC Serial Number Label on page 464
• MX480 Power Supply Serial Number Label on page 468
• MX480 Routing Engine Serial Number Label on page 470
Displaying MX480 Router Components and Serial Numbers
Before contacting Juniper Networks, Inc. to request a Return Materials Authorization

(RMA), you must find the serial number on the router or component. To display all of the
router components and their serial numbers, enter the following command-line interface
(CLI) command:

Hardware inventory:
Item Version Part number Serial number Description
Chassis JN10B6596AFB MX480
Midplane REV 01 710-017414 MX480
FPM Board
PEM 0 Rev 1E 740-017330 000083 PS 2.0kW; 90-264V AC
PEM 1 Rev 1E 740-017330 000089 PS 2.0kW; 90-264V AC
PEM 2 Rev 1E 740-017330 000109 PS 2.0kW; 90-264V AC
Routing Engine 0 REV 06 740-015113 1000694968 RE-S-1300
Routing Engine 1 REV 06 740-015113 1000694976 RE-S-1300
CB 0 REV 07 710-013385 KA5867 MX SCB
CB 1 REV 07 710-013385 KA5863 MX SCB
FPC 0 REV 01 750-018124 KA5710 DPCE 4x 10GE R
CPU REV 06 710-013713 KB4077 DPC PMB
PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 1x 10GE(LAN/WAN)
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-014289 C712XU01J XFP-10G-SR
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-014289 C712XU01E XFP-10G-SR


FPC 1 REV 01 750-018122 JZ8183 DPCE 40x 1GE R
CPU REV 06 710-013713 KA0454 DPC PMB
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SNB SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 P9M0TYY SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SQ9 SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SQR SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1L2P SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 NON-JNPR MTC009778 SFP-T
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1L2N SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SQD SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1L27 SFP-SX
FPC 2 REV 01 750-018122 KA5576 DPCE 40x 1GE R
CPU REV 06 710-013713 KB3961 DPC PMB
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PB83DK1 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PB82174 SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PB81U9C SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PB8329N SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PB832A0 SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 PB82A3T SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 01 740-011782 PB835F7 SFP-SX
Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011782 PB81NBR SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 01 740-011782 PB82CGR SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 PB81NC4 SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PB81NBS SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PB8390V SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PB75EFU SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PB82VHH SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PB832DA SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 P9M0U35 SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 01 740-011782 P9M0U3C SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011782 P9M0U3B SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1YWF SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1Z55 SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1YXD SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011785 P6N0TQ1 SFP-LX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1Z4Q SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1XDZ SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SQQ SFP-SX
Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011782 P8N1Y6L SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 01 740-011613 PAJ4SYW SFP-SX
Xcvr 9 0 NON-JNPR AM06211TK7 SFP-SX
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1XB3 SFP-SX
Xcvr 1 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1YHY SFP-SX
Xcvr 2 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1XDV SFP-SX
Xcvr 3 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1Z7B SFP-SX
Xcvr 4 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1YWE SFP-SX
Xcvr 5 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1X5W SFP-SX
Xcvr 6 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1Z5E SFP-SX
Xcvr 7 REV 01 740-011782 PAR1XB6 SFP-SX
Xcvr 8 REV 01 740-011785 PAQ0ZAS SFP-LX

Chapter 32: Locating Component Serial Numbers
Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-011785 PAQ0ZA8 SFP-LX

FPC 5 REV 08 710-014219 KB0710 DPC 4x 10GE R
CPU REV 06 710-013713 KB1015 DPC PMB
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-014279 733019A00156 XFP-10G-LR
Xcvr 0 REV 01 740-014279 733019A00192 XFP-10G-LR
Fan Tray Left Fan Tray
Most components also have a small rectangular serial number ID label (see
Figure 175 on page 461) attached to the component body.
Figure 175: Serial Number ID Label
Related • MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label on page 461

Documentation
MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label
The chassis serial number is located on the side of the chassis (see Figure 176 on page 462).

Figure 176: MX480 Chassis Serial Number Label
Related • Displaying MX480 Router Components and Serial Numbers on page 459
Documentation
MX480 SCB Serial Number Label
The serial number is located on the right side of the top of the SCB (see

Figure 177: SCB Serial Number Label
g004068
Serial number
ID label
Related • Replacing an MX480 SCB on page 381

Documentation
• Returning a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc. on page 474
• Guidelines for Packing Hardware Components for Shipment on page 474
MX480 DPC Serial Number Label
The serial number label is located on the center of the right side of the DPC (see

Figure 178: DPC Serial Number Label
OK/FAIL
Serial number
0/0
TUNNEL
LINK
ID label
AA567 8
1/0
TUNNEL
LINK
2/0
TUNNEL
LINK
g004067
3/0
TUNNEL
LINK
Related • Replacing an MX480 DPC on page 323

Documentation
MX480 FPC Serial Number Label
The serial number label is located on the center of the right side of the FPC (see

Figure 179: FPC Serial Number Label
Serial number ID label
AA1234
g004410
Related • Replacing an MX480 FPC on page 332

Documentation
MX480 MIC Serial Number Label
The serial number label location varies per MIC (see Figure 181 on page 466 and
Figure 182 on page 466). The exact location may be slightly different on different MICs,

depending on the placement of components on the MIC board (see Figure 180 on page 466,
Figure 181 on page 466, Figure 182 on page 466, and Figure 183 on page 466).
Figure 180: 2-Port MIC Serial Number Label Figure 181: 4-Port MIC Serial Number Label
g004931
g004930
Serial number
Serial number
ID label
ID label
Figure 182: 20-Port MIC Serial Number Label Figure 183: 40-Port MIC Serial Number Label
Serial
number
ID label
g004932
g004933
Serial number
ID label

Related • Replacing an MX480 MIC on page 337

Documentation
MX480 MPC Serial Number Label
The serial number label is near the connectors located on the left side of the MPC when
it is oriented vertically (see Figure 184 on page 467).
Figure 184: MPC Serial Number Label

MX-MPC1-3D-Q
OK/Fail
Serial number ID
label (yellow, on
opposite side)
g004927
Related • Replacing an MX480 MPC on page 345

Documentation

MX480 PIC Serial Number Label
The serial number label is located on the right side of the PIC (see Figure 185 on page 468),
when the PIC is vertically oriented (as it would be installed in the router). The exact
location may be slightly different on different PICs, depending on the placement of
components on the PIC board.
Figure 185: PIC Serial Number Label
Related • Replacing an MX480 PIC on page 350

Documentation
MX480 Power Supply Serial Number Label
The serial number label is located on the top of the AC power supply (see
The serial number label is located on the top of the DC power supply faceplate (see

Figure 186: AC Power Supply Serial Number Label
Figure 187: DC Power Supply Serial Number Label
Related • Replacing an MX480 AC Power Supply on page 367

Documentation

MX480 Routing Engine Serial Number Label
The serial number label is located on the left side of the top of the Routing Engine (see
Figure 188 on page 470 and Figure 189 on page 470).
Figure 188: Routing Engine Serial Number Label

Serial number ID label
AAAA0000
g004063
Figure 189: RE-S-X6-64G Routing Engine Serial Number Label
Related • Replacing an MX480 Routing Engine on page 301

Documentation



CHAPTER 33
Packing and Returning Components
• Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization on page 473

• Packing the MX480 Router for Shipment on page 475
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Material Authorization
If you are returning a device or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
After locating the serial number of the device or hardware component you want to return,
open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on the Web or
by telephone.
Before you request an RMA number from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following
information:
• Your existing case number, if you have one
• Serial number of the component
• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address
• Details of the failure or problem
• Type of activity being performed on the device when the problem occurred
• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands
You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on the Web or by telephone:
• Case Manager at CSC: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC1-888-314-5822, toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico
NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll free

numbers, see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.

If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 12-digit case number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next
available support engineer.
The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return
of the component.
Related • Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 506

Documentation
Guidelines for Packing Hardware Components for Shipment
To pack and ship individual components:
• When you return components, make sure they are adequately protected with packing
materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the
carton.
• Use the original shipping materials if they are available.
• Place individual components in antistatic bags.
• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
CAUTION: Do not stack any of the hardware components.

Documentation
Returning a Hardware Component to Juniper Networks, Inc.
In the event of a hardware failure, please contact Juniper Networks, Inc. to obtain a Return
Material Authorization (RMA) number. This number is used to track the returned material
at the factory and to return repaired or new components to the customer as needed.
NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks, Inc. unless you
have first obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks, Inc. reserves the right
to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments are returned
to the customer by collect freight.
For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support Web
page at http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.
For product problems or technical support issues, contact the Juniper Networks Technical
Assistance Center (JTAC) by using the Case Manager link at

Chapter 33: Packing and Returning Components
http://www.juniper.net/support/ or at 1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or

1-408-745-9500 (from outside the United States).
To return a defective hardware component:
1. Determine the part number and serial number of the defective component.
2. Obtain an RMA number from the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
You can send e-mail or telephone as described above.
3. Provide the following information in your e-mail message or during the telephone call:
• Part number and serial number of component
• Your name, organization name, telephone number, and fax number
• Description of the failure
4. The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for
return of the component.
5. Pack the component for shipment.
Related • Contacting Customer Support on page 457

Documentation
Packing the MX480 Router for Shipment
To pack the router for shipment:
1. Retrieve the shipping crate and packing materials in which the router was originally
shipped. If you do not have these materials, contact your Juniper Networks
representative about approved packaging materials.
2. On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine,
enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router
software. (If two Routing Engines are installed, also issue the command on the backup
Routing Engine.)
user@host> request system halt
Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted.
For more information about the command, see request system halt.

4. Shut down power to the router by pressing the AC input switch or DC circuit breaker
for all power supplies to the off (O) position.
5. Disconnect power from the router.
6. Remove the cables that connect to all external devices.
7. Remove all field replaceable units (FRUs) from the router.
8. Remove the router from the rack:
• If you are using a mechanical lift, place the lift platform under the router, unscrew
and remove the mounting screws from the rack, and move the router to the shipping
crate.
• If you are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is fully supported by a
shelf or another router, unscrew and remove the mounting screws from the rack.
Three people can then lift the router and move it to the shipping crate.
• If you are not using a mechanical lift and the router weight is not fully supported by
a shelf or another router, three people should grasp the router while a fourth person
unscrews and removes the mounting screws from the rack. The three lifters can
then move the router to the shipping container.
9. Place the router in the shipping crate or onto the pallet. If on a pallet, bolt the router
to the pallet.
10. Cover the router with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on top of and around
the router.
11. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.
12. Securely tape the box closed or place the crate cover over the router.
13. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.

PART 8
Safety and Compliance Information

• General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 479
• Installation and Maintenance Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 487
• Radiation and Laser Warnings on page 495
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 499
• Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 505
• Agency Approvals and Compliance Statements on page 519


CHAPTER 34
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
• General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 479

• Definitions of Safety Warning Levels on page 480
• Qualified Personnel Warning on page 482
• Fire Safety Requirements on page 483
• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 484
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the device from damage.
The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working
environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.
• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for
this device. Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system
services.
• Keep the area around the device clear and free from dust before, during, and after
installation.
• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could
become caught in the device.
• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous
to your eyes.
• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed
for wet environments.
• Operate the device only when it is properly grounded.

• Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this device is
permanently connected to earth.
• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.
• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are
provided in the hardware documentation for this device. Such an action could cause
severe electrical shock.
• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an
action could result in electrical shock or fire.
• Avoid spilling liquid onto the chassis or onto any device component. Such an action
could cause electrical shock or damage the device.
• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted
and that the installation screws are fully tightened.
Related • AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 508

Documentation
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 505
• Installation Instructions Warning on page 487
• Grounded Equipment Warning on page 493
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels
The documentation uses the following levels of safety warnings (there are two Warning
formats):
NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or you
might overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.
CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to prevent minor

injury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the device.
WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause
bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards

Chapter 34: General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for
preventing accidents.
Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in

een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige
apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische
schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard
maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.
Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi

johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa,
ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista
onnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista.
Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez

dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels.
Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés
par les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures
couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents.
Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer

Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der
Arbeit an irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen
Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur
Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.
Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione

potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi
apparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed
essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som

kan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare
oppmerksom på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt
gjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.
Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que
lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer
equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos
eléctricos, e com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis
acidentes.
¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su

integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos
que entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos
estándar de prevención de accidentes.
Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation

som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning

måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt
förfarande för att förebygga skador.
Related • General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 479

Documentation
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 495
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for the ACX5000 Router
• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 484
Qualified Personnel Warning
WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the
device.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en

bevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden.
Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa

tämän laitteen.
Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé

par du personnel qualifié et compétent.
Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder

auswechseln lassen.
Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato

ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.
Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller
bytte ut dette utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por

pessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados

exclusivamente por personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.
Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad

och kvalificerad personal.


Documentation
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 508
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines for Switches
Fire Safety Requirements
In the event of a fire emergency, the safety of people is the primary concern. You should
establish procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety
training, and properly provision fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a
fire emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable
for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire, safety, and
electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you install and operate your equipment.
Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to
the equipment at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive
fire retardants, to extinguish the fire.
Fire Suppression Equipment

Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide
and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire extinguishers
displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire
on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling, you should use
this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves
residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers). The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium
phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult to clean. In addition, in the presence of minute
amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and
corrodes most metals.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is
subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to
be irreparably damaged.
NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher
to control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks device. If a dry chemical fire
extinguisher is used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service
agreement.

We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an

environmentally responsible manner.

Documentation
• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 517
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden
WARNING: The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains

socket-outlet.
Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.
Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.

Documentation
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage to an MX480 Router
Many router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity. Some
components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can easily generate
potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing
material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe the following
guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage, which
can cause intermittent or complete component failures:
• Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap, and make sure that it is in direct contact
with your skin.
CAUTION: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD
strap. The measurement should be in the range of 1 through 10 Mohms.
• When handling any component that is removed from the chassis, make sure the
equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
• Avoid contact between the component and your clothing. ESD voltages emitted from
clothing can still damage components.
• When removing or installing a component, always place it component-side up on an

antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an electrostatic bag (see
Figure 190 on page 485) . If you are returning a component, place it in an electrostatic
bag before packing it.

Figure 190: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag


CHAPTER 35
Installation and Maintenance Safety

Guidelines and Warnings

• MX480 Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 488
• Ramp Warning on page 489
• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings on page 489
Installation Instructions Warning
WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the device
to a power source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem

met de voeding verbindt.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter

les directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an

die Stromquelle anschließen.
Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema

all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte

de energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema

a la red de alimentación.

Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess

strömförsörjningsenhet.

Documentation
MX480 Chassis Lifting Guidelines
The weight of a fully configured chassis is about 163.5 lb (74.2 kg). Observe the following
guidelines for lifting and moving the router:
• Before moving the router, verify that the intended site meets the specified power,
environmental, and clearance requirements.
• Do not attempt to lift a fully configured router by yourself. Using a mechanical lift to
maneuver the router into a rack is recommended. If a lift cannot be used, a minimum
of two people must lift the router, and you must remove components from the chassis
before lifting.
To lift routing devices and components, use the following lifting guidelines:
• Up to 39.7 lbs (18 kg) 1 person lift.
• 39.7 lbs (18 kg) to 70.5 lbs (32 kg) 2 or more person lift.
• 70.5 lbs (32 kg) to 121.2 lbs (55 kg) 3 or more person lift.
• Above 121.2 lbs (55 kg) material handling systems (such as levers, slings, lifts and
so on) must be used. When this is not practical, specially-trained persons or systems
must be used (riggers or movers).
• Before lifting or moving the router, disconnect all external cables.
• As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your
back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your
body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid.

Documentation
page 202

Chapter 35: Installation and Maintenance Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Ramp Warning
WARNING: When installing the device, do not use a ramp inclined at more
than 10 degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10
graden.
Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.
Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10

degrés.
Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.
Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados
Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.

Documentation
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings
Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the device is installed is evenly and securely
supported. Uneven mechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.
WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the device

in a rack, take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains
stable. The following directives help maintain your safety:
• The device must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building

structure.
• The device should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit
in the rack.

• When mounting the device on a partially filled rack, load the rack from the
bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
• If the rack is provided with stabilizing equipment, install the stabilizers

before mounting or servicing the device in the rack.
Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in

een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale
voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel
blijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te
verzekeren:
• De Juniper Networks switch moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die

aan een bouwsel is verankerd.
• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel
het enige in het rek is.
• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het
rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan
in het rek.
• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de

stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het
daar een servicebeurt geeft.
Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä,
on noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi,
jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty

rakennukseen.
• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen

sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista

telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siinä.
Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de

montage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des
précautions spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives
ci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à la
structure du bâtiment.
• Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée
dans le bas.

• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le

casier de bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
• Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs

avant de monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.
Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten

dieser Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen,
um sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien
sollen zur Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
• Der Juniper Networks switch muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das
in der Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell
angebracht werden.
• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das
Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten
im Gestell anzubringen ist.
• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die

Stabilisatoren zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen
oder sie warten.
Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione

di questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per
garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite
per garantire la sicurezza personale:
• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve

essere fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.
• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta
dell'unica unità da montare nel supporto.
• Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno,

caricare il supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante
sistemato sul fondo del supporto.
• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi

prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på

denne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet
er stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
• Juniper Networks switch må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til

bygningsstrukturen.
• Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste
enheten i kabinettet.

• Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal

kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst
i kabinettet.
• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene

installeres før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i
kabinettet.
Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta

unidade numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar
de que o sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes
ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com segurança:
• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à

estrutura do edificio.
• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja
esta a única unidade a ser montada.
• Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os

itens mais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo
para cima.
• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de

montar ou reparar a unidade.
¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un

bastidor, o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho
cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad,
proceda según las siguientes instrucciones:
• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la

estructura del edificio.
• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única

unidad en el mismo.
• Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,

comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando
el equipo más pesado en la parte inferior.
• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes

de montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.
Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför

underhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda
försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande
riktlinjer ges för att trygga din säkerhet:

• Juniper Networks switch måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad

i byggnadens struktur.
• Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras

längst ned på ställningen.
• Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen

fyllas nedifrån och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
• Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast

innan enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.

Documentation
Grounded Equipment Warning
WARNING: The device is intended to be grounded. During normal use, ensure

that you have connected earth ground to the chassis.
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de

host-computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että

isäntälaite on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil
hôte est relié à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das
Host-Gerät während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi

che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale
utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet

ved normalt bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host
se encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo

principal esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är

jordad vid normal användning.


Documentation

CHAPTER 36
Radiation and Laser Warnings

• Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning on page 497
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Juniper Networks devices are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a
Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a
Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825-1 requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
• General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 495

• Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 496
• Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 496
• Laser Beam Warning on page 496
General Laser Safety Guidelines

When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following
safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:
• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.
WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser

radiation. The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the
retina, so focusing the eye directly on a laser source—even a low-power
laser—could permanently damage the eye.

Class 1 Laser Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 laser product.
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
Class 1 LED Product Warning
WARNING: Class 1 LED product.
Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.
Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.
Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.
Laser Beam Warning
WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical
instruments.

Chapter 36: Radiation and Laser Warnings
Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met

optische instrumenten.
Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen
avulla.
Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide

d'instruments optiques.
Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen
Geräten prüfen.
Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per
osservarlo direttamente.
Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.
Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.
¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con

instrumentos ópticos.
Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom
optiska instrument.

Documentation
• Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning on page 497
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning
WARNING: Because invisible radiation might be emitted from the aperture

of the port when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and
do not stare into open apertures.
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de

poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling
aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.
Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun

kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso
avoimiin aukkoihin.

Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du

port lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé
de ne pas regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.
Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,

wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den
Strahlungen auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono
essere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle
radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.
Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne,
fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet
en fiberkabel.
Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício

da via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado,
deverá evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para
orifícios que se encontrarem a descoberto.
¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible
cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las
aperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.
Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten

fiberkabel och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte
stirra in i oskyddade öppningar.

Documentation

CHAPTER 37
Maintenance and Operational Safety

Guidelines and Warnings
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
While performing the maintenance activities for devices, observe the following guidelines
and warnings:
• Battery Handling Warning on page 499

• Jewelry Removal Warning on page 500
• Lightning Activity Warning on page 501
• Operating Temperature Warning on page 502
• Product Disposal Warning on page 503
Battery Handling Warning
WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion.

Replace a battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen

wordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat
door de fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig
fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.
Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä

vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on
valmistajan suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.
Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.

Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent,
recommandée par le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.

Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.

Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller
empfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den
Anweisungen des Herstellers.
Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte.
Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten.
Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata

correttamente. Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata
dal produttore. Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.
Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.

Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente
recomendado pelo fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as
instruções do fabricante.
¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera

incorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el
equivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas
según las instrucciones del fabricante.
Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med

samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande.
Följ tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
Jewelry Removal Warning
WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines,

remove jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat
up when connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or can
be welded to the terminals.
Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische

leidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges)
verwijderen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en
aarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het
metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen.
Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden

parissa, ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien).
Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan
kanssa, ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet
kiinni liitäntänapoihin.
Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques,

ôter tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés

Chapter 37: Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
à l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui

peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.
Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,
jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.
Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde
angeschlossen werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachen
oder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt werden.
Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di

alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti
ed orologi). Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti
di alimentazione e massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo
può saldarsi ai terminali.
Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du

skal arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som
er koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige
brannskader eller smelte fast til polene.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de

corrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e
relógios). Os objectos metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e
em contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou
ficarem soldados aos terminais.
¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de

alimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los
objetos de metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra,
lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos metálicos
queden soldados a los bornes.
Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)

innan du arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt
hettas upp när de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka
allvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med
kontakterna.
Lightning Activity Warning
WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during

periods of lightning activity.
Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet
aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.
Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota

kaapeleita ukkosilmalla.

Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les

câbles pendant un orage.
Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an
bzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi

durante un temporale con fulmini.
Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet
når det tordner eller lyner.
Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos

de mau tempo (trovoada).
¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el

transcurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.
Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller
koppla loss kablar.
Operating Temperature Warning
WARNING: To prevent the device from overheating, do not operate it in an

area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature. To
prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance around
the ventilation openings.
Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networks

router dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats
waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° C wordt
overschreden. Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er
minstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.
Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei

saa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun
ympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen
ympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.
Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper

Networks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante
est supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un
espace d'au moins 15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.
Warnung Um einen Router der switch vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser
nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur
das empfohlene Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß
zu verhindern, achten Sie darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um
die Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.

Chapter 37: Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in un

locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitare
che la circolazione dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm
di fronte alle aperture delle ventole.
Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks switch

Disse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale
omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringen
rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt
luftsirkulasjon.
Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks

switch, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura
máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar,
deixe pelo menos um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks

switch se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la
temperatura ambiente máxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir la
restricción de la entrada de aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor
de las aperturas para ventilación.
Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genom att inte
använda den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade
omgivningstemperaturen på 40° C överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen
inskränks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring
ventilationsöppningarna.
Product Disposal Warning
WARNING: Disposal of this device must be handled according to all national

laws and regulations.
Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en

voorschriften te worden afgedankt.
Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia

valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.
Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée

conformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.
Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften

entsprechend entsorgt werden.
Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita

osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia

Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale

lover og forskrifter.
Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo

com os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.
¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las
leyes y regulaciones nacionales
Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets
alla lagar och föreskrifter.

Documentation

CHAPTER 38
Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 506
• AC Power Disconnection Warning on page 509
• DC Power Copper Conductors Warning on page 509
• DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 510
• DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 512
• DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 513
• DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 514
• Midplane Energy Hazard Warning on page 516
• Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 516
• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 517
General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings
WARNING: Certain ports on the device are designed for use as intrabuilding
(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in
GR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposed outside plant (OSP)
cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning
surges and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding ports must not
be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring.
The intrabuilding ports on the device are suitable for connection to
intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The addition of primary
protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfaces
metallically to OSP wiring.
CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a device, attach an

electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to an ESD point and place the
other end of the strap around your bare wrist. Failure to use an ESD grounding
strap could result in damage to the device.

• Install the device in compliance with the following local, national, and international
electrical codes:
• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States

National Electrical Code.
• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1

through Part 7.
• Evaluated to the TN power system.
• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.
• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that
if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
• Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before
grounding connections are made.
• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace.
• Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before
starting to work.
• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded
power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
• Operate the device within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.
• To ensure that the device and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly, use
the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, and make
certain they are in good condition.
You can remove and replace many device components without powering off or
disconnecting power to the device, as detailed elsewhere in the hardware documentation
for this device. Never install equipment that appears to be damaged.

Documentation
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage
Device components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from
static electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You
can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic
or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe
the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:

Chapter 38: Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings
• Always use an ESD grounding strap when you are handling components that are subject
to ESD damage, and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.
If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see
Figure 190 on page 485) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the device
with the other hand immediately before inserting the component into the device.
WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD
grounding strap. The measurement must be in the range 1 through
10 Mohms.
• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed
from the device, make sure the equipment end of your ESD grounding strap is attached
to the ESD point on the chassis.
If no grounding strap is available, touch the exposed, bare metal of the device to ground
yourself before handling the component.
• Avoid contact between the component that is subject to ESD damage and your clothing.
ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.
• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESD damage, always place
it component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an
antistatic bag (see Figure 190 on page 485). If you are returning a component, place it
in an antistatic bag before packing it.
Figure 191: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE
EXCEPT AT A
STATIC-FREE WORKSTATION
2
SFP
GE
6x 1
CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as Category 5e and Category 6

can get electrostatically charged. To dissipate this charge, always ground
the cables to a suitable and safe earth ground before connecting them to the
system.

Documentation

AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
CAUTION: For devices with AC power supplies, an external surge protective

device (SPD) must be used at the AC power source.
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered devices:
• Note the following warnings printed on the device:
“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT
ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”
“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.

AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
• AC-powered devices are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a grounding-type
plug that fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent this safety feature.
Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical codes.
• You must provide an external certified circuit breaker rated minimum 20 A in the building
installation.
• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the AC-powered device.
The socket outlet must be near the AC-powered device and be easily accessible.
• For devices that have more than one power supply connection, you must ensure that
all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the device is completely
removed to prevent electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power cords (one
for each power supply).
Power Cable Warning (Japanese)
WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.

Documentation
• Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 516

AC Power Disconnection Warning
WARNING: Before working on the device or near power supplies, unplug all
the power cords from an AC-powered device.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen

werkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het
stopcontact te halen.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitään

asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation

électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant
alternatif.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten
arbeiten, ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare

il cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten
av strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut på
vekselstrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades

de fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades
de corrente alternada.
¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una

fuente de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos
de corriente alterna (CA).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter

skall du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.

Documentation
DC Power Copper Conductors Warning
WARNING: Use copper conductors only.

Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders.
Varoitus Käytä vain kuparijohtimia.
Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre.
Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Kupferleiter.
Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame.
Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger.
Aviso Utilize apenas fios condutores de cobre.
¡Atención! Emplee sólo conductores de cobre.
Varning! Använd endast ledare av koppar.
DC Power Disconnection Warning
WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure that

power is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate
the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the
circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the device handle of the circuit
breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert,

dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld
is. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het
schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait
de stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de
stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien

toimenpiteiden suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU
täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin,
käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi
niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous,

vérifier que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être
sûr, localiser le disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant
continu, placer le disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban
adhésif, bloquer la poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß

die Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß
sämtlicher Strom abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den
Unterbrecher für die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den

Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers
mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare

che il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione
sia scollegata (OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro
strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF
e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er

frakoblet likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved
å lokalisere strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen,
slå strømbryteren AV og teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que

desligou a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua.
Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no
painel que serve o circuito de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF
(Desligado), segurando nessa posição a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor
com fita isoladora.
¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la

alimentación del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para
asegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el
interruptor automático en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente
continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posición de Apagado (OFF),
y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición de
Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera

att strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all
strömförsörjning är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som
skyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare
i FRÅN-läget.

Documentation

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning
An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded
branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed
as part of the branch circuit that supplies the device. The grounding conductor is a
separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.
WARNING: When you install the device, the ground connection must always
be made first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd

het eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä

ensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours

être connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst
hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il

collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og

frakobles sist.
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a

ser ligada, e a última a ser desligada.
¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla

la última.
Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först

och kopplas bort sist.

Documentation
• DC Power Copper Conductors Warning on page 509

DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning
WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When
connecting power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to
+RTN, then –48 V to –48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring
sequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note
that the ground wire must always be connected first and disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde,

+RTN naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde
losgemaakt is en –48 naar –48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.
Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon,

+RTN varten +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys
on –48 V varten – 48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.
Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les

crochets appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre
approprié de câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à
–48 V. En débranchant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 V
à –48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse
devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois. Notez
que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la
dernière fois.
Warnung Die Stromzufuhr ist nur mit geeigneten Ringösen an das DC Netzteil
anzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zu
Erdanschluss, +RTN zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenz
zum Abtrennen der Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN und
dann Erdanschluss zu Erdanschluss. Es ist zu beachten dass der Erdanschluss
immer zuerst angeschlossen und als letztes abgetrennt wird.
Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore

CC usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La
corretta sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo
(da linea ad L) e da negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che
il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.
Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN,
–48 V til – 48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN
til +RTN, jord til jord.
Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales

apropiados en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia
apropiada del cableado se muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces –48 V
a –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado es
–48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió para moler. Observe que el
alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por último.

Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y

desconectar por último.
¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados

na extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada
da fiação é moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Ao
desconectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V,
+RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre
ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último. Anote que o fio à
terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último.
Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till
–48 V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN,
jord till jord.

Documentation
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning
WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring

terminations, such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These
terminations must be the appropriate size for the wires and must clamp both
the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te

gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het
gesloten-lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog
wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben
en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,

esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin
käännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin
sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.
Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles
terminales homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage
ouverte avec cosses rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la

taille qui convient aux fils et doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et
sur le conducteur.
Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene

Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder
gabelförmig, mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese
Abschlüsse sollten die angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl
die Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen.
Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come

quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori
devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante
che il conduttore.
Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente

ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med
oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold
til ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo

torcido, use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo
em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima.
Estas terminações de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os
respectivos cabos, e deverão prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio
condutor.
¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables

homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las
lengüetas de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del
tamaño apropiado para los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto
el aislante como el conductor.
Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter

användas, t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp.
Storleken på dessa kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste
kunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.

Documentation

Midplane Energy Hazard Warning
WARNING: High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the midplane.
Be careful not to contact the midplane connectors, or any component
connected to the midplane, with any metallic object while servicing
components.
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning
WARNING: The network device has more than one power supply connection.
All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit
completely.
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding;

alle verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze
eenheid volledig te verwijderen.
Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät

on irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.
Attention Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d'alimentation.

Pour supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons
d'alimentation doivent être débranchés.
Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom
gänzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt
sein.
Avvertenza Questa unità ha più di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico;

tutte le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere
l'elettricità dall'unità.
Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må

kobles helt fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.
Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de

alimentação de energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de
energia, deverão ser desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.
¡Atención! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de

alimentación; para eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben
desconectarse completamente todas las conexiones.
Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla

anslutningar måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten
är fullständigt bruten.


Documentation
Action to Take After an Electrical Accident
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.
2. Disconnect power from the device.
3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition
of the victim, then call for help.

Documentation


CHAPTER 39
Agency Approvals and Compliance

Statements
• Agency Approvals for MX480 Routers on page 519

• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 520
• Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements on page 521
• Compliance Statements for NEBS on page 521
• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for the MX480 Router on page 521
Agency Approvals for MX480 Routers
The routers comply with the following standards:
• Safety
• CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950-00/UL 1950 Third Edition, Safety of Information

Technology Equipment
• EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification, Requirements

and User's Guide
• EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
• EMC
• AS/NZS CISPR22:2009 (Australia/New Zealand)
• EN55022 Class A (Europe)
• FCC Part 15 Class A (USA)
• VCCI Class A (Japan)
• Immunity
• EN-61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
• EN-61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
• EN-61000-4-2 ESD
• EN-61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

• EN-61000-4-4 EFT
• EN-61000-4-5 Surge
• EN-61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity
• EN-61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags
• ETSI
• ETSI EN-300386-2 Telecommunication Network Equipment. Electromagnetic

Compatibility Requirements
The router is designed to comply with the following standards:
• NEBS
• GR-1089-Core: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications

Equipment
• SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)
• GR-63-Core: NEBS, Physical Protection
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
• Canada on page 520

• European Community on page 520
• Israel on page 520
• Japan on page 521
• United States on page 521
Canada
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)
European Community
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product might cause radio
interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures.
Israel

Chapter 39: Agency Approvals and Compliance Statements
Translation from Hebrew—Warning: This product is Class A. In residential environments,

the product might cause radio interference, and in such a situation, the user might be
required to take adequate measures.
Japan
The preceding translates as follows:
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this product is used near
a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment, it might cause radio interference.
Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual. VCCI-A.
United States
The hardware equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
might cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements
Batteries in this product are not based on mercury, lead, or cadmium substances. The
batteries used in this product are in compliance with EU Directives 91/157/EEC, 93/86/EEC,
and 98/101/EEC. The product documentation includes instructional information about
the proper method of reclamation and recycling.
Compliance Statements for NEBS
• The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network
(CBN).
• The equipment is suitable for installation in Network Telecommunications Facilities.
• The battery return connection is to be treated as an isolated DC return (i.e. DC-I), as

defined in GR-1089-CORE.
• For Juniper Networks systems with AC power supplies, an external surge protective
device (SPD) must be used at the AC power source.
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for the MX480 Router
The router complies with NEBS Level 3 requirements:

• GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection
• GR-1089-CORE: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications Equipment

mx480 Hwguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

mx480 Hwguide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

mx480 Hwguide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MX480 3D Universal Edge Router Hardware Guide

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

MX480 3D Universal Edge Router Hardware Guide

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

ii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. iii

Chapter 5 Host Subsystem Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

iv Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 6 Line Card Components and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. v

SCB Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Part 2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

vi Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Calculating Power Requirements for MX480 Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Part 3 Initial Installation and Configuration

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. vii

viii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Part 4 Installing and Replacing Components

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. ix

Chapter 24 Replacing Host Subsystem Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

x Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Chapter 26 Replacing Power System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Part 5 Maintaining the Chassis and Components

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xi

Chapter 29 Maintaining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Part 6 Troubleshooting Hardware

Part 7 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or

xii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

MX480 Power Supply Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Part 8 Safety and Compliance Information

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xiii

DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

xiv Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xv

Figure 33: AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Part 2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

Part 3 Initial Installation and Configuration

xvi Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Figure 64: Removing the Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Part 4 Installing and Replacing Components

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xvii

Figure 106: Installing an AS MXC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

xviii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Figure 148: Installing a Dual-Wide MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Part 5 Maintaining the Chassis and Components

Part 6 Troubleshooting Hardware

Part 7 Contacting Customer Support and Returning the Chassis or

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xix

Figure 182: 20-Port MIC Serial Number Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Part 8 Safety and Compliance Information

xx Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc. xxi

Table 32: MX2020 Supported Routing Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Part 2 Site Planning, Preparation, and Specifications

xxii Copyright © 2017, Juniper Networks, Inc.

Table 71: Grounding Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Part 3 Initial Installation and Configuration